jFrum  thp  Snliraru  nf 

Profpasor  Settjamtn  Imkinriiig?  Marfirlii 

lequeatljeb  hti  bttu  tn 
tiff  Uibrarg  of 

Prinrrtnn  uHteolngiral  ^mittarg 

P  J  5  Z I 3 
,"R56 


J>' 


/• 


I 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE; 


CONTAINING  A 

CHALDEE  GRAMMAR, 

CHIEFLY  FROM  THE  GERMAN  OF  PROFESSOR  G.  B.  WINER  ; 


CHRESTOMATHY, 

CONSISTING  OF  SELECTIONS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS,  AND  INCLUDING  NOTES  ON  THE 

BIBLICAL  CHALDEE  J  AND 


VOCABULARY, 

ADAPTED  TO  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 

WITH 

AN  APPENDIX 

ON  THE  RABBINIC  AND  SAMARITAN  DIALECTS. 

BY  ELIAS  RIGGS,  D.  D. 


THIRD  EDITION,  REVISED. 

r 


NEW  YORK  : 

ANSON  D.  F.  RANDOLPH,  683  BROADWAY. 

LONDON:  TRUBNER  &  CO. 

1866. 


-  Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1858,  by 

ELIAS  EIGGS, 

In  the  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern  District  of 

New  York. 


JOHN  F.  TEOW, 

PRINTER,  STEREOTTPER,  AND  ELECTROTYPER, 


CONTENTS. 


•  •  ♦ 


Preface  ............  5 

Introduction.  Chaldee  Language  and  Literature  ....  9 


GRAMMAR, 


PAGE 

PAET  I.— Orthography  and  Orthoepy. 


Consonants  .  .  .  .  .IT 

Vowels  .....  17 

Daghesh  .  .  .  .  .19 

Mappiq  .....  20 

Accents  .  .  .  .  .20 

Tone-syllable  ....  20 

Of  reading  unpointed  test  .  .  .21 

PAET  II.— Etymology. 

Derivation  and  inflection  of  words  gen¬ 
erally  .....  22 

Mutations  of  consonants  .  .  .23 

Vowel  changes  ....  25 

PEONOUNS  ;  personal  and  possessive  .  27 

Suffix  pronouns  ....  28 

Demonstrative  pronouns  .  .  .29 

Eelative  and  interrogative  *  .  29 

VEEB8  ;  derivation  and  inflection  .  30 

Conjugations  ....  30 

Moods  and  tenses  .  .  .  .32 

Inflection  of  the  Eegular  Verb  .  33 

Notes  on  the  Par.  of  the  Eegular  Verb  .  34 

Personal  inflection  of  the  participles  .  36 

Unfrequent  Conjugations  .  .  .37 

Quadriliteral  Verbs  ...  37 

Verbs  with  Gutturals  .  .  .37 

Eegular  Verbs  with  Suffix-pronouns  .  39 

IEEEGULAE  VEEBS  .  .  ..40 

Verbs  Pe  Nun  ....  41 

- Ayin  doubled  .  .  .41 

- Pe  Vodh  .  ...  42 

- Pe  Aleph  .  .  *  .44 

- Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Todh  .  44 

- Lamedh  Aleph  .  .  .45 

- doubly  anomalous  .  .  47 


PAGB 

Verbs  defective,  and  mixed  forms  4S 

- irregular,  with  suffix  pronouns  49 

NOUNS;  derivation  ...  50 

- gender  and  number  .  .  51 

- states ;  emphatic  .  .  52 

- Declension  .  .  .  .54 

Dec.  I.  .....  54 

Dec.  II.  Ill . 55 

Dec.  IV.  V . 56 

Dec.  VI.  VII . 57 

Dec.  VIII.  IX . 58 

Irregular  nouns  .  .  .  .59 

ADJECTIVES  ....  59 

Numerals  .  .  .  .  .59 

PAETICLES ;  adverbs  .  .  60 

Prepositions  .  .  .  .  .61 

Conjunctions  ....  61 

Interjections  .  .  .  .  .62 


PAET  III.— Syntax. 

PEONOUNS;  personal  .  .  63 

- relative  ,  .  .  .64 

- interrogative  ...  64 

- reflexive,  how  designated  .  .  64 

- indefinite - .  64 

- demonstrative -  .  .  64 

VEEBS  ;  use  of  the  tenses  .  .  64 

Peculiar  mode  of  designating  certain  tenses  65 
Use  of  the  Imperative  ...  66 

- Infinitive  .  .  .  .66 

- Participles  ...  66 

Optative  mood  .  .  .  .67 

Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject  67 
Impersonal  verbs;  how  designated  .  67 

Eegimen  of  verbs  ...  68 

Verbs  used  for  adverbs  .  .  .63 


4 


CONTENTS, 


Constructio  praegnans  . 

PAGE 

68 

Ellipsis 

.  68 

NOUNS ;  designation  of  cases 

69 

Use  of  the  cases 

.  70 

- plural 

70 

Repetition  of  nouns . 

.  70 

ADJECTIVES  . 

70 

PAGB 

Adjectives ;  comparison  of  .  .  .71 

NUMERALS  ....  71 

PARTICLES ;  adverbs  .  .  .72 

Negatives  ....  72 

Interrogative  particles  .  .  .73 

PARADIGMS  of  verbs,  nouns,  &c.  .  74 


CHRESTOMATHY. 


PART  I.— Select  sentences  from  the 
Targum  of  Onkelos  .  .  92 

PART  II— Extracts  from  the  Tar- 
gums. 

I.  History  of  tbe  fall,  Gen.  3.  Onkelos  .  97 

II.  The  same,  Gen.  3.  Pseudo-Jonathan  100 

III.  The  same,  Gen.  3.  Jerusalem  Targum  105 
IY.  Story  of  a  dispute  between  Cain  and 

Abel,  Gen.  4 :  8.  Jerusalem  Targum  .  108 
Y.  Marriage  of  Samson,  Judg.  14.  Jona¬ 
than  .....  109 

YI.  Prediction  of  Messiah’s  kingdom, 

Ps.  2.  Author  of  the  Targum  uncer¬ 
tain  .  .  .  .  .111 

VOCABULARY 

APPENDIX  A.  Rabbinical  D’alect 
“  B.  Samaritan  Dialect 


VII.  The  praises  of  Jehovah,  Ps.  8  .  112 

VIII.  Parable  of  the  vineyard,  Isa.  5 : 1—7. 

Jonathan  ....  112 

IX.  Extract  from  Isaiah’s  prediction  of 
the  Messiah,  Isa.  52 : 13 — 53 :  2.  Jona¬ 
than  .....  114 

X.  Aphorisms  of  Solomon,  Prov.  10 : 1 — 

12.  Targumist  unknown  .  .  115 


PART  III.— Notes  on  the  Biblical 
Chaldee. 


I.  Jeremiah  10 : 11  . 

• 

.  117 

II.  Daniel  2 :  4 — 7 :  28 

118 

III.  Ezra  4 :  8 — 6 : 18 

.  122 

IV.  Ezra  7 : 12—23 

122 

i 

.  123 

146 

.  -  " 

151 

PREFACE. 


The  first  edition  of  this  work  was  published  in  1832.  The  preface  to 
that  edition,  kindly  furnished  by  my  respected  instructor,  the  Rev. 
Moses  Stuart,  then  Professor  of  Biblical  Literature  in  the  Theological 
Seminary  at  Andover,  so  well  sets  forth  the  advantages  of  studying  the 
Chaldee  dialect,  that  I  retain  the  principal  portion  of  it  here.  Prof. 
Stuart  says  : 

“  The  study  of  the  Chaldee  language  is  worthy  of  commendation,  on 
various  grounds. 

u  (1)  A  knowledge  of  it  is  highly  important,  in  aiding  the  student 
more  fully  to  understand  the  Hebrew.  The  basis  of  Hebrew,  Chaldee, 
'  Syriac,  Arabic,  and  Samaritan,  is  well  known,  by  every  good  oriental 
scholar,  to  be  one  and  the  same.  Hence  it  may  be  truly  said,  that  he 
who  has  a  solid  and  fundamental  knowledge  of  the  genius  of  one  of 
these  languages,  possesses  a  real  knowledge  of  them  all.  The  meaning 
is,  that  the  genius,  structure,  idiom,  peculiarities  of  syntax,  and  a  mul¬ 
titude  of  the  words,  are  substantially  the  same  in  all;  so  that  he  who 
has  acquired  a  radical  acquaintance  with  any  one  of  them,  is  prepared  to 
make  very  rapid  and  easy  progress  in  them  all.  The  student  who  un¬ 
derstands  the  Hebrew,  has  only  to  read  through  the  pages  of  the  Gram¬ 
mar  in  the  following  sheets,  in  order  to  be  fully  satisfied  of  the  correct¬ 
ness  of  this  statement.  And  if  correct,  then  is  it  obvious,  that  in  every 
step  of  his  progress  in  the  study  of  the  Chaldee,  he  is  gaining  additional 
light  and  satisfaction  and  confirmation,  in  regard  to  the  meaning,  forms, 
and  structure  of  the  Hebrew.  "Who  will  say  that  the  study  of  Greek, 
Latin,  French  (specially  the  Norman),  and  Saxon,  does  not  cast  light 
upon  the  English  language  ?  Indeed,  how  can  it  ever  be  radically  un¬ 
derstood,  without  some  knowledge  of  these  languages  ?  But  the  Chal¬ 
dee  is  much  nearer  to  the  Hebrew,  than  any  of  these  languages  to  the 
English.  i 

“  (2)  The  most  important  ancient  helps  extant,  for  illustrating  the 


6 


PREFACE. 


meaning  of  Hebrew  words,  are  in  the  Chaldee  language.  The  two 
Targums  of  Onkelos  and  Jonathan  (which  extend  over  the  most  con¬ 
siderable  portion  of  the  Old  Testament)  are  more  to  be  depended  on 
in  difficult  cases,  than  any  other  aid  to  which  we  can  resort,  in  all  the 
store-houses  of  antiquity.  In  all  probability  they  are  older  than  the 
Christian  era  (excepting  a  few  later  adscititious  passages  that  have 
been  mingled  with  them)  ;  and  inasmuch  as  they  are  substantially  of  the 
same  idiom  with  the  Hebrew,  so  they  often  give  us  the  exact  shape,  as 
well  as  meaning  of  the  Hebrew,  better  than  any  or  all  other  ancient  ver¬ 
sions.  Let  the  attentive  student  note  the  use  which  Rosenmueller  has, 
with  so  manifest  advantage  to  his  commentaries,  often  made  of  the  Tar¬ 
gums.  We  may  reasonably  have  a  confidence  in  such  ancient  Chaldee 
translators,  that  they,  at  least  for  the  most  part,  rightly  understood 
their  original. 

“  (3)  Several  chapters  in  Ezra  and  Daniel,  as  exhibited  in  our  He¬ 
brew  Bibles,  are  in  the  Chaldee  language.  The  student,  then,  who  de¬ 
signs  to  acquire  the  power  of  consulting  all  the  original  Scriptures,  must 
make  himself  acquainted  with  the  Chaldee  language. 

“  (4)  Whoever  designs  to  pursue  Talmudic  and  Rabbinic  literature, 
or  to  be  able  to  judge  of  quotations  from  the  Talmud  or  the  Rabbins, 
must  have  some  acquaintance  with  the  Chaldee.  The  G-emara  of  the 
Talmud  is  Chalclaic  in  its  idiom ;  and  so  are  nearly  all  of  the  older 
Rabbinical  writings.  All  the  works  of  this  class  are,  indeed,  of  a  cor¬ 
rupt  dialect  and  mixed  nature ;  but  they  all  Ghaldaize. 

u  (5)  The  Chaldee  is  a  very  easy  conquest  to  the  well-grounded  He¬ 
brew  student.  A  few  weeks  devoted  to  it  will  enable  him  to  read  it 
with  as  much  facility  as  he  does  the  Hebrew.  Buxtorf’s  Lexicon 
Chald.  Talmud.  JRabbinicum ,  is  a  complete  store-house  of  these  dia¬ 
lects,  and  is  a  book  which  may  be  procured  for  a  trifle.  It  is  an  “  opus 
triginta  annorum  ;  ”  and  truly  a  paragon  in  this  species  of  lexicography. 
Every  biblical  student  should  possess  it.  A  Polyglott  Bible  will  pre¬ 
sent  the  student  with  all  the  Targums;  and  Buxtorf’s  JBiblia  Labbinica 
will  not  only  give  these,  but  all  the  distinguished  Rabbinic  commenta¬ 
ries,  such  as  those  of  Kimchi,  Jarchi,  Aben  Ezra,  etc.” 

After  some  remarks  respecting  the  publication  of  such  a  work  as 
the  Chaldee  Manual  in  this  country,  he  adds : 

“  As  to  the  work  itself,  the  plan  and  the  execution  are  throughout 
such  as  I  can  commend.  The  grammar  is  brief ;  but  quite  copious 
enough  for  the  student  who  is  well  versed  in  Hebrew.  In  the  text, 
notes,  and  lexicon  of  the  Chrestomathy,  will  be  found  all  that  is  needful 


PREFACE. 


7 


in  an  introduction  to  the  Chaldee  language.  With  Buxtorf’s  Lexicon 
and  the  Targums,  one  can  easily  make  his  own  way,  after  reading  this 
Chrestomathy.” 

A  second  edition  of  Prof.  Winer’s  Chaldee  Grammar  appeared  at 
Leipzig  in  1842,  revised  and  considerably  enlarged.  This  was  translated 
into  English  by  the  Bev.  Hor.  B.  Hackett,  D.D.,  Professor  of  Bibl.  Lit. 
in  Newton  Theol.  Institution,  and  published  at  Andover  in  1845. 

Revisiting  my  native  land,  after  an  absence  of  twenty-four  years  in 
the  foreign  missionary  service  in  Greece  and  Turkey,  it  seemed  to  me 
due  to  the  cause  of  Biblical  literature  that  I  should  revise  and  re-edit 
the  Chaldee  Manual.  This,  with  the  full  concurrence  and  approbation 
of  Prof.  Hackett,  I  have  undertaken,  availing  myself  of  whatever 
seemed  to  be  improvements  in  Prof.  Winer’s  second  edition,  and  incor¬ 
porating  numerous  manuscript  notes  of  my  own.  To  the  brief  view  of 
the  Rabbinic  dialect  in  the  Appendix  has  been  added  a  similar  view 
of  the  Samaritan.  The  former  is  a  Chaldaizing  Hebrew,  the  latter  a 
Hebraizing  Chaldee. 

I  trust  it  will  be  found  that  the  work  has  been  decidedly  enhanced 
in  value,  although  somewhat  diminished  in  size,  by  the  omission  from 
the  Chrestomathy  of  the  text  of  the  Biblical  Chaldee.  The  notes  are 
preserved,  and  in  the  first  edition  the  text  also  was  printed  for  conven¬ 
ience  of  reference ;  but  as  every  student  has  it  already  in  his  Hebrew 
Bible,  it  was  thought  that  his  interest  would  be  best  consulted  by  omit¬ 
ting  it  here,  and  thus  diminishing  the  size  of  the  book,  and  consequently 
its  price. 

This  edition  will  be  issued  simultaneously  in  this  country  and  in 
Great  Britain.  It  is  offered  to  the  lovers  of  biblical  and  oriental  study 
in  both  countries,  with  a  prayer  to  the  Author  of  the  Scriptures,  that 
He  would  condescend  to  employ  it  as  a  means  of  furthering  in  these 
highly  favored  lands  the  critical  study  of  the  Sacred  Volume. 

ELIAS  RIGGS. 


New  York,  January,  1858. 


In  tlie  tables  of  pronouns  and  numerals,  and  generally  in  the  grammar,  unusual 
forms  are  included  in  parentheses. 

In  references  to  the  Scriptures,  where  the  name  of  the  Targum  is  not  given,  that 
of  Onkelos  is  to  be  understood,  when  the  passages  cited  are  from  the  Pentateuch, 
and  that  of  J onathan,  when  they  are  taken  from  the  prophets. 

Distinct  meanings  of  words  are  separated,  in  the  vocabulary,  by  semicolons. 
Where  two  or  more  words  are  employed  to  express  or  illustrate  the  same  definition, 
they  are  separated  by  commas. 


INTRODUCTION. 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 

- ••• - - 


The  Aramean,  one  of  tlie  three  grand  divisions*  of  the 
Shemitish  or  Oriental  languages,  comprises  two  principal 
subdivisions ;  viz.  the  Syriac,  sometimes  called,  by  way 
of  distinction,  West  Aramean ,  and  the  Chaldee,  or  East 
Aramean .  The  appropriate  region  of  the  latter  was  the 
province  of  Babylonia,  between  the  Euphrates  and  Tigris, 
the  original  inhabitants  of  which  (related  in  respect  of 
their  origin  to  the  Hebrews  and  Syrians,  and  who  should 
not  be  confounded  with  the  Chaldeans ,  a  tribe  which 
occupied  that  region  much  later)  cultivated  this  language 
as  a  distinct  dialect,  and  communicated  it  to  the  Jews 
during  the  Babylonian  exile. 

The  Chaldeans  [XaASatoi,  d^bd]  originated,  as  is  evident  from  a 
comparison  of  the  statements  of  Greek  authors,  (particularly  Xenophon,) 
with  those  of  the  Bible,  in  the  mountains  of  Armenia.  Partly  overcome 
by  the  Assyrians,  they  removed  to  the  plains  of  Mesopotamia,  and  espe¬ 
cially  of  Babylonia,  in  the  seventh  century  B.  C.  They  afterwards  not 
only  gained  their  own  independence,  but  rose  to  universal  dominion  on 
the  ruins  of  the  great  Assyrian  Monarchy.  The  name  Babylonians  (Ezra 
4  :  9)  we  apply,  on  the  other  hand,  to  the  original  inhabitants  of  Babylonia, 
who  were  of  a  Shemitish  (Aramean)  stock.  To  them  belonged  the  lan¬ 
guage  of  which  we  are  treating  ;  and  it  may  therefore  not  inappropriately 


*  Aramean,  Hebrew,  and  Arabic. 


10 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


be  termed  Babylonish.  For,  that  the  Chaldeans  did  not  speak  the  same 
language  as  the  descendants  of  Abraham  who  settled  in  Palestine  did, 
nor  even  a  kindred  dialect,  is  clear  from  the  Chaldaic  names  of  gods, 
kings,  and  offices,  which  appear  in  the  Old  Testament  after  the  time  of 

Nebuchadnezzar,  and  which  are  connected  with  the  Medo-Persian  lan- 

/ 

guage,  (see  Gesenius’  Geschichte  der  Hebr.  Sprach.  p.  62  seq.),  but 
which  admit  no  adequate  explanation  from  the  Shemitish  dialects. 

The  appellation  Aramean  (language)  is  derived  from  2  Kings  18  :  26, 
Isa.  36  :  11,  Ez.  4  :  7,  and  Daniel  2:4.  In  the  first  two  passages  the  name 
rPB'ifct  is  applied  to  the  dialect  through  which  the  Assyrian  and  Chaldean 
Dfficers  made  themselves  understood  in  conversation  with  Hebrews  [Jews]  ; 
i.  e.  the  universal  language  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  Assyrian  [Chaldean] 
kingdom  on  this  side  the  Tigris.  See  Gesenius  Com.  zu  Jes.  Vol.  I.  p. 
956  seq.  In  the  last  case,  on  the  other  hand,  the  Chaldean  magians 
address  Nebuchadnezzar  in  Aramean  ;  which  is  indeed  remarkable.  It  is 
manifest  however  that  the  same  dialect  is  meant  from  the  sequel,  in  which 
the  speech  of  the  magians  is  inserted  in  the  Chaldee  dialect,  now  so 
called.  In  the  Greek  and  Latin  languages  the  term  Aramean  is  not 
wholly  wanting,  (comp.  Strabo  I.  p.  212.  ed.  Siebenkees,)  although 
Syriac  is  very  extensively  used  in  respect  to  Syria,  Mesopotamia,  and 
Babylonia,  and  specially  of  the  languages  of  these  countries.  Comp.  Xen. 
Cyrop.  7,  5.  31.  Jerome  on  Dan.  2 :  4.  Strabo  II.  p.  58. — On  the  name 
applied  to  the  Chaldee  by  the  Talmudists,  see  Lightfoot  Hor.  Heb.  on 
John  4  :  2,  and  below  No.  2. 

Chaldaic,  [D^bs  pbb]  in  the  Old  Testament,  signifies  the  language 
of  the  inhabitants  of  Chaldea  proper,  which,  according  to  Dan.  1 :  4,  was 
the  court-language  under  Nebuchadnezzar.  On  the  other  hand,  Philo 
uses  XaASat'orrt  of  the  Babylonian  also,  and  even  of  the  ancient  Hebrew. 

To  what  extent  the  Babyloneo-Aramean  was  cultivated,  as  a  separate 
dialect,  and  whether  it  ever  became  the  language  of  books,  history  does 
not  inform  us.  That  it  continued  in  Babylonia,  in  connection  with  the 
.proper  Chaldee,  as  the  language  of  ordinary  intercourse,  is  evident, 
partly  from  the  above-quoted  Scripture  passages  and  from  several  pas¬ 
sages  in  Xenophon’s  Cyropaedia,  but  especially  from  the  well  known 
circumstance,  that  the  exiled  Jews  found  the  Babylonish,  as  a  living 
language,  in  the  provinces  to  which  they  were  carried.  It  appears  also, 
from  the  remains  of  the  Pehlvi  dialect ,  that  the  Babylonish  produced  a 
very  great  influence  upon  the  ancient  language  of  the  Chaldeans,  (i.  e. 
the  Median.)  See  Gesenius  Com.  uber  Jes.  Vol.  I.  p.  947. 

2.  By  means  of  tlie  Jews  the  Chaldee  was  transplant¬ 
ed  into  Palestine,  where  it  became  the  vernacular  tongue, 
and  was  employed  by  them,  as  it  had  been  in  Babylonia, 
as  the  language  of  books.  Though  the  Aramean  as 
spoken  by  Jews  partook  somewhat  of  the  Hebrew  char- 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


11 


acter,  no  entire  or  very  important  corruption  of  it  took 
place  ;  and  to  this  circumstance  alone  the  Babylonians 
are  indebted  for  the  survival,  or  at  least  the  partial  pre¬ 
servation,  of  their  language,  which,  even  in  the  mother 
country,  has,  since  the  spread  of  Islamism,  become  ex¬ 
tinct. 

The  Jews  however  did  not,  immediately  after  their  return,  adopt  the 
Chaldee  exclusively.  It  was  not  until  the  time  of  the  Maccabees,  that 
this  language  completely  displaced  the  Old  Hebrew,  as  Gesenius  has  de¬ 
monstrated.  Gescli.  d.  Heb.  Spr.  p.  44.  Concerning  the  Chaldee  as  the 
language  of  books  among  the  Jews,  see  No.  3.  It  is  clear  from  Ezra  4  : 
7,  8,  that  it  was  also  the  government-language  of  the  western  provinces 
of  the  Persian  empire.  The  Samaritans  also  spoke  a  dialect  very  nearly 
resembling  the  Chaldee. 

In  later  times,  the  name  Hebrew  (e/3pat's,  e/3pats  Skx/Vcktos,  yXwcrcra  twv 
c/JpatW,  e/Jpauru),  was  transferred  to  the  Babylonish  dialect;  comp.  Prol. 
to  Sirach,  John  5  :  2,  19:13.  Acts  21  :  40,  22:2,  26:14.  Rev.  9:11,  16: 
16.  Jerome  Prol.  to  1  Macc.  It  was  even  called  7raTptos  yAtocrcra,  cfiMvrj. 
2  Mac.  13:  37.  Joseph.  Jewish  War,  Pref.  §  1.  The  Talmudists,  on  the 
other  hand,  call  the  Chaldee,  in  distinction  from  the  Old  Hebrew, 

See  Lightfoot  on  John  5:2.  Also  "lOtai1D  [Syriac]  Baba 
Kama  fob  83,  1.  Sot.  49.  2.  Pesach.  61.  1.  Compare  C.  H.  Zeibich  de 
lingua  Jud.  Heb.  tempore  Christi.  Viteb.  1741.  The  name  Chaldaic  did 
not,  however,  become  totally  obsolete.  We  find  it  again  in  Jerome,  Prol. 
ad  Tob.,  Judith. 

It  is  plain,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  that  the  Babylonish  language 
would,  as  spoken  and  written  by  Jews,  i.  e.  by  those  who  inhabited  Pales¬ 
tine,  receive  something  of  the  Hebrew  character.  That  such  was  the 
fact  will  be  more  particularly  shown  below,  No.  3.  Still  the  assertion  is 
incorrect,  that  the  Chaldee  which  we  have,  (and  which  has  come  to  us 
only  through  the  Jews,)  has  been  extraordinarily  corrupted  by  them,  or  is 
a  mixture  of  Hebrew  with  pure  Babylonian.  See  Michaelis  Abh.  v.  d. 
Syr.  Spr.  36  seq.  Wahl  Geschichte  d.  morg.  Sprachen.  §  78  seq.  Meyer 
Hermeneut.  d.  A.  T.  vol.  I.  p.  266.  Comp.  Jahn,  Einleitung  in  das  A.  T.  I. 
248,  284.  For,  from  a  comparison  of  the  Chaldee  (as  it  is  found  in  the  old 
Targums,  for  example)  with  the  Syriac,  which  we  learn  from  native  Sy¬ 
rian  authors,  it  is  evident  that  the  Chaldee  has  all  the  most  important  pe¬ 
culiarities  of  grammatical  form  and  syntactical  construction,  as  well  as  the 
greatest  part  of  its  stock  of  words — copia  verborum ,  in  common  with  the 
Syriac.  Its  prominent  features  are  those  of  an  Aramean  dialect.  On  the 
other  hand,  those  traits  in  which  the  Chaldee  differs  from  the  Syriac  and 
agrees  with  the  Hebrew,  are  few ;  and  those  few  relate  mostly  to  ortho¬ 
graphy  and  punctuation.  See  No.  4.  But  why  may  not  all  this  be  re¬ 
garded  as  dialectic  difference  ?  As  widely  as  the  Aramean  was  extended, 


12 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


it  was  natural  that,  like  other  languages  extensively  in  use,  it  should 
split  up  into  different  dialects.  The  Hebrew  and  Phenician,  notwithstand¬ 
ing  their  original  relation  and  vicinity,  exhibit  variations  of  this  kind.  Be¬ 
sides,  it  would  be  difficult,  on  the  other  supposition,  to  say  why  the  Jews 
varied  from  the  Aramean  character  in  so  few  points,  and  those  such  as  dif¬ 
fered  from  the  Hebrew  not  more  than  others  which  they  have  left  un¬ 
touched:  why  for  example,  they  said  blip1?  instead  of  bpp3,  fctbiap  instead 
of  ^bupp,  which  certainly  did  not  savor  more  of  foreign  idiom  than  ppba 
for  ,  stavi  for  di*n,  or  b'Jpa  for  biDp . 

The  periods  of  Persian  and  Grecian  supremacy  introduced  some  Per¬ 
sian  and  Greek  words  into  the  Babylonish  (though  less  than  into  the  Sy¬ 
riac)  ;  whence  even  the  Targum  of  Onkelos  is  not  free  from  Greek  words. 
But  the  Saracen  dominion,  which  commenced  with  the  invasion  of  Baby¬ 
lonia  by  the  hosts  of  the  Kaliphs,  A.  D.  640,  soon  swept  away  the  ancient 
language  of  the  country,  so  that  at  the  present  day  scarce  a  relic  of  it 
exists  in  the  East. 

Note  1.  There  is  a  modern  Syriac  dialect  spoken  by  the  Nestorians 
on  the  plain  of  Oroomiah  and  in  the  mountains  of  Koordistan.  See  Smith 
and  Dwight’s  Researches  in  Armenia,  vol.  II.  p.  212,  and  Perkins’  Resi¬ 
dence  in  Persia,  p.  11.  The  language  of  the  Jews  in  the  same  region 
closely  resembles  this.  So  do  those  remains  of  Aramean  which  are  found 
farther  south  in  Mesopotamia.  The  fact  that  these  remains  have  some¬ 
times  been  called  Chaldee,  has  perhaps  arisen  from  the  circumstance  that 
a  portion  of  the  nominal  Christians  among  whom  they  are  found  (viz., 
those  who  acknowledge  the  authority  of  the  see  of  Rome)  have  been 
designated  as  the  Chaldean  church  ;  or,  perhaps,  from  the  fact  that  these 
Christians  reside  in  the  region  of  the  ancient  Chaldea.  Niebuhr,  speaking 
of  these  remains,  (Reisebeschreibung,  vol.  II.  p.  352,)  calls  them  indiffer¬ 
ently  Chaldee  or  Syriac.  The  subject  is  worthy  of  further  investigation. 

Note  2.  Other  Aramean  dialects  are,  the  Samaritan ,  preserved  in  a 
translation  of  the  Pentateuch  and  a  few  hymns  ;  the  Zabian ,  in  the  books 
of  the  Zabians  or  Christians  of  St.  John ;  and  the  Palmyrene ,  only  in  in¬ 
scriptions.  The  first  of  these  is  more  nearly  related  to  Chaldee,  and  the 
others  to  Syriac. 


3.  The  principal  remains  of  the  Chaldee  dialect  in 
our  possession  are  the  following.  (1)  In  the  canonical 
books,  Ezra  4  :  8 — 6  :  18,  7 :  12 — 26.  Daniel  2  :  4 — 7  : 
28,  Jerem.  10  :  11.  (2)  A  class  of  translations  and 
paraphrases  of  the  books  of  the  O.  Test.  [Targums] 
which  have  originated  in  different  ages,  and  which  ex¬ 
hibit  very  considerable  varieties  of  linguistic  and  exegeti- 
cal  character. 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITEEATUEE. 


13 


Note  1.  In  respect  to  linguistic  character,  with  which  alone  we  are  at 
present  concerned,  these  remains  of  the  Babylonish  dialect  may  be  divided 
into  three  classes.  The  purest  Chaldee  (i.  e.  the  freest  from  Hebraism) 
appears  in  the  Targum  of  Onkelos  on  the  Pentateuch.  Similar  to  this  in 
respect  to  words,  orthography,  and  grammatical  construction,  but  somewhat 
inferior,  is  the  Biblical  Chaldee ,  which  is  interspersed  throughout  with 
Hebrew  peculiarities  ;  e.  g.  the  substitution  of  <"i  for  K  whether  quiescent 
or  not,  the  Plural  termination  d*1— ,  the  Dual  form,  the  conj.  Hophal. 
Finally,  the  remaining  Targums  are  composed  in  a  language,  not  only 
abounding  in  foreign  words,  but  exhibiting  many  peculiar  forms,  (e.  g. 
Hiphil  d^piK  from  d *ip ,  £  preformative  of  the  Infin.  Pael,  Ithpeel,  and 
Ithpaal,)  part  of  which  resemble  the  Syriac  or  Rabbinic,  (as  3  prefixed  to 
the  3d  p.  Fut.  and  the  syllable  i"i3  prefixed  in  Passives,)  and  part  arise 
from  contractions,  (as  in  the  numerals.)  These  peculiarities  have  been 
noticed,  though  inadequately,  by  Eichhorn  (Einl.  ins  A.  T.  II.  6  seq.  90 
seq.)  They  deserve  indeed  to  be  collected  into  a  separate  treatise.  In 
the  sequel  the  later  Chaldee  will  constantly  be  distinguished  from  the 
earlier. 

Note  2.  The  language  of  the  Talmud  is  commonly  termed  Chaldee. 
The  Mishna  and  the  Gemara  are  however  very  different.  The  former  is 
written  in  a  dialect  nearly  resembling  the  Hebrew,  and  is  only  disfigured 
by  some  Chaldee  forms  ;  the  style  of  the  Gemara  exhibits  the  funda¬ 
mental  characteristics  of  Chaldee,  both  in  respect  to  the  roots  of  words 
and  their  grammatical  conformation — still  it  is  to  be  regarded,  especially 
the  Jerusalem  Gemara,  as  a  very  corrupt  Chaldee.  Its  grammar  needs 
therefore  to  be  treated  separately.  See  J.  E.  Faber  Anm.  z.  Erlernung 
des  Talmud,  und  Rabbin.  Gott.  1770. 

Note  3.  The  Syrochaldaic  originals  of  several  of  the  Apocryphal  books 
[those  which  were  written  in  Palestine]  are  lost.  See  Jerome  Prol.  ad 
Tob.,  Judith,  1  Macc.  and  the  Intrr.  of  Eichhorn,  Bertholdt,  and  De  Wette. 
Josephus  also  wrote  his  work  on  the  Jewish  War  in  the  Syrochaldaic  lan¬ 
guage,  (Jewish  War,  Preface  §  1.) 

4.  The  Chaldee  with  which  we  are  now  concerned 
sustains,  as  is  apparent  from  the  slightest  observation,  a 
near  relation  to  the  Syriac,  and  shares  wTith  that  dialect 
all  its  essential  peculiarities,  both  in  respect  to  the  forms 
of  words  and  their  themes,  but  differs  from  it  in  details 
sufficiently  to  claim  separate  individuality  as  a  dialect. 
These  variations  concern  rather  the  grammatical  forms 
than  the  themes  of  words,  and  especially  punctuation,  in 
which  the  Chaldee  nearly  accords  with  the  old  Phenician 
and  Hebrew. 


I 


14  CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITEEATUEE. 


Note  1.  On  the  connection  of  Chaldee  with  Syriac,  see  Michaelis 
Abhandl.  von  der  syr.  Sprache,  pp.  12  seq. 

Note  2.  A  full  consideration  of  Chaldee  ground-forms  would  be  out 
of  place  here.  I  shall  only  notice  the  change  of  letters  for  others  of  some¬ 
what  different  sounds,  in  such  words  as  the  Chaldee  has  in  common  with 
the  Hebrew.  In  consequence  of  that  flat  pronunciation  which  character¬ 
ises  the  Aramean  dialects,  we  frequently  find  ft  and  n  substituted  for  the 
Hebrew  T  and  V ;  e.  g.  ftBft  to  offer  (sacrifices),  Bftft  gold ,  Sftft  seed ,  ftpft  to 
break  in  pieces ,  ft  an  ox ;  and  a  for  3t,  as  ‘■fia  a  rock ,  Nas  counsel.  Be¬ 
sides  these,  5*  is  used  almost  constantly  instead  of  n  final,  £  is  sometimes 
changed  into  9 ,  as  S’ftK  (On  the  cause  of  this  change,  compare 

Gesenius  Heb.  Lex.  letter  2)  ;  3  into  b ,  as  a  widow.  Finally,  it  is 

scarcely  necessary  to  remark,  that  letters  of  the  same  organ  may  be  in¬ 
terchanged  ;  e.  g.  mftM  [Heb.  ft^ftsa]  brimstone ,  Snip  [Heb.  snia]  a 
helmet,  itsa  [Heb.  nSft]  to  wander. 

Note  3.  In  respect  to  grammatical  forms,  the  Chaldee  shares  the  fol¬ 
lowing  peculiarities  in  common  with  the  Syriac. 

(1)  The  same  forms  of  words  are  pronounced  with  fewer  vowels  than 
in  Hebrew,  so  that  ihe  consonants  predominate  in  grammatical  forma¬ 
tions  ;  as,  bap,  Tjbp ,  ^I3p. 

(2)  The  emphatic  state  (of  nouns)  equivalent  to  the  article  in  Hebrew 
and  Arabic. 

(3)  The  use  of  ft  as  a  sign  of  the  Genitive  case  ;  also  as  a  Relative 
Pronoun  ;  and  the  formation  of  Possessive  Pronouns  from  b^ft  and  suffixes, 
as  ‘'b*'ft  mine,  T^ftft  thine. 

•  •  /  IT  • 

(4)  b  as  a  mark  of  the  Accusative. 

(5)  The  termination  p—  for  the  plural  of  masculines. 

(6)  Distinction  of  genders  in  the  3d  p.  plur.  Pret.  of  verbs. 

(7)  The  formation  of  Passives  by  prefixing  the  syllable  ntf. 

(8)  The  formation  of  the  third  conjugation  like  bapx  . 

(9)  Imperatives  Passive. 

(10)  Two  participles  in  the  Actives  of  the  second  and  third  Conj. 

(11)  The  use  of  the  participles  with  pronouns  for  a  separate  tense. 

(12)  The  preference  of  K  to  ft  as  a  termination  of  words;  e.  g. 
a  queen ,  and  the  consequent  confusion  of  verbs  fb  and  ftb . 

(13)  The  use  of  pleonastic  suffixes  before  the  Genitive. 

(14)  The  use  of  the  3d  p.  pi.  of  Actives  in  a  Passive  sense. 

Note  4.  Peculiarities  of  the  Chaldee,  in  which  it  differs  from  the 
Syriac,  and  in  some  of  them  more  nearly  resembles  the  Hebrew.  (1)  Pre¬ 
ference  of  the  clearer-sounding  vowels.  Thus  a  is  often  substituted  for 
the  Heb.  and  Syr.  o;  e.  g.  ana,  Syr.  ;  NftbK,  Syr. 

Heb.  bViSj  ^3:^ ,  Pleb.  ;  bp,  Heb.  bip;  anp,  Syr.  ;  the  plural 
termination  of  feminines  ‘|—  instead  of  Syr.  So  the  Chaldee  often 
has  i  where  *l  occurs  in  Syriac,  e.  g.  ba,  •  and  —  for  the  Syr.  — 
e.  g.  b-jpn ,  Syr.  — (2)  Avoiding  diphthongs ;  compare  S<pP  with 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITEEATUEE. 


15 


const-#  st.  with  with  r^oi  ,  ib}  with  also 

otiant  letters  ;  compare  ^b'q  my  king  with  with 

Nbap  with  — (3)  The  possibility  of  doubling  letters  not  guttural ; 

as  — (4)  The  tone  regularly  on  the  ultimate ;  t&b’Q  ,  ).nlaLo. — 

(5)  The  formation  of  the  Inf.  except  in  Peal  without  the  prefix  a,  &c. — In 
respect  to  orthography,  it  may  be  remarked  here  that  the  scriptio  plena , 
or  full  mode  of  writing  quiescents,  is  decidedly  prevalent  in  Chaldee. 


THE  FOLLOWING  ARE  THE  PRINCIPAL  HELPS  TO  THE 

STUDY  OF  CHALDEE. 

I.  Lexicons. 

J.  Buxtorfii  (f  1629)  Lexicon  Chaldaico-Talmudico-Rabbinicum.  Basil. 
1640.  fol. 

Edm.  Castelli  Lexicon  Heptaglotton.  London,  1669.  fol.  (This  work 
contains  a  complete  Chaldee  Vocabulary.) 

M.  J.  Landau,  Rabb.  Aram.  Deutsch.  Wurterbuch  zur  Kenntniss  des 
Talmud.,  der  Targum.  u.  s.  w.  Prag.  1819. 

II.  Grammars. 

(a)  Of  the  Shemitish  dialects  generally,  or  at  least  of  the  Aramean 
dialects. 

J.  Buxtorf.  Gram.  Chald.  et  Syr.  Basil.  (1615)  1650.  8vo. 

Lud.  de  Dieu  (f  1642.)  Grammatica  Ling.  Orient.  Heb.  Chald.  et  Syr. 
inter  se  collatarum.  Lugd.  Bat.  1628.  4to.  Frcf.  a.  M.  1683.  4to. 

J.  H.  Hottinger  (f  1667)  Gramm,  quatuor  linguar.  Heb.  Ch.  Syr.  et 
Arab.  Tigur.  1649.  4to.  Heidelb.  1658. 

Andr.  Sennert  (f  1689)  Hypotyposis  harmonica  ling.  Or.  Chald.  Syr. 
et  Arab,  cum  matre  Heb.  Viteb.  1653.  4to. 

Car.  Schaaf  (f  1729)  Opus  Aram,  complec.  Gram.  Chald.  Syr.  &c.  L. 
Bat.  1686.  8vo. 

Ign.  Fessler  Instt.  Ling.  Orient.  Heb.  Ch.  Syr.  et  Arab.  Vratisl.  1787, 
1789.  2  vols.  8vo. 

J.  Gottfr.  Hasse  (t  1806)  Prakt.  Handb.  der  aram.  Sprache.  Iena 
1791.  8vo. 

J.  Jahn  (f  1817)  Aram,  oder  chald.  u.  syr.  Sprachlehre.  Wien  1793. 
Svo. — Elementa  Aram.  s.  Ch.  et  Syr.  ling.  lat.  reddita  et  accessionibus 
aucta  ab  Andr.  Oberleitner,  Vindob.  1820.  8vo. 

J.  S.  Vater,  Handbuch  der  hebr.  syr.  ch.  und  arab.  Gramm.,  Leipzig, 
(1802)  1817.  8vo. 


f  The  obelisk  designates,  throughout  this  list,  the  year  of  an  author’s  decease. 


16 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


( b )  Of  the  Chaldee  language  only. 

Chph.  Cellarii  (f  1707)  Chaldaismus  sive  Grammatica  nova  Linguae 
Chaldaicae.  Cizae.  1685.  4to. 

Henr.  Opitii  (f  1712)  Chaldaismus  targ.  talm.  rabb.  Hebraismo  harmoni¬ 
ous.  Kil.  1696.  4to. 

J.  Dav.  Michaelis  (f  1791)  Grammatica  Chald.  Goett.  1771.  8vo. 

Wilh.  Fr.  Hezel  Anweis.  zum  Chald.  bei  Ermangelung  alles  miindl. 
Unterrichts,  Lemgo.  1787.  8vo. 

N.  W.  Schroder  (f  1798)  Instt.  ad  fundam. — Chaldaismi  bibl.  brevissime 
concinnata  (1787)  ed.  2.  aucta  et  emend.  Ulm.  1810.  8vo.  (a  proper  appen¬ 
dix  to  the  Hebrew  grammar  of  this  author.  See  Eiehhorn’s  Bibl.  VIII. 
694.) 

F.  Nolan,  An  Introduction  to  Ch.  Grammar.  Lond.  1821.  12mo. 

W.  Harris,  Elements  of  the  Chaldee  language,  Lond.  1822,  24  pp.  8vo. 
(republished  at  N.  York.) 

Jul.  Fiirst,  Lehrgebaude  der  Aramaischen  Idiome  in  Bezug  auf  die  indo- 
german.  sprachen.  (1  Thl.  Formenlehre  der  Chald.  Grammatik.)  Leip¬ 
zig,  1835.  8vo. 

G.  B.  Winer,  Grammatik  des  biblischen  und  targumischen  Chaldais¬ 
mus,  Leipz.  1824,  and  2d  ed.  1842.  8vo.  (the  basis  of  this  work.) 

III.  Chrestomathies  and  Readers. 

Geneseos  ex  Onkelosi  paraphr.  Chald.  quatuor  priora  capita  una  cum 
Dan.  c.  2.  Chald.  Ed.  W.  Fr.  Hezel.  Lemgo,  17S8.  8vo. 

Geo.  Lor.  Bauer  (f  1806.)  Chrest.  e  paraphras.  Chald.  et  Talmude 
delecta  c.  nott.  et  ind.  Nurnb.  1792.  Svo.  (See  Eichhorn’s  Bibl.  IV. 
895  seq.) 

J.  Jahn,  Ch.  Chrestomathie  grosstentheils  aus  Handschriften.  Wien, 
1800.  Svo.  (without  a  vocabulary.) 

H.  Adolf.  Grimm  (f  1S13.)  Chald.  Chrestomathie  mit  einem  vollstandi- 
gen  Glossar.  Lemgo.  1801.  8vo. 

G.  B.  Winer,  Chal.  Lesebuch,  aus  den  Targ.  d.  a.  T.  ausgewahlt, 
Leipz.  1825.  Svo. 

The  Hebrew  Lexicons  generally  contain  also  the  Chaldee  words  which 
occur  in  Daniel  and  Ezra.  The  older  Hebrew  Grammars,  (compare 
those  of  Alting  and  Danz,)  contained  also  brief  instructions  for  Chaldee. 


CHALDEE  GRAMMAR. 


PART  I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ORTHOEPY. 


§  1.  Consonants. 

The  Chaldee  is  written  with  the  same  characters  as  are 
employed  in  Hebrew ;  and,  so  far  as  we  can  trace  its 
ancient  history,  was  never  expressed  by  any  others.  In¬ 
deed  the  square  character,  now  termed  Hebrew  by  way 
of  distinction,  appears  to  have  belonged  originally  to  the 
Chaldeans,  (Babylonians,)  and  to  have  taken  the  place  of 
the  old  Hebrew  character  among  the  JewTs  in  the  age  suc¬ 
ceeding  the  Babylonish  exile. 

The  most  ancient  Phoenician,  the  Samaritan  and  the  Hebrew  coin¬ 
letter  alphabets  are  essentially  the  same.  The  letters  of  the  Palmyrene 
inscriptions,  (the  oldest  of  which  date  back  to  the  first  century  after 
Christ,)  much  more  resemble  the  square  character.  So  do  the  letters  of 
the  Egyptian  Aramean  inscriptions,  which  are  still  more  ancient.  See 
Gesenius’  Geschichte  der  Hebr.  Sprache  und  Schrift,  pp.  140  seq.  Wood’s 
Ruins  of  Palmyra,  (the  plates,)  and  Kopp’s  Bilder  und  Schriften,  II. 
245  seq. 

✓ 

§  2.  Punctuation. 

1.  The  vow^el-points,  which  are  employed  in  Hebrew, 
have  been  transferred  to  the  Chaldee,  and  appear  in  many 
manuscripts,  and  most  editions  of  the  Chaldee  text.  Since 


18 


2.  PUNCTUATION. 


it  is  evident  that  these  points  are  the  work  of  the  Jews, 
and  were  invented  several  centuries  after  Christ,  it  is  plain 
that  the  Chaldee  must  originally  have  been  written  with¬ 
out  vowel-points.  Thus  the  Palmyrene  inscriptions  ex¬ 
hibit  no  vowel-marks.  But  the  letters  1 n  \matres  lec- 
tionis ]  were  earlier  employed,  in  doubtful  cases,  as  a  guide 
in  reading. 

The  last-mentioned  fact  is  clear  from  such  orthographical  phenomena 
as  NED  in  ,  isat^a ,  riN^E  ,  Dan.  2  :  35,  etc.  and  from  the  abundant  use  of 
the  scriptio  plena  throughout. 

2.  The  transfer  of  the  Hebrew  vowel-points  to  the 
Chaldee  took  place  in  an  age  when  the  vowel  system  of 
the  Jews  was  yet  in  an  imperfect  state ;  and  in  later  times, 
the  pointing  of  the  Chaldee  text,  especially  that  of  the 
Tar  gums’  did  not  receive  the  same  attention  which  was 
devoted  to  the  Hebrew.  These  circumstances  exhibit 
clearly  the  reason  why  the  punctuation  of  the  Chaldee 
writings  appears,  at  present,  far  less  regular  than  that  of 
the  Hebrew.  This  irregularity  is  indeed  so  great  that 
not  only  do  different  copies  and  editions,  (especially  those 
of  London  and  Venice,)  differ  widely  from  each  other, 
but  there  prevails  throughout  an  extreme  variableness  in 
the  use  of  the  long  and  short  vowels. 

On  the  variable  punctuation  of  the  Targums,  see  Eichhorn  Einl.  ins 
A.  T.  Part  2.  p.  24  seq. 

3.  Long  vowels  sometimes  occur  in  a  mixed  syllable  without  the  tone, 

and  vice  versa,  short  vowels  in  a  simple  syllable.  (Especially  are  *1  and  — 
employed  altogether  promiscuously,  to  which  usage  only  a  slight  tendency 
is  noticeable  in  Hebrew.  See  Gesenius  Lehrgebaude  p.  60.)  For  exam¬ 
ples  of  the  former  comp,  insist  Deut.  23:  16,  Jer.  49:  19,  “piss 

[allln]  Dan.  4:4;  of  the  latter  s&ttp . 

4.  The  violation#of  the  rule  of  Garnets  Hhatuph,  in  such  cases  as 
KEDin  is  only  apparent.  The  1  is  only  a  superfluous  mater  lectionis  and  is 
by  no  means  to  be  regarded  as  quiescing  in  Garnets  Hhatuph,  or  as  a  con¬ 
sonant  [ Hhavchma ]  since  it  is  written  without  Sheva.  In  general,  how¬ 
ever,  Garnets  Hhatuph  seldom  occurs  in  Chaldee  words. 


2.  punctuation;  daghesh. 


19 


DAGHESH. 

5.  Daghesh  lene  is  subject  to  the  same  general  rules  as 
in  Hebrew.. 

a.  The  pron.  sufF.  ‘p’s  and  "|5  never  receive  it. 

b.  In  some  editions,  in  the  middle  of  a  word  is  treated  as  a  diph¬ 
thong,  and  the  next  letter  does  not  receive  Daghesh  lene ;  as  baithi. 
Generally  however  '  is  regarded  as  a  proper  consonant,  and  we  find 

bay-ti,  geldy-ta. 

c.  Nouns  of  the  form  (Heb.  7p>E)  are  treated  as  though  the  ground- 
form  was  ,  and  Daghesh  is  inserted  in  the  5  where  a  mixed  syllable 
precedes;  as  Habft,  ‘’Sba . 

6.  Daghesh  forte  compensative 

a.  Is  inserted  in  the  first  radical  of  verbs  e.  g.  p’HH  for  pp'iH, 
Aphel  from  pp“n . 

b.  In  n  of  the  passive  prefix  pH  it  compensates  for  the  omission  of  H 
the  characteristic  prefix  of  Aphel,  e.  g.  bappH  for  b^pHpH . 

Note.  The  peculiarity  of  the  Chaldee  in  both  these  cases  is,  that  the 
letter  for  which  compensation  is  made  would,  if  the  word  were  fully  writ¬ 
ten,  have  succeeded  the  letter  in  which  Daghesh  forte  is  inserted.  In  He¬ 
brew  this  is  unusual,  and  where  it  occurs  might  perhaps  be  denominated 
Chaldaism. 

c.  Sometimes,  especially  in  the  later  Chaldee,  it  compensates  for  the 
omission  of  quiescents  and  consequent  shortening  of  the  vowel  preceding 
the  letter  in  which  Daghesh  forte  is  inserted ;  as  instead  of  H3 , 
Gen.  3  :  2,  Pseud.  Jon.  The  converse  of  this  also  takes  place;  §  7.  a.  (2.) 

7.  Forms  which  regularly  exhibit  Daghesh  forte,  but 
sometimes  appear  with  a  different  orthography. 

a.  The  letter  5  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  Daghesh  forte,  even 

where  the  radical  form  does  not  exhibit  a  5 ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2  :  25,  instead 
of  or  from  This  may  have  ^arisen  from  an  imperfect  ac¬ 

quaintance  with  Chaldee.  A  Jew,  on  perceiving  that  3  was  expressed  in 
Chaldee  in  many  cases  where  his  own  language  required  Daghesh  forte 
or  a  long  vowel  compensating  for  it,  would  perhaps  be  liable  to  employ  it 
even  where  it  was  not  required  by  good  Chaldee  usage.  See  below  §  6.  a. 
note.  Gesenius,  Lehrg.  §  33.  3. 

b.  Very  frequently  no  compensation  is  made  for  the  exclusion  of  Da¬ 
ghesh  forte  from  gutturals;  e.  g.  pSPipfl  Gen.  3  :  3,  ttip3  2  K.  21 :  6. 

c.  As  in  Hebrew,  Daghesh  forte  is  sometimes  dropped  when  the  letter 
in  which  it  would  regularly  be  inserted  has  Sheva. 


20 


3.  TONE-SYLLABLE 


MAPPIQ. 

8.  Mappiq  is  inserted,  as  in  Hebrew,  in  n  where  it  is 
not  quiescent. 

a.  In  the  Pronominal  suffixes  R—  and  R— ,  comp.  §  8. 

b.  In  R  when  it  occurs  as  the  last  radical  of  a  verb  or  noun  and  is  not 
quiescent;  e.  g.  R^a  Ps.  131 :  1,  R^x  Dan.  2 :  28. 

ACCENTS. 

9.  a .  In  the  Chaldee  portions  of  the  original  Scrip¬ 
tures,  the  same  accents  are  employed,  and  subject  to  the 
same  rules,  as  in  Hebrew,  only  that  the  half-accent  Metheg 
is  much  less  regularly  and  less  frequently  inserted  than 
in  Hebrew. 

b.  In  the  Targura  of  Onkelos,  the  train  of  accents  is 
substantially  the  same  as  in  the  original  text.  See  Chres- 
tomathy  Part  I.  Note  on  No.  1. 

c.  To  the  text  of  the  other  Targums  no  accents  have 
been  appended. 


§  3.  Tone- Syllable. 

The  tone  falls  in  Chaldee,  (as  in  Hebrew,)  usually  on 
the  last  syllable.  The  following  forms  are  exceptions, 
and  are  accented  on  the  penultimate. 

1.  Segholate  nouns  which  follow  the  Hebrew  form; 

as  -jVa ,  ,  p„5s,  which  however  occur  almost  exclu¬ 

sively  in  the  biblical  Chaldee. 

2.  Verbal  forms  terminating  in  p  and  *i; 

as  abrij?,  Kjbbjy  *  . 

3.  The  suffixes  an_  vvi;  e.  g. 

•  TT  TT  •  T  *7  O  T»:-7 

asbyi ,  ^rwin ,  &c. 

The  German  and  Polish  Jews  place  the  tone  in  Chaldee  (as  they  also 
do  in  Hebrew)  on  the  penult.  Whether  this  was  the  ancient  Babylonish 
accentuation,  cannot  be  decided  from  the  accentuation  prevalent  in  Syriac ; 
since  two  closely  related  dialects  may  differ  widely  in  this  respect.  Were 


4.  OF  READING  UNPOINTED  TEXT. 


21 


the  vowels  of  the  Chaldee,  as  we  have  them,  entirely  conformed  to  the 
old  Babylonish  pronunciation,  we  should  have,  in  them,  a  clew  to  the 
ancient  accentuation. 


§  4.  Of  reading  unpointed  text. 

As  points  have  not  been  attached  to  all  the  Chaldee 
text,  and  since  the  unpointed,  (besides  the  use  of  the  ma¬ 
tures  lectionis  a ,  1 ,  h ,  which  obtains  likewise  in  Heb.)  pre¬ 
sents  some  peculiarities,  it  may  be  well  here  to  notice,  as 
an  assistance  in  reading  without  vowels,  one  usage  at  least, 
which  obtains  in  the  Targums,  viz.  that  a  double  1  or  ^  is 
sometimes  employed, 

(a)  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  either  to  indicate  that 
these  letters  are  moveable ;  as  afttiana  i.  e.  anjapa  ?  aa^an 
i.  e.  aa;a& ;  or  that  they  are  to  be  pronounced  double ;  as 
nnwna  i.  e.  ntwrna  5  pn^n  i.  e.  pnjn . 

( b )  In  the  end  of  a  word,  especially, when  it  is  neces¬ 
sary  to  distinguish  between  the  pronouns  and  ;  as 
^ban  i.  e.  ‘’ban . 

Note.  Only  one  abbreviation  occurs  in  the  Targums,  viz.  ^  for  mm . 
The  Talmud  abounds  with  them.  See  J.  Buxtorf  De  Abbreviat.  Hebr. 
Basil.  1640.  Svo. 


PART  II. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


CHAPTER  I. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  WHICH  REGULATE  THE  DERIVATION  AND  INFLECTION 

OF  WORDS. 


§  5.  The  subject  generally . 

1.  Before  entering  upon  the  derivation  and  modifica¬ 
tions  of  the  various  parts  of  speech,  it  will  be  necessary 
to  notice  briefly  the  general  principles  according  to  which 
these  changes  take  place.  In  Chaldee,  as  in  every  other 
language,  these  changes  respect  partly  consonants,  and 
partly  vowels,  which  will  naturally  divide  this  subject 
into  two  parts. 

2.  It  is  proper  to  distinguish,  among  the  changes  of 
consonants  and  vowels  with  which  we  meet  in  the  inflec¬ 
tions  of  the  parts  of  speech,  between  those  which  are 
necessary ,  and  those  which  are  the  result  of  euphony. 
The  former  class  includes  those  changes  which  are  essen¬ 
tial  to  permanent  forms, — those  which  run  through  the 
language,  and  which  form,  so  to  speak,  its  substratum. 
Such  are  the  terminations  of  the  persons  in  verbs,  and  of 
the  numbers  in  nouns.  Those  changes,  on  the  other  hand, 
may  be  reckoned  euphonical ,  which  are  not  essential  to 
the  form,  but  result  simply  from  facility  of  utterance ; 


§  6.  MUTATIONS  OF  CONSONANTS. 


23 


as  pbtpp  instead  of  ‘pbttjj ,  instead  of  ?  nnrm 

instead  of  .  So  in  Latin  we  have  imminutus  for 
imninutus ,  mi  for  mihi,  hodie  for  hoc  die ,  &c.  It  is 
plainly  with  this  latter  class  of  changes  that  we  are  at 
present  chiefly  concerned. 

§  6.  Mutations  of  Consonants. 

The  derivation  and  inflection  of  words,  so  far  as  they 
depend  on  the  consonants,  are  effected  by  other  letters 
(beside  those  which  compose  the  root)  being  prefixed, 
inserted,  or  suffixed  ;  or  by  the  radicals  themselves  being 
omitted,  doubled,  or  commuted  with  other  letters ;  e.  g. 
btppft ,  b^itop ,  ftjbtop  ?  bftp  from  hup  ;  ito  from  ;  “’ba  from 
tfba .  For  these  purposes  the  Chaldee  employs  the  let¬ 
ters  i,ri.  belongs  to  the  details  of  ety¬ 

mology  to  exhibit  the  manner  in  which  these  servile 
letters  are  employed  in  each  particular  case.  Those 
changes  only  will  be  noticed  in  this  place,  which,  in  the 
formation  and  inflection  of  words,  are  the  results  of  eu¬ 
phony.  Such  are  the  assimilation ,  transposition ,  omis¬ 
sion,  commutation ,  and  insertion  of  consonants. 

a.  Assimilation  takes  place  regularly,  (1)  Of  the 
letter  5,  wThen  it  occurs  as  the  final  consonant  of  a  mixed 
syllable  and  immediately  precedes  another  consonant. 
Thus  instead  of  p£3?  is  commonly  written  p5? ,  nn 3ft  in¬ 
stead  of  ftpipDft.  Comp.  §  18. — (2)  Of  si  in  the  passive 
prefix  nsi  with  a  succeeding  ft  or  *7,  more  rarely  with  any 
other  letter.  See  §  10.  5. 

Note.  The  converse  of  this  takes  place,  when,  instead  of  doubling  a 
consonant,  the  letter  3_is  inserted;  e.  g.  for  ‘'Sip;  for 

Job  31 :  12.  Dan.  4 . 9.  (This  takes  place  however  in  only  a  few  words 
which  must  be  learned  by  practice.) — also  is  so  used  in  the  later  Tar- 
gums  ;  e.  g.  instead  of  ■ji'ipit  Gen.  38  :  9.  Pseudo-Jon.  in¬ 

stead  of  Eccl.  10:  12. 

•  *  • 

b.  Transposition .  The  m  of  the  passive  prefer mative 


24 


6.  MUTATIONS  OF  CONSONANTS. 


ns  regularly  changes  places  with  the  first  radical,  when 
that  happens  to  be  a  sibilant  (T,  o,  at,  to  or  to);  e.  g. 
rontoa,  "innotf,  yzmx . 

c.  The  following  letters  are  dropped.  (1)  11  and  a  in 

some  forms  in  which  they  wrould  stand  in  the  beginning 
of  a  word  without  a  vowel ;  e.  g.  pp  instead  of  Ppa , 
[Imp.]  for  . — (2)  Consonants  destitute  of  vowels,  by 

contraction ;  e.  g.  nton:*  instead  of  ‘itotfina ,  loyin  instead 
of  no?  ^r\.  Here  belong  also  Tax  instead  of 

rapp  instead  of  tfiWD  Ex.  9  :  31,  Jon. — (3)  a  without 
a  vowel  and  in  the  end  of  a  syllable,  of  participles 
changed  into  tenses  ;  e.  g.  ‘pfnbtajj  for  pftpbpp. — (4)  Very 
frequently  the  quiescents ;  e.  g.  IT?!?  instead  of  fTifcK!? , 
^rprn  instead  of  ‘’n&jn. — (5)  m  in  the  end  of  words,  con¬ 
stantly  in  the  absolute  state  of  feminine  forms  like  misb'D ; 
— also  in  the  later  Targums  for  nta  Gen.  22:19,  Jon. 

d.  Commutation  takes  place,  especially  of  quiescents ; 

( 1 )  When  one  quiescent  letter  is  exchanged  for  another 
capable  of  quiescing  in  the  same  vowel ;  as  WTQ  instead 
of  ,  (which  is  merely  an  orthographical  change ;) — 

(2)  When  a  quiescent,  homogeneous  with  the  character¬ 
istic  vowel  of  a  particular  form,  is  substituted  for  one 
which  would  be  heterogeneous  ;  as  D^pi*  for  Dlptf  (Dip:*). 

But  those  numerous  cases  of  verbs  fcfb  do  not  belong  here,  in  which  "> 
appears  instead  of  ;  nor  such  instances  as  instead  of  ttnSE'ip  ; 

for  in  these  cases  the  11  is  only  the  original  consonant  (which  had  been  dis¬ 
placed  by  another)  restored.  See  above. 

e.  Insertion,  a  prosthetic  is  sometimes  inserted  in 

cases  wrhere  otherwise  a  syllable  would  commence  with 
twx>  consonants ;  e.  g.  ^toy:  7  ‘nptf .  Here  belong  also 
such  cases  as  instead  of  7  bDpntf  instead  of 

bpp^n^  .  For  Daghesh  forte  is  here  euphonic ,  being  pri¬ 
marily  designed  to  shorten  the  pronunciation,  (see  Gese- 
uius,  Lehrgeb.  p.  860,)  though  it  constantly  indicates  the 


7.  VOWEL-CHANGES. 


25 


doubling  of  tlie  consonant;  and  for  this  purpose  the 
vowel  of  the  falls  "back  to  the  n  of  the  prefix. 

§  7.  Vowel-changes. 

The  derivation  and  inflections  of  words  are  effected, 
in  the  second  place,  by  vowels ,  when  forms  of  words  de¬ 
rived  from  the  same  ground-form  are  characterized  by 
different  vowels ;  ex.  tjb'xa  from  tyba ,  bpjj  from  btij? ,  bno 
from  bno .  It  is  impossible  to  decide,  in  each  particular 
case,  why  such  and  such  vowels  have  been  selected  as 
characteristic  of  the  form.  We  can  distinctly  ascertain, 
however,  what  are  the  characteristics  of  particular  forms  ; 
and  this  again  must  be  referred  to  the  details  of  ety¬ 
mology.  Only  some  variations  from  the  general  prin¬ 
ciples  which  regulate  these  forms,  and  some  other  modifi¬ 
cations  of  vowels  which  result  from  facility  of  pronuncia¬ 
tion,  will  be  noticed  here.  Vowels,  in  the  course  of  for¬ 
mation  and  inflection,  are  commuted \  transposed ,  dropped , 
or  inserted. 

a.  Commutation  of  vowels  ;  (1)  Short  for  long,  when 
a  mixed  syllable  loses  the  tone ;  as  pnbs  from  bh  ?  rtsn 
from  *|rt ,  const,  state  of  ^£2 .  In  these  cases  i  pure 
generally  becomes  — ;  and  — ,  — .  When  the  long  vowel 
remains  unchanged,  either  that  is  impure,  or  the  last  con¬ 
sonant  of  the  ground-form  is  thrown  forward  and  pro¬ 
nounced  with  the  suffix;  e.  g.  liDttbrc  Dan.  3  :  31.  So  con¬ 
stantly  in  Hebrew;  as  tpm.  See  above  §  2.  2. — 
(2)  Long  vowels  take  the  place  of  short ; — in  pause ;  as 


Ex.  4:13,  (though  this  is  not  universally  the  case  ;  comp. 
Dan.  2:9,  17)  ; — before  a  guttural  which  would  regularly 
be  doubled;  as  Spat!  instead  of  ipati,  instead  of 

,  (although  this  likewise  is  not  without  exceptions, 
especially  if  the  guttural  be  n  or  n.  Dan.  4:16,  24)  ; — 


26 


7.  VOWEL-CHANGES. 


before  other  consonants,  less  frequently ;  as  ‘p'Tptf  instead 
of  iriptf  Gen.  38  :  9.  Ps.  Jon.  see  §  6.  a. ; — when  a  quies¬ 
cent  which  would  regularly  have  a  composite  Sheva,  drops 
it  and  quiesces  in  the  preceding  vowel ;  as  p^b  instead 
of  p'ltfb . — (3)  It  is  for  the  sake  of  euphony  that,  in  final 
syllables  which  terminate  in  a  guttural,  Pattahh  is  usually 
found  before  it,  instead  of  the  usual  characteristic  vowel ; 
as  fibtip  instead  of  fib©?,  ttat?  instead  of  HDE ;  also  that 
when  a  syllable  terminates  in  a  quiescent  preceded  by  a 
heterogeneous  vowel,  that  vowel  becomes  homogeneous ; 
e.  g.  SpDi»  instead  of  SpDltf . 

The  case  of  simple  syllables,  in  which  long  vowels  have  displaced  the 
short  ones,  does  not  belong  here.  In  most  of  these  instances,  the  punc¬ 
tuators  probably  employed  the  short  vowels ;  and  such  forms  as  WatfS , 
occur  only  in  particular  editions. 


b.  Transposition  of  vowels  takes  place  in  some  mono¬ 
syllabic  forms  of  verbs,  the  vowel  of  which  is  between 
the  last  two  radicals,  when  they  receive  a  pronominal 
suffix ;  as  ftbtpp  from  bDp ; — also  in  some  contracted  forms 


of  verbs  ;  as  p^p  for  ppp? ; — and  finally,  in  cases  like 
Dip  for  Dip ,  ‘'M  for  ,  when  the  moveable  or  1 , 
etc.  throws  back  to  the  preceding  consonant  its  own 
vowel,  for  the  sake  of  quiescing  in  it. 

c.  Vowels  are  dropped ,  in  the  final  syllable  of  ground- 
forms,  only  when  formative  syllables  are  added,  and  then 
much  less  frequently  than  in  Heb. ;  e.  g.  Dbp  from  Dbp  5 
pbpp  from  bpp ,  abns  from  bn& ,  pbDp?  from  btpjpp .  The 
vowels  most  frequently  omitted  are  Pattahh,  Tseri  and 
Hhireq. 

d.  Finally,  vowels  are  inserted ;  (1)  When  two  con¬ 
sonants  would  otherwise  stand  together  without  a  vowel 
in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable;  as  bDp?  from  btpp,  pbftb 
from  pbtt .  The  vowel  most  commonly  employed  in  such 
cases  to  facilitate  pronunciation  is  Hhireq.  But  when 


27 


§  8.  PERSONAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

the  following  consonant  is  a  guttural,  and  lias  a  compo¬ 
site  Slieva,  tlie  preceding  consonant  takes  the  short  vowel 
corresponding  with  this  Sheva  ;  as  tfpsp ,  "ictfb . — (2)  In 
cases  like  'pwn  Ez.  7:18,  Ez.  4:15,  instead  of 

;  where  three  consonants  would*  come  to¬ 
gether,  in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  without  a  vowel. 

Note.  In  case  (1)  the  inserted  vowel  regularly  belongs  to  the  first  of 
the  two  consonants  which  would  have  been  without  vowels.  In  the  later 
Targums,  a  practice  somewhat  different  prevails  to  considerable  extent. 
Instead  of  a  short  vowel  under  the  first  consonant,  a  long  vowel  appears 
under  the  second  ;  e.  g.  Taa1]  instead  of  n^ai  Gen.  3  :  1.  Ps.  Jon.  et  passim, 
a^nan  instead  of  ab^n^n  Gen.  3  : 24.  Ps.  Jon. 

t  •  ••  :  t  •  :  • 


CHAPTER  II. 
PRONOUNS. 


§  8.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 

1.  Personal  pronouns  are  divided,  as  in  Hebrew,  into 
two  classes,  separate  and  suffixed.  The  former  express, 
with  some  exceptions,  the  nominative  case,  and  the  latter 
the  oblique  cases. 


TABLE  OF  THE  SEPARATE  PRONOUNS  OR  GROUND-FORM  . 


Singular. 

1. c.  aia,(n3a)  / 

2.  c.  na,  nsa  (nnsa)  thou 

3.  m.  (sin^a ,  sinsa ,  sin 

Prov.  25  :  20,  like  the  Syr.)  he 
3.  f.  a%n  (an11:* ,  wa ,)  she 


1.  c. 

2.  m. 

2.  f. 

3.  m. 
3.  f. 


Plural. 

sonjx,  tqn5,  Qjs)  we 
yinsa  ’  pna  j 
■pnsa,  pna  f 

(W) 

•jinn,  inan 

(rsn, 


2.  The  suffix  (or  inseparable)  pronouns  are  appended 
to  verbs,  to  the  signs  of  cases  (§  60)  and  prepositions,  or 
to  nouns.  In  the  last  case  they  are  usually  translated  by 
possessive  pronouns,  though  the  genitive  of  personal  pro¬ 
nouns  would  more  exactly  express  them ;  precisely  as  in 


4 


28 


§  8.  PERSONAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


Greek,  narriq  ^tov,  &c.  Tlie  following  are  tlie  suffixes  at¬ 
tacked  to  verbs. 


1.  c. 

2.  m. 

2.  f. 

3.  m. 
3.  f. 


i$-^  }  (id)  one 

T  5  ^  v  tJl66 

T-  ! 

*  ft—,  fti—  ('ft,  istT)  him 
,  (»»,)  her 


«3>  *hr'  (1- 
Tis 


Which  of  the  forms  is  to  be  used  in  each  particular  case,  is  explained 
in  §  16,  where  also  will  be  found  an  explanation  of  the  so-called  Nun  epen¬ 
thetic,  which  is  frequently  inserted  between  the  verbal  form  and  its  suffix. 

3.  The  suffixes  of  nouns  are  divided,  again,  into  two 
classes,  viz.  those  attacked  to  nouns  singular,  and  tkose 
attacked  to  nouns  plural.  Tke  latter  are  expressed  by 
somewkat  lengthened  forms,  in  wkick  tke  n  of  tke 
plural  termination  commonly  appears.  Tkey  are  gene¬ 
rally  tke  following : 


I.  SUFFIXES  TO  NOUNS  SINGULAE. 


Singular  suffixes. 

1.  C. 

2.  m.  ” —  ) 

2-f.  f 

3.  m.  ft— 

3.  f.  ft— ,  (in  bibl.  Ch.  ft— ) 


my 

thy 

his 

her 


Plural  suffixes. 

yis,  bib  ) 

i?  ( 

Tin,  (Bin)  j 

>  n  i 


our 

your 

their 


Note  ].  Twice,  instead  of  ft—  appears  X—  Dan.  4  : 15,  5:8;  the  Tar- 
gumists  wrote  likewise  ifti  Gen.  1 : 12,  21,  or  with  the  full  orthography 
fti—.  Appended  to  the  words  3i< ,  ft#  and  tft  which  before  suff.  take 
the  forms  *13$ ,  etc.,  the  suff.  of  the  2d  and  3d  per.  sing,  take  the  forms  Tj , 
">ft ,  Kft ;  the  last  of  which  forms  occurs  also  elsewhere  as  a  noun-suffix. 
Gen.  3  :  5.  Est.  1  :  12. 

The  same  forms  are  attached  to  prepositions .  (excepting  such  as  are 
originally  plural  nouns,  §  44.  2.)  and  to  the  signs  of  cases  b,  fti,  etc. ;  as 
ib,  13,  ftfti,  etc.  See  below  §  44. 


II.  SUFFIXES  TO  NOUNS  PLUEAL. 


Singular,  suffixes. 


1.  C.  1— 

2.  m.  tp— ,  ~- 

2-  f.  r,  ’’Bn—' 

3.  m.  iftV,  ii 


my 

thy 

his 


O 

D 


.  f. 


Xft— (fti—  Dan. 7 : 7, 19.)  her 


Plural  suffixes. 

,  or-) 

1 

ir-  i 

r*'-  \ 

ivT-  S 


our 

your 

their 


I 


9.  OTHER  PRONOUNS. 


29 


Note  1.  These  suffixes  are  regularly  appended,  however,  only  to  plu¬ 
rals  masculine.  Indeed,  it  is  from  the  termination  of  such  nouns,  that  the 
*  comes,  which  appears  in  the  suffix  of  the  2d  per.  sing,  and  in  all  the  plu¬ 
ral  suffixes.  Feminines  frequently  take  the  sing.  suff.  ,  ft—,  etc. 
Gen.  20  : 17.  Dan.  2  :  32,  5:2.  Ez.  4  :  17,  6  :  18.  Is.  1 :  4.  Prov.  1 : 18. 
Gen.  47  :  9.  In  Syriac  this  is  constantly  the  case.  The  Chaldee  exhibits 
a  medium  between  the  usage  of  the  Hebrew  and  that  of  the  Syriac. 

Note  2.  The  suffix  Tp—  is  in  some  editions  written  Tj'1'1—  or  Tp1?—. 
Frequently  it  appears  abbreviated  t]—  Dan.  5:10.  2  Sam.  11:8,  24. 
Ps.  119  :  4. — So  also  the  feminine  Tp— r  is  in  many  editions  written  T|— ,  so 
that  the  genders  are  not  distinguished.  Isa.  49  : 18.  Ven. 

Note  3.  The  possessive  pronoun  may  be  expressed  separately  from  its 
noun  by  appending  suffixes  to  (comp,  of  the  relative  ft  ,  and  b ,  sign 
of  the  dative  case)  ;  or,  more  rarely,  to  *Jft  (comp,  of  ft  relative  and  ‘n , 
sign  of  the  genitive  case) ;  e.  g.  'Tjbft  TjbE ,  thy  king ,  lit.  the  king  who  [is] 
Jo  thee.  Usage  has  however  made  these  particles  mere  signs  of  the  geni¬ 
tive;  for  even  to  them  ‘n  (relative)  is  prefixed. 

Note  4.  Prepositions  which  are  originally  plural  nouns  take  the  suffixes 
of  pi.  nouns;  e.  g.  fttft;  ,  ftibs,  .  See  §  44.  2.  So  also 

do  rPJK  [=Heb.  tip ,]  rpb  its  negative,  and  &C03,  as;  e.  g.  ftft,  ftirpb. 
*}irp£S ,  and  the  suffix  must  be  rendered  in  the  nominative  case. 


9.  Other  Pronouns. 


1.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are,  sing.  masc.  ft 
(■Oft  Gen.  37  :  19,  ftft  Job  9  :  24,)  ft,  1ft  (]ftn  Jer. 
26:9;)  fem.  ft ,  *ft  ;  com.  ]ft ,  ,  (nft  ,)  1ft  (Ps.  24  :  6, 

52  :  8,)  this,  that;  plnr.  com.  bg,  these , 

those. 


Note.  With  the  Hebrew  article,  fiWSft,  ‘‘pbxfi  (Ex.  20: 1)  are  equiva¬ 
lent  to  our  expressions  this  very ,  precisely  this.  So  also  are  the  forfris 
Niift  (Ruth  1 :  16.  Lam.  1 :  4.) 

2.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is  ^  (as  a  prefix),  or  ft  * 
(as  a  separate  word),  of  both  genders  and  both  numbers. 
It  designates  regularly  the  Nominative  or  Accusative. 
How  the  other  oblique  cases  are  indicated,  see  in  Syntax 
§  60. 

3.  The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  expressed,  some¬ 
times,  according  to  the  Hebrew  analogy,  by  ft  who  ?  of 


*  In  the  Egyptian  Aramean  inscriptions  and  rtf .  Comp,  the  Heb.  . 


30 


§10.  VEEBS  ;  DEEIVATION  AND  INFLECTION. 


persons,  (whence  for  fa  Prov.  20:6,  27:4,)  and 
ara  (ffia)  what?  of  things:  sometimes,  by  prefixing  the 
interrogative  particle  ^  to  the  demonstrative  pronoun : 
“pTtf  m.  f.  (^T^1 ,  ayn).  The  latter  mode  is  rather 
more  expressive,  who  indeed?  who  then? 

On  the  mode  of  designating  the  reflexive  and  recipro¬ 
cal  sense  of  pronouns,  compare  Syntax,  §  49.  1. 


CHAPTER  III. 

VERBS. 

< 

§  10.  Derivation  and  inflection  of  verbs  generally. 

\ 

1.  Verbs,  as  in  Hebrew,  are  generally  primitive.  A 

few  are  formed  from  nouns,  and  are  called  denominatives  ; 
e.  g.  tnflj  to  eradicate ,  iinnrcs:  to  take  root ,  from  ttht)  a 
root  /  to  pitch  a  tent ,  from  tfbna  a  tent ;  to 

be  acquainted ,  from  anitt  an  acquaintance . 

2.  The  roots  of  verbs  consist,  generally,  of  three  con¬ 
sonants  which  are  pronounced  in  one  syllable  with  the 
vowel  —  under  the  middle  radical.  A  few  consist  of  four 
consonants  [quadriliterals],  and  are  pronounced  with  —  — ; 
as  bsnp  to  cover .  The  root  is  the  third  person  singular 
masculine  Praeter,  and  from  this  are  derived,  not  only  the 
other  parts  of  the  active  voice,  but  a  passive  consisting 
of  the  same  moods  and  tenses. 

Derivative  Conjugations. 

3.  As  in  Hebrew,  other  forms,  derived  from  the  root 
and  analogous  to  it,  are  employed  to  express  various 
modifications  of  the  original  sense.  These  also  are  con¬ 
jugated  through  an  active  and  a  passive  voice.  They 
are  generally  two,  bpp  and  bttjpus  .  These,  as  well  as  the 


10.  verbs;  derivation  and  inflection. 


31 


'  ground-form,  are  called  conjugations ;  so  that  we  may 
reckon  in  Chaldee  three  usual  conjugations,  each  in¬ 
cluding  an  active  and  a  passive  voice.  For  the  unusual 
conjugations,  Shaphel,  Poel,  &c.,  see  §  14. 

4.  Characteristics  and  signification  of  the  conjuga¬ 

tions.  (1)  The  2d  conjugation  or  Pael  is  characterized, 
like  the  Hebrew  Piel,  by  Daghesli  forte  in  the  2d  radi¬ 
cal.  (a)  Its  signification  is  usually  causative ,  when  Peal 
is  intransitive  ;  as  cpn  to  be  wise ,  to  make  wise  ;  to 

be  white ,  to  make  white ,  to  wash,  (b)  Frequently 

Pael  has  merely  the  sense  of  exhibiting ,  regarding ,  or  treat¬ 
ing  a  person  as  being  or  doing  what  is  expressed  in  Peal ; 
e.  g.  1*13  to  lie ,  SU?  to  regard  one  as  a  liar ,  to  convict  one 
of  falsehood,  (<?)  Sometimes  it  is  privative  /  as  ^  to 
remove  ashes  ;  bpp  to  clear  out  stones. 

(2)  The  characteristic  of  the  3d  conjugation  or  Aphel 
is  (sometimes  n)  prefixed  to  the  root,  and  the  vowel  - 
(or  — )  in  the  last  syllable.  In  signification  it  is  usually 
(a)  causative  of  Peal  (especially  in  verbs  which  want 
Pael,  though  both  are  sometimes  found;  e.  g.  pftp,  pp>). 
Thus  tob  to  put  on ,  Epba  to  cause  [  another ]  to  put  on ,  to 
clothe ,  to  sin ,  to  seduce  or  entice  to  sin.  Some¬ 

times,  (b)  like  Pael,  it  has  merely  the  sense  of  exhibiting , 
Ac.,  e.  g.  pppfr?  to  show  [a  person]  to  be  righteous ,  to  treat 
as  righteous ,  to  acguit. 

Note.  The  same  conjugations  are  not  in  use  in  all  verbs.  A  large 
number  appear  only  in  Peal,  others  in  Pael  only;  for  examples  of  the  latter 
compare  ‘tet,  -on,  6)30,  nbo.  Where  the  same  verb  has,  both  Pael  and 
Aphel,  these  two  conjugations,  for  the  most  part,  have  different  senses; 
e.  g.  ‘qb’3  to  advise ,  TjbEK  to  constitute  a  king. 

5.  The  Passives  of  all  the  conjugations  are  character¬ 
ized  by  the  preformative  syllable  in  a  .  The  n  of  this  pre¬ 
fix  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  the  succeeding  letter,  or 
transposed  with  it,  as  follows. 


32 


§10.  VERBS  ;  DERIVATION  AND  INFLECTION. 


(a)  When  the  active  form  commences  with  1,t3orri, 

the  in  of  the  passive  prefix  is  assimilated,  and  expressed  by 
Daghesh  forte  in  the  following  letter ;  e.  g.  ,  tnstotf , 
inna  ,  from  W ,  fist?  and  nsn .  Less  frequently,  and  only 
in  the  later  Targums,  does  the  same  assimilation  take 
place  before  other  letters ;  e.  g.  it  is  written ,  for 

rrrsra ,  Eccl.  12:10. 

( b )  If  the  ground-form  commences  with  a  sibilant  [T , 

o,  to  or  to],  the  n  is  inserted  after  that  letter;  e.  g. 
p3F\to&  .  But  after  T ,  it  is  changed  into  n ;  as  from 

“pat ;  and  after  s  into  t3 ;  as  from  rra . 

The  signification  of  these  forms  is  not  merely  passive, 
but  sometimes  reflexive  or  reciprocal ;  as  to  consult 

together  ;  frequently,  even  in  the  sense  of  the  Greek  mid¬ 
dle  voice  ;  e.  g.  to  get  an  advantage . 

Moods  and  Tenses. 

6.  All  these  conjugations  have,  in  both  active  and 
passive  voices,  the  Praeter  and  Future  tenses,  the  Infini¬ 
tive  and  Imperative  moods,  and  the  Participle.  The  ac¬ 
tives  have  two  participles  throughout.  All  these  arise 
out  of  the  ground-form,  mediately  or  immediately,  by 
the  insertion  of  formative  letters,  or  by  a  different  pro¬ 
nunciation  of  the  radicals,  or  by  both  together.  The  dif¬ 
ferent  persons  of  the  Praeter  and  Imperative  are  formed, 
as  in  Plebrew,  by  suffixes,  and  the  Future  by  prefixes  and 
suffixes,  originally  fragments  of  personal  pronouns. 

7.  Verbs  are  either  regular  or  irregular .  The  former 
class  includes  all  those  verbs,  the  radicals  of  which  remain 
unchanged  throughout  all  their  inflections;  the  latter, 
those  which  suffer  a  change  or  omission  of  one  or  two 
radicals. 


REGULAR  VERBS  ;  INFLECTION. 


5S 


§11.  Inflection  of  the  Regular  Verb. 

1.  Most  nearly  connected  with  the  Praeter  stands  the 
Imperative ,  from  which  the  Future  is  derived.  The  Im¬ 
perative  of  Peal  is  characterized  by  the  vowel  — ;  those 
of  Pael  and  Aphel  are  like  the  Praeter  of' the  same  conju¬ 
gation. 

•2.  The  Future  is  derived  from  the  Imperative  by  pre¬ 
fixing  1 ;  which  is  pronounced  in  Peal  with  — ,  in  Pael 
with  — ,  in  Aphel  (where  the  suffers  elision)  with  — , 
and  in  all  the  Passives  with  —  [rp]. 

3.  The  Infinitive  is  formed  from  the  Praeter  in  two 

ways,  (a)  In  Peal  by  the  ..prefix  £  .  (b)  In  the  other 

conjugations  and  in  all  the  Passives,  by  the  sufformative 
syllables  — . 

4.  The  Participles  are  also  derived  from  the  Praeter, 

and  are  formed,  (a)  In  Peal,  by  merely  changing  the 
vowels,  btDj? ,  ;  (b)  In  all  the  other  conjugations  and 

in  the  Passives,  by  prefixing  which  is  pronounced  in 
Pael  with  — ,  in  Aphel  with  —  and  in  the  Passives  with 
— ,  tyn  .  Of  the  two  Participles  in  the  Active  forms,  the 
first  has  —  constantly  in  the  last  syllable,  and  is  active  ; 
the  second  has  —  in  the  ultimate,  with  a  passive  significa¬ 
tion. 

5.  The  formation  of  the  persons  is  more  simple  in  the* 
Praeter  and  Imperative,  in  the  Future  more  complex. 
The  following  table  exhibits  the  letters  and  syllables  em¬ 
ployed  in  forming  the  different  persons. 

Sing.  3.  m.  3.  f.  2.  m.  2.  f.  1.  c.  PI.  3.  m.  3.  f.  2.  m.  2.  £  lie. 

Praeter.  —  rv—  Pi —  Pi —  Pi —  si —  M —  pPi —  ‘iPl —  M2 — 

Imperat.  —  “1—  H —  M2  — 

Future  — 1 1  —PI  —Pi  p— PI  —  N  p — 1 1  •j—*i  p— Pi  *j— PI  —3 

6.  When  sufformatives  are  added  which  take  the 
tone, 


3 


34 


12.  REGULAR  VERBS  ;  NOTES  ON  THE  PARADIGM. 


(i a )  The  vowels  — ,  —  and  —  (the  latter  only  in  the 
Fut.  Peal)  of  the  final  syllable  of  the  ground-form,  are 
dropped,  provided  the  sufformative  commences  with  a 
vowel.  Those  which  precede  and  S—  of  the  3d  person 
plural  Praeter,  and  the  termination  of  the  Imp.,  since 
these  sufformatives  do  not  take  the  tone,  are  retained. 

(b)  In  the  3d  pers.  fern,  and  1st  pers.  com.  sing.  Praet. 
in  Peal  and  Ithpeel,  where  two  consonants  would,  accord¬ 
ing  to  the  above  rule,  come  together  without  a  vowel, 
Hhireq  is  introduced  to  facilitate  pronunciation. 

Note.  The  principal  variations  of  the  Chaldee,  from  the  mode  of  form¬ 
ing  the  persons  in  Hebrew,  are,  that,  in  the  former,  the  2d  p.  sing.  Praet. 
has,  generally,  no  distinction  of  gender,  while  the  3d  p.  plur.  has;  and  that 
the  3.  plur.  fern.  Fut.  takes  ^  instead  of  n  for  its  preformative.  The  suf¬ 
formatives  of  the  Future  (e.  g.  *]— )  are  capable  of  an  easier  explanation 
than  in  Hebrew. 

§  12.  Notes  on  the  paradigm  of  the  Regular  Verbs. 

I.  Generally. 

1.  Forms  with  —  are  often  written  fully  (*'— )  or  even  with  — ,  e.  g. 

a.  1  sing,  and  2.  f.  plur.  Praeter;  as  Gen.  3 :  10,  (rP2?£i23  Pseudo- 

Jonathan,)  prying  Ex.  1  :  18.  Ps.  Jon. 

b.  Pael  and  Aphel ;  e.  g.  *p£rix  2  K.  6  :  23,  Ps.  16 :  2. 

c.  The  Part.  act.  in  Pe.  e.  g.  nti3  Dan.  4 :  10,  20,  r^52  Gen.  3  :  15.  Jeru. 
Targ.  “QD  Gen.  3  :  9.  Pseudo-Jon.  should  doubtless  be  read  . 

cl.  The  Participle  Peil  sometimes,  though  seldom,  appears  in  a  con¬ 
tracted  form  ;  as  bpp  Dan.  5  :  27. 

2.  Praeter.  The  2.  p.  sing.  masc.  sometimes  as  tfpbrjp  Prov.  23 : 8. 
2  Sam.  14 : 13.  The  1st  pers.  sing.  m.  sometimes  appears  in  the  form 

Gen.  3:10,  13,  Pseud.  Jon.;  or  even  like  the  2d  person;  e.  g. 

Gen.  3  : 22,  Pseud.  Jon.  The  3.  p.  pi.  m.  sometimes  in  the  later 
Targums  takes  a  paragogic  ) ;  e.  g.  Gen.  3 :  7,  Ps.  148:7. 

The  fern,  sometimes  appears  ending  in  *]—;  as  ‘pOK  Ruth  1  : 10,  ‘fiaa  1 :  19. 

3.  Future.  Instead  of  the  formative  *  the  Targum  of  Proverbs,  in  ac¬ 
cordance  with  the  Syriac,  exhibits  also  2;  e.  g.  Prov.  16 :  10,  etc. 
Compare  Dathe,  de  ratione  consensus  version.  Chald.  et  Syr.  Prov.  Leip¬ 
zig,  1764.  pp.  16. — Instead  of  ,  appears  *1  as  termination  of  the  3d  p.  pi. 
m.  Ez.  4  :  12.  wn1* . 

/  •  r 

4.  Infinitive.  The  biblical  Chaldee  has  H—  sometimes  instead  of  X— 
termination  of  all  the  Inf.  excepting  Peal.  Dan.  2 : 12,  14.  Ez.  7:14. 
Dan.  6 : 4.  In  the  Targums  sometimes  appears  n*  (without  suffixes) 
Esth.  1  :  5.  Ps.  102  :  23.  Sometimes  the  characteristic  ending  N—  is 


12.  REGULAR  VERBS  J  NOTES  ON  THE  PARADIGM. 


35 


omitted ;  as  1  Sam.  26 :  25,  30 :  8.  Pael,  Aphel  and  the  Passives  have 
sometimes  a  53  prefixed  to  the  Inf.  e.  g.  £<a|p53  Sol.  S.  1:7,  K12K253 
Deut.  32  :  23,  Jerusalem  Targ.  Forms  like  Lev.  13  :  7.  Jon. 

Job  1 :  13,  Deut.  18 :  10.  Jer.  T.,  with  paragogic  *1—  ,  are  more 

rare. 

5.  Passives.  Instead  of  the  preformative  rx  the  biblical  Chaldee  fre¬ 
quently  exhibits  np  (Ez.  6:2,  &c.);  the  later  Targums  in  the  1st.  conj. 
n3 ;  e.  g.  *)p53ri3  1  Sam.  23  :  7 ;  (agreeing  with  the  Rabbinical  conj.  Nith- 
pael) ;  and  in  the  Inf.  of  all  the  conj.  n53 ;  as  St52ir>3ri53  Ex.  21 :  20,  Jer.  T. 
Xp^tnG53  Deut.  32  :  1,  Jer.  T.  On  the  other  hand  Prof  Winer  in  the  second 
ed.  of  his  grammar  remarks  that  the  Participles  sometimes  drop  their  ini¬ 
tial  53,  and  cites  as  examples  3n53:^3t  Job  28  :  21,  and  pit  Gen.  31  :  15. 

J.  T. ;  but  Walton’s  Polyglott  has  in  these  passages  3053B53  and  it325EHnit . 

II.  Notes  on  the  several  conjugations. 

1.  Peal.  a.  Some  verbs,  especially  such  as  are  intransitive,  take  —  (■’— ) 

or  —  (*’— :)  and  a  few  i  as  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  Praeter;  e.  g. 
133X2  to  be  evil.  Sitp  to  be  good,  2rp  to  sit,  2^2513  to  lie  {recline),  pppi  to  be 
strong,  Tjift'n  to  sleep ,  Gen.  2  :  21,  to  be  dry.  These  vowels  remain  in 

those  persons  where  —  is  usually  retained;  e.  g.  n^itd  Prov.  30  :  7,  itsbitip 
Ez.  5  :  9,  4  :  12,  Jer.  49  :  4.  The  3d  p.  sing.  fern,  also  retains  its 

vowel;  as  r£tt2  Ez.  4:24,  Ezek.  26:2. — Such  verbs  in  —  or  — 

form  the  Imp.  in  — ,  —  or  — ;  as  t3ab  1  K.  22 :  30,  btit  Gen.  22 :  2,  app 
Job  2:5;  the  Future  in  — ,  —  or  i ;  as  523  2  2  Dan.  5:16,  Deut.  2S  :  30, 
fpppp  Gen.  31 :  35.  When  two  forms  of  the  Future,  as  —  and  — ,  or  -  and 
i  coexist  in  the  same  verb,  they  have  different  significations;  e.  g.  2‘“i p*; 
Num.  1 :  51,  [who]  will  approach,  (Future.)  2  jp?  Isa.  5  :  19,  let  [it]  ap¬ 
proach,  (Optative,)  etc.  But  verbs  in  i  form  the  Fut.  in  ^ ;  e.  g. 

Ps.  121 : 4. 

b.  The  Infinitive,  in  the  later  Targums,  has  sometimes  the  termination 
K-;  e*  S’  ^7253  Ps*  118  :  7.  Sometimes  it  has  the  form  bpp53  ,  Job  29  :  6. 
Ruth  4:6;  less  frequently  like  the  Heb.  bilip  or  bii3p  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  49 :  6. 
Ruth  2  :  1.  Ps.  105  : 14,  (even  with  suff.,)  or  as  Inf  absol.  fc'bil3p  Lev.  13  :  7, 
Pseud.  Jon. 

c.  The  Imperative  exhibits,  in  a  few  instances,  the  full  orthography 
^lip,  2  Sam.  13:20.  Ps.  31 :  24.  It  sometimes  occurs  with  Hholem  in 
accordance  with  Hebrew  analogy  ;  as  “jin 2  Ps.  26  :  2 ;  especially  with  suf¬ 
fixes  ;  e.  g.  'pbiap  1  Sam.  20:8. 

2.  Ithpeel.  The  last  syllable  sometimes  takes  —  (*’—);  e.  g.  ppnttin 
Dan.  2  :  44,  comp.  2  K.  7  :  4.  Prov.  3  :  5.  Gen.  9  :  7,  SQWnx  Eccl.  12  :  11. 
Sometimes  — ;  as  3bsni<  Gen.  14:  15. — Preformative  sometimes  rs$, 
Dan.  7:15. 

3.  Pael.  it  preformative  of  1.  sing.  Fut.  has  sometimes  — ;  e.  g.  *i&2it 

Isa.  42  :  9,  MbpX  63:3;  and  even  *1— ;  as  Deut.  32 : 1,  Jon.,  where 

the  Jer.  T.  has  . — As  in  Hebrew,  Daghesh  forte  is  sometimes 

omitted  when  the  middle  radical  has  Sheva. . 

4.  Ithpaal.  Final  vowel  sometimes  —  or  — ;  e.  g.  c^anit  Hos.  4:11, 


36 


13.  PARTICIPLES  ;  PERSONAL  INFLECTION. 


TpBttpK  Ps.  105  : 25,  *j325na  Gen.  3  :  15,  Jer.  T.  Heb.  Pual  forms  occa¬ 
sionally  appear  instead  of  this  conjugation;  as  “j^Tp  Isa.  53:5, 

Gen.  28  :  17,  Jon.  “P^sp  Gen.  37  :  3,  Jon. 

5.  Aphel.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee,  and  occasionally  in  the  Targums  n 

appears,  as  the  preformative  of  this  conj.  (bppli  ),  and  even  in  the  Fut. 
and  Part,  after  the  characteristic  prefixes ;  e.  g.  Ez.  5 :  12,  S|t*pn 

Dan.  5  :  29,  7  :  24,  p'lfSppi  Ez.  4: 13,  ■pppp.pp  6  :  10. — Hiphil  some¬ 

times  takes  the  place  of  Aphel  in  the  biblical  Chaldee;  e.  g.  b-'ftafi  Dan. 
5:20,  7;  22. 

6.  Ittaphal.  For  this  conjugation,  which  indeed  elsewhere  is  seldom 
found,  the  biblical  Chaldee  constantly  exhibits  Ilophal ;  e.  g.  Ez.  4:  15, 
Dan.  4  :  33,  7  :  11,  (with  Qamets  Hhatuph  or  Shureq.) 


13.  Personal  inflection  of  the  Participles. 


1.  Tlie  Participles  of  all  the  conjugations,  in  order  to 
supply  the  want  of  a  Present  tense,  are,  as  in  Hebrew, 
construed  with  the  separate  Personal  Pronouns  of  the 
first  and  second  persons ;  e.  g.  bpp  I  MU.  Beside  this 
mode,  the  Clialdee  has  one  peculiar  to  itself,  viz.,  to  inflect 
the  Participle  by  the  addition  of  pronominal  fragments, 
thus  forming  in  fact  a  new  tense.  The  two  Participles 
Peal  are,  after  this  mode,  inflected  as  follows. 


2  m. 

2  f. 

1  m. 

1  f. 


First  Participle. 


Sing. 

nbpp  * 

Plur. 

(Ws:# 

‘ipbpp 

a:bi2p 

KSsbtsp 

T  T  :  *T 

Ifr? !? 

Second  Participle. 


Sing. 

nb^pp 

Plur. 

pn^pp 

^nb'ipp 

Kjb^pp 

ir^pp 

awab^p 

t  t  •  A* 

2.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee  a  kind  of  passive  preterite 
tense  is  in  use,  formed  by  appending  the  sufformatives  of 
the  Praeter  to  the  Part.  Peil.  It  takes  the  place  of  Ith- 
peel. 


1.  c. 

nb^pp 

«jb*ipp 


2.  f.  2.  m. 

nb^p  an-  p\b*>t)p 

:  :  •  h  t  s  :  •  h 

■jnb^pp  pnb^pp 


3.  f.  3.  m. 

nb^pp  b^pp  Sing. 

ab">pp  frpp  Plur. 


*  Qatelath ,  not  qotlath ,  §  2.  9.  a.  The  learner  should  bear  in  mind  that  a 
knowledge  of  forms  alone  can  enable  him  to  distinguish  Qamets  Hhatuph  from 
Qamets. 


14.  15.  VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS. 


37 


Comp.  Dan.  5:27,  28,  30,  7:4,  6,  11.  Ezra  5:14.  That  these  are 
not  to  be  considered  forms  of  Praeter  Peal  with  —  is  plain,  partly  from 
their  passive  signification,  and  partly  from  the  fact  that  other  forms  of  the 
same  are  usually  employed  in  the  Praeter  in  an  active  sense.. 

§  14.  Unfrequent  Conjugations  ami  Quadriliterals. 

1.  As  in  Hebrew,  certain  unfrequent  conjugations 

occur,  some  of  wliicb  are  confined  to  particular  classes  of 
irregular  verbs.  ♦ 

a.  Poet  and  Itlipocd ,  characteristics,  same  as  in  He¬ 
brew  ;  e..g.  psio  Hos.  13  :  5,  nnio  Num.  11:12;  especially 
in  verbs  Hi ;  as  fflai® ,  mainaa  . 

b.  Polel  and  Ithpolal ,  in  verbs  ys ;  e.  g.  main  Ps.  75:8. 
Dan.  4:34,  Minna  Dan.  5:23.  Ps.  107  :  25. 

c.  Palel  and  Ithpalel ;  as  masra ,  . 

d.  Palpel ,  formed  by  repeating  the  first  and  third 
radicals,  and  Ithpalpcd  /  e.  g.  b:nb:n  Gen.  11:9,  nnmata , 
(from  D ra)  Judg.  3  :  22,  Span  (from  rpn)  Ps.  143  :  3. 
Comp.  §§  19,  22. 

e.  STiaphel  and  Ishtaphcd  ;  e.  g.  bbptj  Ez.  4:12.  Gen. 
49  : 10,  nnpMtf  Gen.  49  :  10,  bbpnfl^  Ez.  4  :  13. 

Ez.  6  :  15,  is  Shaphel  from  NS?  .  Gen.  2  :  2,  without  X  ,  ■’XHtf  ; 
Passive  to  procure  the  completion  of  a  thing ,  to  finish. 

2.  Quadriliteral  verbs  follow  usually  the  form  of  Pael ; 
•e.  g.  snap  (Syr.  i.  q.  xarrjyoQtiv)  Job  37  :  20,  bsno 
20 :  15,  Djinn  to  interpret .  The  origin  of  these  verbs  is 
to  be  explained,  for  the  most  part,  as  in  Hebrew.  See 
Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  861,  seq. 

Note.  Altogether  peculiar  is  the  verb  Dan.  3  :  2S.  Fat. 

Isa.  53  :  11.  Inf  J-DpttJ  Dan.  3:15.  Part.  Dan.  6  :  28.  Pass. 

Gen.  32:30.  Syr.  .  This  Chaldee  form  should  however 

be  regarded  rather  as  a  kind  of  Poel  than  as  a  quadriliteral. 

§  15.  Verbs  with  Gutturals. 

1.  The  gutturals  (tf ,  in ,  n  ?  $ ,  and  to  some  extent  also, 
n)  present  the  same  peculiarities  as  in  Hebrew.  It  will 


.38 


15.  VEEBS  WITH  GUTTUEALS. 


be  sufficient  therefore  to  give  examples  of  the  most  im¬ 
portant  forms. 

2.  Verbs  Pe  guttural.  Peal ,  Praet.  f.  rnn?  2.  m. 

win*  1.  c.  niw,  Imp.  in*,  ra:?,  Tp2,  bn*,  (b^ta),  wa 
Ex.  4  :  4,  fern.  1"p2,  ('Htta  Gen.  12  :  13),  Plur.  wn*  Ex. 
5:16,  *maa  Dan.  2  :  9,  Inf.  TOpa,  Trrja,  Fut.  TiTiT],  "p??, 
in*? ,  pn^ ,  Participles  W ,  Tn? . — Ithpeel ,  inipria  ?  nnsjina . 
— Pael,  Praet.  *73?,  Fut.  *7^ . — Iikpaal ,  lT3$tiK  . — Aphel, 
Praet.  nnsja  ,  ,  rnna ,  Fut.  Jpbfii  ?  ESfi?  ,  Part,  5]bra . 

3.  Verbs  Ayin  guttural.  Peal,  Praet.  'jnp  £  nnpp  ? 
1.  c.  rvprn ;  Imp.  "pin  ;  ('jins)  ;  Inf.  ‘jfti'a ;  Fut.  ‘pin? ;  Part, 
•jns ,  pnn . — Ithjpeel ,  pinna  ?  prana . — P$e?,  nhn ,  Inf.  anp£ . 
— Aphel,  pina. 

4.  Verbs  Lameclh  guttural.  Peal ,  Praet.  nnin  fern, 

nrarc  ;  Imp.  rpin ,  inn® ;  Fut.  nn®i ,  nb®?  (niB®?)  ;  Part, 
rp® ,  rpn® . — Ithpeel ,  rpn®a ,  fern.  nnnn®a  . — P$cZ  Praet. 
rpp ,  Fut.  fin®? ;  Part.  act.  nn®tt  Dan.  4  :  34. — Ithpaal , 
nnn®a . — Aphel ,  nn®a ,  ,  1st.  pers.  nnn®a  . 


Note  1.  When  the  first  radical  of  a  verb  Pe  guttural  happens  to  be  X, 
this  letter  is  frequently  dropped  in  Ithpeel  when  it  would  be  without  a 
vowel  (i.  e.  would  have  a  composite  Sheva),  and  by  way  of  compensation, 
r  of  the  prefix  takes  Daghesh  forte;  e.  g.  tnfiit  instead  of  Num. 

15  :  13,  35  :  33. 

Note  2.  Verbs  Lamedh  guttural  have  the  Praet.  3.  sing.  fern,  some¬ 
times  terminating  in  —  —  or  —  —  (the  latter  only  in  verbs  lb)  with  the 
*  tone  on  the  penult;  e.  g.  rn^fit  Gen.  30:16,  S"HEfit  Dan.  5:  10,  rns’n 
Gen.  16  :  3. 

Note  3.  When  the  1st  radical  takes  a  comp.  Sheva.  verbs  fits  afid 
HS  usually  have  — ,  Dan.  2:9.  Sol.  S.  5:3.;  verbs  hs  and  SB,  gene¬ 
rally  — . 

Note  4.  Forms  like  pbfift  Dan.  7 :  22,  belong  not  to  Aphel  but  to  Hi- 
pliil,  and  are  Hebraisms. 

Note  5.  Occasionally  verbs  with  fit  for  their  second  radical,  exhibit  *> 
instead  of  that  letter  in  Pael ;  as  from  bfitd ,  T’d  from  “litttJ.  Sfse 
§  6.  d. 


16.  REGULAR  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS. 


39 


§  10.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffix  Pronouns. 

1.  Of  the  suffixes  given  above  in  the  table,  §  8,  2. 
those  which  begin  with  a  vowel,  are  generally  appended 
to  verbal  forms  terminating  in  a  consonant;  and  vice 
versa ,  those  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  to  verbal 
forms  terminating  in  a  vowel.  The  Imperative  and  Par¬ 
ticiples  must  be  excepted,  as  they  frequently  take  those 
suffixes  (of  the  1st  pers.  sing,  and  plur.)  which  have  no 
union- vowel ;  as  ^bt)]? ,  ajbttfp . 

2.  The  changes  which  verbs  undergo  in  consequence 
of  the  accession  of  pronominal  suffixes,  respect  chiefly 
the  vowels,  which  are  sometimes  dropped,  sometimes 
transj)osed.  See  Paradigm  II. 

( a )  Peal ,  Praeter.  Before  suffixes  which  have  a 
union-vowel  the  3d  pers.  sing.  masc.  has  the  form  btpjp ;  as 
sjbtpp  he  hilled  thee ,  tfjbpj?  lie  hilled  us ,  pabtpg  he  hilled  them 
[those  men].  Before  pb  and  15  the  original  form  remains. 
The  3d  pers.  plur.  masc.  becomes  (before  pb  and  15, 
pbtpg ,)  the  fern,  which  is  rare,  btpg  ;  as  ^btpp ,  ^nbtpg ,  the  2d 
masc.  .  The  2d  pers.  sing,  remains  unchanged, 

though  in  a  few  cases  we  have  for  the  fern,  ‘'pbttj? ,  Jer. 
15:10.  The  1st  pers.  sing,  takes  the  form  (rarely 
as  Num.  23  : 11,  Jer.  30  : 14,  or  snb^tpjp  Gen.  3  :  22, 
Pseudo- Jon.)  The  1st  pers.  plur.  has  the  form  lb“5jp  and 
takes  suffixes  for  the  most  part  with  the  union-vowel  — ; 
e.  g.  ^nrb-jp  we  hilled  him. 

In  the  Venice  Polyglott,  and  occasionally  in  Walton,  the  3d  p.  sing, 
masc.  Praet.  retains  its  vowel  under  the  second  radical :  as  for  fnnbttS. 

'  ••  t  :  ! 

(Id)  Future .  The  3d  fern.,  2d  masc.,  and  1st  pers.  sing, 
receive  suffixes  precisely  like  the  3d  pers,  masc.,  and  that, 
for  the  most  part,  with  Nun  epenthetic.  The  2d  and 
3d  persons  plural  fern,  take  the  form  of  the  masculine, 


40 


17.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  GENERALLY. 


i.  e.  with  suff.  these  forms  are  common .  See  Job  19  :  15. 
Gen.  30  :  13.  Ex.  1  : 16. 

(c)  Imperative.  Forms  with  —  in  the  2d  pers.  plur. 

masc.  throw  this  vowel  back  to  the  first  radical  before 
suffixes;  e.  g.  Ex.  16:25. 

( d )  The  Inf.  and  Part.  Peal,  having  the  form  of 
nouns,  may  take  the  suffixes  either  of  verbs  or  of  nouns ; 
as  ‘to?!?*  and  ‘’jbtpjp'a . 

(e)  In  all  those  persons  of  Pael  and  Aphel ,  which  ter¬ 
minate  in  the  third  radical,  —  is  dropped  before  suffixes 
which  have  a  union  vowel.  The  same  takes  place,  (on 
account  of  the  tone  being  thrown  forward,)  in  the  forms 

,  ibpjpa .  The  2d  pers.  sing,  fern.,  the  2d  pers.  plur. 
masc.,  and  the  1st  pers.  plur.  in  the  Praeter  receive  suf¬ 
fixes  as  in  Peal. 

(/)  The  Infinitives  of  all  the  conjugations  except 
Peal  take  before  suffixes  the  termination  ni ;  e.  g.  , 

rpnibtjjja.  (Sometimes,  though  rarely,  this  ending  ap¬ 
pears  out  of  the  suffix  state.  Ps.  102  :  32.  Hum.  9:17. 
Est.  1  :  5.) 

Note  1.  An  epenthetic  3  is  frequently  inserted  between  the  verb  and 
the  suffix.  This  is  most  common  in  the  Fut.  and  Imp. ;  rare  in  the  Praet. 
(ex.  Ps.  16:7.  Isa.  63:9.  Gen.  6:2.  Jud.  13:23.  2  K.  20:13;)  and 
still  less  frequent  in  the  Inf.  (Prov.  22  : 21*  Sol.  S.  6:11.) 

Note  2.  In  the  Targum  on  Prov.  appears  an  epenthetic  '  ;  e.  g.  . 

rupSH,  4:6,  8. 

§  17.  Irregular  Verbs  generally. 

1.  Of  these  there  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  two  general 
divisions,  defective  and  quiescent.  The  irregularity  gen¬ 
erally  respects  but  one  letter.  Verbs  which  exhibit  irre¬ 
gularity  in  two  of  their  radicals  are  called  doubly  anoma¬ 
lous,  §  24. 

2.  The  first  general  division  comprehends  two  classes, 
viz.  fb,  and  TJ ;  the  second,  four,  viz.  as,  *b  (is),  lb  (fiff 


19.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  J  AYIN  DOUBLED. 


41 


and  sb .  Tlie  last  include  also  sucli  verbs  as  in  Hebrew 
belong  to  the  class  fib . 

Note.  The  division  of  irregular  verbs  into  defective  and  quiescent ,  is  not 
of  special  importance,  and  is  neglected  by  the  most  recent  grammarians. 


18. 


'Verbs  Pe  Nun. 


The  irregularity  in  tliese  verbs  results  from  the  same 
cause,  and  is  almost  throughout  the  same  as  in  Hebrew. 

1.  The  letter  3,  where 'it  would  otherwise  terminate  a 
mixed  syllable,  is  assimilated  to  the  succeeding  consonant ; 
e.  g.  ps^for  pss'a  . 

2.  In  the  Imper.  Peal,  where  3  would  regularly  stand 
without  a  vowel  in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  that  let¬ 
ter  is  ordinarily  dropped;  e.  g.  p£>  for  P&2,  (bss  ?  Jer.  25  :  27.) 
Beside  these,  which  are  common  to  Hebrew, 

3.  Some  forms  have,  usually,  a  different  characteristic 
vowel  from  that  of  regular  verbs :  thus  the  Future  is 
generally  like  pa?  or  pis4) ;  Aphel  .  In  the  Imp.  the 
forms  p-S  j  pis  and  pS  are  about  equally  common,  though 
not  ordinarily  found  in  the  same  verb. 

4.  Ithpeel,  Pael,  and  Ithpaal  present  no  irregularity. 


Note  1.  From  No.  1.  there  are  many  exceptions,  chiefly  in  verbs  which 
have  a  guttural  for  the  second  radical ;  e.  g.  dlfd1?  Isa.  5  :  9,  ‘Y’ftsa  Prov. 
29:13.  (But  nfi5-  is  inflected  according  to  the  rule  above;  as  Fut.  tvirp 

[instead  of  rvinv],  Aphel  PPHiJ  .)  Also  in  some  others;  e.  g.  Dan. 

2  :  16,  ‘jtnsn  Ez.  7  :  20,  ptid  Ps.  91 :  7,  pBip  Ez.  5 :  14. 

Note  2.  The  verb  *jp3  takes  —  in  the  Fut.  as  its  characteristic  vowel ; 

8.  Once  — ,  Dan.  2  ;  16. 


e.  g.  “ipX  Ex.  25  : 16,  *jpp!  Deut.  21 


§  19.  Verbs  Ay  in  doubled. 

The  anomalies  of  these  verbs,  which  accord  only  in 
part  with  the  same  class  in  Hebrew,  are  particularly  the 
following. 

(a)  The  root  is  a  monosyllable,  with  its  vowel  be¬ 
tween  the  first  and  second  radicals,  in  Peal,  (excepting 
the  participles,)  and  in  Aphel ;  and  so,  either 


42 


20.  IRREGULAR  VERBS ;  PE  YODH. 


(1)  No  trace  of  the  doubling  of  the  second  radical 

remains ;  as  is  the  case  in  Peal  Praet.  3d  pers.  sing.  masc.. 
2d  masc.  and  fern.,  and  in  the  1st  and  2d  persons  plur.,  in 
the  Imp.  masc.  sing,  and  fern,  plur.,  and  more  rarely  in 
the  1st  Part.;  e.  g.  p^,  ptl ,  ;  or 

(2)  It  is  indicated  by  Daghesh  forte  in  the  2d  radical 

in  those  persons  of  the  Praet.  and  Imp.  Peal,  the  sufform- 
atives  of  which  commence  with  a  vowel ;  as  npn ,  ? 

*pb ;  or,  finally, 

(3)  It  is  compensated  by  Daghesh  forte  in  the  first 
radical  in  the  Put.  and  Inf.  Peal,  and  throughout  Aphel ; 
as  P^ ,  piv ;  or  even  sometimes,  in  Ithpeel,  in  fi  of  the 
preformative  syllable  ;  e.  g.  p^na . 

(5)  Instead  of  Paid  and  ItJipaal ,  which  are  regularly 
formed,  (see  Dan.  4:10,  7  :  20.  Ps.  35  : 15,  42  :  6,)  Pal- 
pel  and  Itlvpalpal  are  generally  used ;  as  ppp^ ,  p^jp^K , 
Job  9  :  17,  30  :  14.  Isa.  21:9;  or  Poel  and  Ithjpoal ;  e.  g. 
Dan.  4:15.  Job  9  :  6, 


The  Participles  of  Peal  are  usually  regular.  The  second,  or  Peil,  ap¬ 
pears  once  in  the  form  p^p-j  Ex.  32  :  20. 

An  example  of  Ithpeel  regularly  formed,  is  mtanx  Am.  7 :  1.  Jer. 
50 :  27. 

The  following  from  the  Biblical  Chaldee  are  Hebraistic  forms.  Aph. 
Dan.  2  : 24,  sip^Ji  6  :  25,  p^ptt  2:40;  Hoph.  ,  tesn  Dan.  5:13,  15. 
For  such  forms  as  hbspft  Dan.  4  : 3,  and  siV'Sirt  Gen.  19 : 10,  Jon. ;  see  5  2. 7.  a. 


§  20.  Verbs  JPe  Yodh  (Pe  Vav). 

1.  There  are  three  classes  of  verbs  which,  in  the 
ground  form,  have  ^  for  their  first  radical,  viz.  (1)  Verbs 
originally  lb;  (2)  Verbs  properly  *4;  and  (3)  Those  in 
which  the  i  is  not  treated  as  a  quiescent,  but  is  assimi¬ 
lated  like  the  2  of  verbs  p . 

2.  Verbs  originally  *&,  which  constitute  the  most 
numerous  class. 

(a)  In  the  Imp.  Peal,  which  is  generally  pronounced 


20.  IRREGULAR  VERBS;  PE  YODEL 


43 


with  — ,  drop  the  first  radical ;  e.  g.  Fi  from  3H? ,  ntt  from 
nrn  ,  n“>n  from  nw  . 

(5)  In  the  Future  Peal  retain  it  quiescent  in  — ,  in 
consequence  of  which  the  last  syllable  takes  —  or  V  as 
its  characteristic  vowel ;  e.  g.  "ib^  ’,  5pb^ .  In  accordance 
with  the  remark  §  6.  c.  (4),  the  quiescent  11  is,  in  these 
forms,  frequently  dropped ;  e.  g.  Prov.  11:25.  Ps.  104  :  4. 
J ob.  o  :  4. 

(c)  Resume  their  original  1 ,  which  cpiiesces  in  Hho- 
lem,  throughout  Aphel  and  Ittaphal ;  e.  g.  SjOii ,  ?ppb , 
qoina: .  Comp.  Hoph.  Job  33  : 19. 

Ithpeel  and  the  whole  of  the  2d  conj.  are  for  the  most  part  regular.  In 
the  latter,  some  verbs  retain  1  as  their  first  radical ;  e.  g.  Ps.  88  :  13, 

Kroinx  Eccl.  9  •-  3.  In  Aphel  forms  with  ft,  after  the  preformatives  of 
the  Fut.  and  Part.,  are  not  uncommon:  e.  g.  Dan.  2:5,  5:17. 

Ps.  55:14. 

3.  The  first  radical  of  verbs  originally  *'b  quiesces, 

(a)  In  Fut.  Pe,  ordinarily  in  — ;  e.  g.  2  Kings 
1 : 14,  Ps.  102  :  12.  But  compare  Isa.  7:18. 

(b)  In  Aphel,  in  — ;  e.  g.  Ps.  49:19.  Jer. 

10:5.  Mic.  1:8.  But  compare  b^a  Zech.  11:2. 

The  difference  between  these  two  classes  of  verbs  is  not,  however,  so 
great  as  to  prevent  their  forms  being  frequently  interchanged,  especially 
in  Aphel.  Thus  we  have,  at  the  same  time,  and  -taia  Gen.  17  : 16, 

and  b^pp,  Ps.  66  : 6,  and  “ipl’K,  pa?,  (in  Heb.  *'S)  becomes  in 

Aph’el  p^itf . 

4.  A  class  of  verbs  4  assimilate  their  first  radical  to 
the  following  letter,  in  the  Inf.  and  Fut.  Peal,  and  in 
Aphel ;  so  that  they  are  in  these  forms  entirely  analo¬ 
gous  to  verbs  .  To  this  class  belong  ,  Aphel  rp2tf ; 

,  Aphel  Ipstrt ,  Deut.  34  :  6,  Jon. ;  ,  Aphel  ; 

also  in  some  of  their  forms,  ,  nrn  and  bp^ ;  e.  g.  Inf. 

Gen.  15  :  13,  npft?  Ps.  133  :  1,  bptt  Kum.  13  :  31.  Fut. 
yT.  1  Sam.  20  :  30,  (even  Is.  4:15.  Dan.  2:9,)  also 
nr? ;  ^  2  Sam.  16  :  18,  b^  Ezek.  7:19. 


44 


21,  22.  IEEEGULAE  YEEBS  ;  PE  ALEPH  ;  AYIN  YAY. 


§  21.  Verbs  Pe  Aleph. 

A  few  verbs  are  treated  not  only  as  gutturals,  but 
at  tbe  same  time  as  quiescents  ;  viz. 

(a)  TfiSj  ,  bps ,  aina ,  .  Tbe  of  these  verbs,  in 

tbe  Future  and  Inf.  Peal  quiesces  in  — ;  e.  g.  bs&O ,  and 
sometimes  is  even  exchanged  for  11 ;  as  W? ,  W1*? . 
Throughout  Aphel  it  becomes  i;  as  bpia,  nnitf.  (bp^a 
Deut.  32:13,  is  altogether  peculiar.)  An  instance  of 
Hophal ,  ‘WPi  ?  occurs  Dan.  7:11. 

"jtx  in  its  third  conjugation  takes  the  Hebraizing  form  (as  if  by 

contraction  from  ,)  Gen.  15  :  6.  Job  4  :  18,  15  :  22.  Pass, 

Gen.  42  :  20. — For  isrx  see  h  24.  2. 

t-: 

( b )  ‘"Da ,  5jb&  and  KOI*  frequently  take  in  the  Fut.  and 

Part.  Pael,  the  contracted  form  v|b«tf  ,  ,  in  consequence 

of  which  is  frequently  dropped. 

(<?)  The  of  some  others  is  dropped  in  Ithpaal  and 
compensated  by  Daghesh  forte  in  n  of  the  prefix,  which 
also  receives  the  vowel  which  belonged  to  ;  e.  g. 
for  ‘laana  1  Sam.  2:5.  Ezek.  47:11. 

§  22.  Verbs  Ay  in  Van  (Ay  in  Yodh). 

The  commutation  of  1  and  11 ,  in  these  verbs,  is  more 
abundant  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  The  following 
particulars  are  worthy  of  notice. 

1.  In  the  first  conjugation  (with  the  exception  of  the 
1st  Part,  which  has  the  form  Dtf £)  and  in  the  third,  these 
verbs  are  monosyllabic  throughout ;  as  n*W$. 

The  preformatives  of  the  Fut.  and  Inf.  of  both  conjuga¬ 
tions  generally  have  — ,  though  in  the  later  Targums,  they 
are  not  unfrequently  pointed  with  — ,  _  or  —  ;  e.  g.  tiftnx 
Ruth  1:17,  AWK  Gen.  27  :  4.  The  form  jpr>,  Fut.  Peal 
from  -pn ,  Ez.  5:5,  6:5,  is  entirely  peculiar. 

„  Note.  The  2d  Part.  Peal  is  sometimes  like  the  Inf.  Wp,  Dan.  6 :  18. 


I 


§  23.  'IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;  LAMEDH  ALEPH.  45 

2.  In  Ithpeel ,  the  first  radical  is  pronounced  with  — , 
and  the  of  the  preformative  doubled,  Dpna .  In  the 
later  Targums  occurs  also  the  lengthened  form  DjjP^K  Ex. 
40:11.  Hhireq  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  Qamets ; 
e.  g.  crpni*  Jer.  33  :  22.  Gen.  38:26,  Jer.  T.  Dan.  4  :  9. 

3.  Patl  and  Ithpaal  are  regularly  inflected  from  the 

ground-forms  D?p  and  .  Many  verbs,  however, 

substitute  for  these  conjugations  Polel  Dttip  or  Palpel 
apftp. 

4.  Aphel  has  occasionally  the  form  of  verbs  lb  ;  e.  g. 
a^pitf  Ps.  78 : 13.  Gen.  18  : 16,  Jon.  p^pitf  Ps.  14  :  2.  See 
1,  of  this  section. 

5.  The  following  verbs  are  inflected  as  NP ; 

(a)  n*n,  ma,  n*>p?  trto,  and  SpT,  in  Peal;  thus 
n^p  ,  ,  rrcpo,  etc.  Gen.  27:1.  Prov.  23:22. 

1  Sam.  12  :  2  ;  Imp.  aflp ,  ‘Vfcpto ,  Ez.  4  :  41  ;  Fut.  SpT!* 
Deut.  15:6. 

(5)  pa  in  j Tthpeel,  fully,  pans ,  or  contracted,  ? 
Job  28  :  23,  11 :  12,  37  :  14.  Ps.  73  :  17. 

Note.  Those  verbs  which  have  1  moveable  for  their  middle  radical,  (as 
ip,  K13  etc.),  do  not  belong  here,  but  are  regular.  The  number  of 
such  verbs  is  greater  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  Some  verbs  with  the 
same  radicals  exist  in  both  forms,  and  in  that  case  have  different  significa¬ 
tions;  to  look  at,  *vn  to  be  while  ;  Hid  to  sink  down ,  rnd  to  sprout. 

§  23.  Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph. 

This  class  includes  all  those  verbs  which  are  compre¬ 
hended  in  ITeb.  under  the  two  classes  rib  (including  verbs 
originally  lb  and  ^b ,)  and  ab ,  the  difference  between  the 
two  classes  being  entirely  lost  in  Chaldee.  Rarely,  (and 
almost  exclusively  in  the  biblical  Chaldee),  the  radical 
form  of  these  verbs  terminates  in  i“i_  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2:16, 
4:8,  6:3.  Num.  5  :  26.  Frequently,  and  in  the  later 
Targums,  uniformly,  they  end  in  or  ‘1—  .  Their  chief 
anomalies  are  the  following. 


46 


§  23.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;  LAMEDH  ALEPH. 


1.  In  those  forms  which  terminate  in  the  3d  radical, 

(a)  In  Peal  Praeter,  and  Inf.,  as  well  as  in  the  Fut. 
Imp.  and  1st  Part,  of  all  the  conjugations,  that  radical  is 
almost  indifferently  or  ' ;  as  tfba  or  *>ba ,  isba  or  hba ,  tfbp 
or  ‘’b.p  . 

(b)  In  the  Praet.  and  2d  Part,  of  the  other  conjuga¬ 
tions  and  in  the  Imp.  Peal,  h ;  as  ’’bana ,  ‘’bs ,  ^ba ,  ‘taa  . 

2.  This  quiesces  in  the  Praeter  Peal  in  — ,  in  the 
Inf.,  Fut.  and  Part,  in  — ;  the  1  in  the  Praeter  of  Ithpeel 
and  Aphel  usually  in  — ,  in  the  Imp.  and  Part,  in  —  ;  in 
the  passive  Part,  of  Pael  and  Aphel  only,  is  11  moveable ; 

. 

Note.  For  examples  of  the  Praet.  Peal  with  see  Gen.  2 :  18,  Jon. 
Dent.  30  :  9 ;  of  the  Praet.  Aphel  with  ,  Ps.  78  :  11.  2  K.  8  :  8;  of  the 
Futures  with  Is.  30  :  26.  Jer.  51 :  8. 

3.  In  the  course  of  inflection  the  3d  radical  is 

(a)  Dropped,  before  the  sufformative  of  3d  fern, 
sing.  Praeter  Peal,  before  p  and  p—  in  the  Fut.  of  all  the 
conjugations ;  before  the  sufformatives  of  the  Imp.  (in 
which  i  generally  occurs  instead  of  *))  ;  and  in  the  3d 
pers.  plur.  masc.  Praet.  Peal  before  i ,  which,  in  these 
verbs,  takes  the  place  of  the  regular  ;  e.  g.  fib} ,  iba ? 
pb^n ,  pibp  ; 

(b)  Exchanged,  for  moveable,  before  the  sufformatives 
ri—  and  ,  3d  fern.  sing,  and  plur.  Praeter  of  all  the 
conjugations  except  Peal,  also  before  )—  of  the  2d  and 
3d  pers.  fern.  plur.  Fut. ;  e.  g.  ipba ,  rpb}!* ,  pbp ;  for 
quiescent,  (quiescing  sometimes  in  — ,  sometimes  in  — )  be¬ 
fore  all  the  sufformatives  which  begin  with  iorn,  and 
before  1  of  the  3  d  plur.  Praeter  (which  is  here  moveable) 
in  all  the  conjugations  except  Peal ;  e.  g,  rrta  ?  pmba , 

,  -pba , 

r  ;  7  •  - 


§  24.  VERBS  DOUBLY  ANOMALOUS. 


47 


Notes  on  the  Paradigm  of  verbs  it'b . 

1.  Praeter.  The  3d  per.  sing.  fern.  Peal  sometimes  appears  with  the  full 
orthography ;  as  n^bia ,  Dan.  2  :  35.  Sometimes  it  follows  the  analogy  of 
the  other  conjs.  ;  thus  n*n3  Job.  17 :  7,  (or  like  njons  Is.  1 :  7,  or  riba  Dan. 
2  :  35,  4  :  19).  The  2d  per.  sing.  m.  is  sometimes  written  fully,  terminating 
in  .  The  3d  per.  pi.  m.  follows,  in  some  copies,  the  Hebrew  form;  as 

Lam.  1 :  3.  Sol.  S.  3  : 1,  iba  Ntfm.  26  :  64,  or  the  analogy  of  the  other 
conjs. ;  as  Tan  Dan.  3  :  21.  The  3d  per.  pi.  f.  occurs  in  the  form  ",ba  Deut. 
2  :  11,  or  ‘}S<ba  Ruth  4 :  17.  Finally  a  few  instances  occur  of  the  Praet.  Pe. 
with  X  prosthetic;  e.  g.  Prov.  20 :  12,  Vn^  Dan.  5:4.  In  the  other 
conjugations  the  3d  per.  pi.  instead  of  I*1—  sometimes  takes  IRi— ;  Ezek. 
23  : 10.  Is.  11  :  4.  Jer.  6  : 14. 

2.  Future.  The  3d  per.  m.  sing,  terminates  indifferently  in  or  JK— . 
It  sometimes  appears  even  with  Q,amets;  e.  g.  K^nni  Is-  53:2,  icnnrn 
Zecli.  6  :  12,  (according  to  Buxtorf.)  The  3d  per.  pi.  sometimes  takes  the 
termination  *,1  instead  of  “)i .  Comp.  Dan.  7  :  26.  Is.  65  :  23.  Ex.  22  :  31. 

3.  Imperative.  The  2d  f.  sing,  ends  sometimes  in  K— ;  as  Gen.  19:  32. 
The  form  ,  Gen.  24  :  60,  is  anomalous. 

4.  Infinitive.  In  Peal  it  sometimes  takes  a  paragogic  a ;  e.  g. 

Prov.  25:  17.  Esth.  5:  14.  Ez.  5  :  9.  The  regular  form  is  employed  as 
Inf.  absolute  Is.  61:10.  Am.  5  :  5.  Gen.  26  :  28.  The  Inff.  of  the  other 
conjugations,  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  terminate  in  ni— ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2: 10, 
5:2,  6:8,  more  rarely,  in  the  Targums  in  iii ;  e.  g.  iiiynuilK  Num. 
12  :  8,  Jon. 

For  the  Participles  of  verbs  &b,  see  below,  §  34. 

Note.  Apocopate  Futures  and  Imperatives  are  less  frequent  in  Chaldee 
than  in  Hebrew.  The  following  are  examples. 

Fut.  apoc.  Hab.  2 :  16,  ‘irn  (in1?  Eccl.  11:3,  like  the  Heb.  wndi), 
inn,  yifin  Ex.  22  :  31,  from  SSlfi,  (elsewhere  fully,  Nini  ,  Ninn  Gen.  17 :  4, 
21 :  14) ;  ’ini ,  inn ,  ina  ,  ", inn,  Niro ,  from  son ,  Deut.  4 : 1.  Prov.  15  :  27. 
Gen.  20:7.  2  K.  1:2,  8: 10.  These  forms  have  generally  an  optative 
signification. 

Imp.  apoc.  nsix  ,  with  X  prosth.,  Gen.  24  :  14.  Pael,  IE?  Gen.  44  : 1,  in 
Gen.  37  : 16.  Aphel,  inx  . 

An  apocopate  participle ,  Aphel,  is  ina  instead  of  iinia  Deut.  32  :  39. 

§  24.  Verbs  doubly  anomalous. 

1.  and  xb  (rib).  Tliese  unite  tlie  irregularities  of 
both,  classes ;  e.  g.  ,  Aphel,  . 

2.  fcfe  and  ift .  E.  g.  ana ,  ana ,  ,  mdm  .  Peal  Fut. 

Deut.  29:20,  w?  Gen.  33:14.  Inf.  8T£  (K!P*?)  Dan. 

3:19,  'tin  Dan.  3:2. — Ithpeel ,  'ptM  Lev.  13:18.  Fut. 


i 


\ 


48  §  25.  DEFECTIVE  VERBS  AND  MIXED  FORMS. 


Lev.  13:2. — Pael ,  Part.  "'Stt  2  Kings  20:5. 

Ithpaal  ‘'Sna  2  Kings  5  :  13.  Aphel ,  Gen.  4:4. 

Part,  Gen.  6:17.  Imp.  Peal  in  one  case,  by  Aphae- 
resis,  ra  (Lond.  ed.  WK)  come  ye,  Prov.  9  :  5.  Elsewhere 
intf ,  Dan.  3:26. 

3.  hs  and  .  E.  g.  aT*  (nlj),  ary ,  .  Peal ,  Fut. 

w  Ps.  50:16.  Aphel ,  pria  Ps.  75:2.  Inf.  n»ni«  Ex. 
12  :  33.  Part.  ■»' jitt  Prov.  28  :  13.  Imp.  Gen.  19:22. 
VTO  Judg.  5:2. 

Note.  Those  verbs  ii'b  which  have  1  for  their  middle  radical  are  regular, 
so  far  as  1  is  concerned,  i.  e.  the  1  is  always  a  consonant ;  as  ,  syn  . 

* 

§  25.  Defective  verbs  and  mixed  forms. 

1.  But  few  verbs  actually  exhibit  all,  or  nearly  all, 
the  moods  and  tenses.  So  far  as  this  deficiency  is  occa¬ 
sioned  by  the  fewness  of  those  remains  of  the  Chaldee 
which  have  reached  our  time,  it  does  not  belong  to  a 
grammatical  treatise.  Those  verbs  only  must  be  noticed 
here  which,  though  cases  frequently  occur  where  certain 
forms  would  naturally  be  employed,  constantly  supply 
their  places  by  forms  borrowed  from  different  themes. 
The  following  are  examples  ; 

nry  and  *})n? ,  to  give ,  the  former  occurring  in  Peal 
•  _  • 

Praet.  and  Imp.  and  in  Ithpeel ;  the  latter  chiefly  in  Peal 
Fut.  and  Inf. — pbp  and  pos  to  ascend ,  the  former  being 
used  in  Praet.  Peal,  in  Pael,  and  the  Passives  of  the  first 
and  second  conjugations ;  the  latter  in  the  Inf.  and  Imp. 
Peal,  and  in  Aphel.  Deut.  9:9,  10:1,  2  Kings  17  :  4, — 
»3ntD  and  tfp to  to  drinlc;  in  Peal,  tfpts  in  Aphel. — pbn 
and  -pn  to  go ;  the  former  chiefly  in  Pael,  the  latter  in 
Inf.  and  Fut.  Peal. 

An  example  of  double  inflection  in  the  same  word  is  .  The  Future 
is  commonly  3^?  like  verbs  h|2 .  The  1st  per.  sing,  only  follows  the 
analogy  of  verbs  *>3 ,  Ps.  39  :  5.  101  :  4,  though  SWX  also  occurs, 
Dan.  2 : 9. 


26.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


49 


2.  Tlie  following,  wliicli  have  been  called  ''nixed forms, 
are  improperly  so  designated.  ippspitf  Dan  7  :.15,  and 
MirflDB  Dan.  4:16,  are  but  Syriac  pointings  of  the  Prae- 
ter;  and  the  Future  1st  sing,  rnan&ji  Jud.  15  :  7,  (Yen. 
ed.)  for  sn&ptf  is  not  destitute  of  all  analogy ;  comp,  in 
Hebrew  ,  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  312.  pap  Hos.  4  :  2, 
can  hardly  be  called  a  mixture  of  Fut.  and  Part. ;  for, 
(as  the  Future  of  this  verb  has  the  form  *vap),  psp  may 
be  considered  3d  plur.  fern,  analogous  with  pan  Jer.  3:19. 


26.  Irregular  verbs  with  suffixes. 


1.  The  forms  of  most  irregular  verbs  before  suffixes 
do  not  differ  essentially  from  those  of  the  regular  verbs  ; 
and,  so  far  as  verbs  “jfe ,  bb ,  ,  and  are  concerned,  may 

be  learned  from  §  16.  The  following  examples  will  illus¬ 
trate  this  remark ; 

(a)  *|£,  Peal;  pa'iSa  Judg.  20:32,  ppbtp  Ps.  91:12, 
Spbttjfo  Ps.  28  :  3. — Aphel;  papteK  Ex.  32  : 12,  pnpSi*  Job 
10  : 18,  apnp&tf  Num.  20 :  5. 

(5)  bb,  Peal;  p3tra?  Jer.  20:5. — Aphel;  ttspyPi  with 
epenthetic  3,  Dan.  7  :  23,  Ps.  44  :  20,  pbstt  Dan. 

2  :  24,  nr&yx  Jud.  19:3. 

(c)  lb ,  Peal ;  ■’rpfcto  Gen.  50 : 26,  ttai?  Ez.  5  : 14,  artmn 

Dan.  7  :  23. — Pael ;  rtaajg  Ps.  105  :  10. — Aphel ;  raps 
Dan.  3  :  2,  Hos.  6  :  2,  apnpin  Ez.  5:11. 

(d)  h'b,  Peal;  Ez.  28  :  19,  ttppp  Deut.  22  :  2. — 
Aphel,  aayjina  Dan.  5  :  7,  ppppn  Dan.  2:13,  pnyrinb 
Dan.  2:26. 


2.  The  forms  of  verbs  sfb  before  suffixes  differ  more 
widely  from  those  of  the  regular  verbs.  Thus 

(a)  and  1  final  quiescent  are  commonly  dropped  be¬ 
fore  suffixes  in  the  Praeter  and  Future  ;  while  the  former 
takes  suffixes  with  the  union  vowel  —  or  — ,  and  the  latter 

with  3  epenthetic  ;  e.  g.  pm  he  saw  me ,  2  Sam.  1 :  7,  mm 

4 


50 


27.  NOUNS  ,  DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 


he  saw  him ,  Jud.  19:3,  pAn  Is.  42  :  5,  Lev.  13:21, 
Ex.  33  :  20.  Sometimes  they  are  retained ;  e.  g. 
Prov.  8  :  22,  Gen,  38  : 15.  Aph.  Deut. 

4  :  36,  Obad.  3,  Gen.  3  : 13,  Pseudo-Jon. 

( b )  *1  final  quiescent  in  the  Imp.  of  all  the  conjuga¬ 
tions  is  retained ;  e.  g.  Ex.  4 :  3,  Ex.  33  :  18. 

(But  Jer.  36  : 15,  tfrnj?  for 

(c)  The  i  of  the  3d  pers.  plur.  Praet.  Peal,  and  of  the 
Imp.  is  generally  changed  into  1  V>—  into  ^ ;  e.  g. 

Jon.  1 : 12,  awrn  Lam.  1 :  7,  Is.  3  : 12. 

( d )  The  persons  of  the  Praeter  in  n*1—  and  remain 
unchanged ;  e.  g.  WW  J°n-  2  :  4. 

(e)  fi—  of  the  3d  pers.  sing.  fern.  Praet.  is  changed 

into  in?;  e.  g.  Hos.  4:12. 

On  the  Inf.  Peal  and  the  Participles,  see  below,  §  35. 


CHAPTER  IV. 
NOUNS. 


§  27.  Derivation  of  Nouns. 

1.  Nouns,  in  Chaldee  as  in  Hebrew,  are  either  'primi¬ 
tive  or  derivative.  The  former  are,  for  the  most  part,  the 
same  as  in  Hebrew,  and  are  regarded  as  primitive  for 
similar  reasons.  Comp.  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  478.  seq. 
Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  316.  The  derivatives,  constitu¬ 
ting  the  great  majority  of  nouns,  are  formed  either  from 
verbs,  (which  is  generally  the  fact),  and  these  are  termed 
verbal  /  or  from  other  nouns,  and  then  they  are  called 
denominative . 

2.  Verbals  derived  from  the  Infinitive  are  generally 
abstract  in  signification,  i.  e.  they  express  the  action,  and 


28.  NOUNS  ;  GENDER  AND  NUMBER. 


51 


have  the  forms  bttg ,  bug ,  tog ,  top ,  tog ,  b^g ,  b*»t?g  ,  btog , 
bTOg ,  bttg'a ,  etc. ;  those  derived  from  Participles  are  gem 
erally  concrete ,  i.  e.  express  the  actor,  and  have  the  forms 
?t?i? ,  ^ ,  bap ,  b^ap ,  b^p ,  brcp ,  etc. 

3.  Denominatives  are  generally  formed  by  adding  the 
termination  (*'—),  fern.  (rv— )  ;  or  )— .  They  are 

generally  adjectives,  especially  ordinal  numerals,  or  patro¬ 
nymic  or  gentile  nouns ;  e.  g.  ‘’ggp  a  foreigner ,  ‘HEtt  an 
Egyptian,  flag 9  a  rebel.  Many  feminine  nouns  in  and 
tvi  are  also  denominative ;  e.  g.  a  kingdom ,  from 

•jto  a  ;  rittttto  widowhood,  from  pato  $  ividow  /  intone 
<2  rooting  out ,  extirpation ,  from  EgiB  $ 


§  28.  Gender  and  number  of  nouns. 

1.  The  genders  are  two,  masculine  and  feminine.  The 
latter  generally  terminate  in  X—  (n_),  1  (m), 

or  mi .  It  should  be  noticed  however  that  —  is  also  the 
termination  of  the  emphatic  state  in  masculines.  Conse 
quently,  in  ascertaining  the  gender  of  nouns,  the  analogy 
of  the  other  dialects  and  the  sense  are  more  certain 
guides  than  the  mere  form  of  a  noun. 

Note  1.  The  termination  M—  is  generally  to  he  considered  a  Hebraism. 
It  is  regular  in  Chaldee,  only  in  feminines  derived  from  masculines  in  "1— ; 
as  MNE'ip  fem.  from  Taip  .  • 

The  employment  of  n  instead  of  N  in  these  forms  is  obviously  designed 
to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  IS  .  For  a  similar  reason  all  the  infinitives  of 
verbs  Lamedh  Aleph  except  Peal  terminate  in  M . 

Note  2.  There  are  a  considerable  number  of  feminine  nouns  with  mas¬ 
culine  forms,  mostly  the  same  as  in  Hebrew;  e.  g.  a  stone,  rnis  a  path, 
earth ,  ■JglX  an  ear,  SpM  a  sword.  Some  are  common  ;  e.  g.  MS  a  mark, 
'OXfire,  a  vine,  and  the  numerals  from  20  to  100. 

2.  The  numbers  are  two,  singular  and  plural.  The 
few  dual  forms  which  occur  are  to  be  regarded  as  He¬ 
braisms.  They  occur  only  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  ter¬ 
minating  in  the  absolute  state,  in  *p— .  See  Dan.  2  :  34, 


52 


29.  STATES  OB  NOUNS. 


7  :  4.  The  dual  in  the  other  states  cannot  be  distin 
guished  from  the  plural.  Compare  Dan.  2  :  33,  41, 
7:7.  In  the  Targums  the  double  members ,  etc.  are  ex¬ 
pressed  by  the  plural,  and  where  the  number  two  is  re¬ 
quired,  Tpin  inserted.  Plurals  masculine  end  in  p— , 
plurals  feminine  in  )— . 


To  most  masculine  nouns,  viz.  to  those  which  terminate  in  a  radical 
letter,  the  termination  p—  is  directly  appended ;  e.  g.  “va  a  rock ,  pi.  ppE . 
But  those  which  terminate  in  ^—derived  from  verbs  ttb,  take  p— ;  those 
in  “1—  or  ‘’K—  take  p£<— .  Feminines  in  change  this  ending  directly 
into  “|— ;  those  in  r*i  and  rP— change  these  terminations  intop  and  p ; 


e.  g.  ,  rvpttJE  ,  plural  ppba  ,  p^izja  ;  and  finally,  those  in  HX  —  from 

masculines  in  *1—  form  the  plural  in  p— ;  e.  g.  iiijEpp  plur.  pEpp. 

As  in  Hebrew,  there  are  also  in  Chaldee  many  nouns  having  the  form 
of  masculines  in  the  sing,  but  of  feminines  in  the  pi.,  and  vice  versa ;  e.  g. 
rpa,  pps;  ii53X,  pax;  p^aj  son,  pstn;  ,  pattS. 

In  some  nouns  both  terminations  are  in  use,  even  in  the  same  Targum ; 
e.  g.  N52X,  pl.-pax  and  pi  EX ;  3H3,  pi.  ppfiS  and  p'nha,  (as  if  from  nsnfia); 
oP,  pi.  p»:p  and  'jaii,  etc.  Sometimes  the  forms  with  different  endings 


have  different  significations  ;  e.  g.  from  a  voice ,  pbj?  thunders ,  Ex.  9  :  23, 
pp  voices ,  Ps.  93  :  4.  These  examples  should  be  distinguished  from  epicene 
nouns,  or  those  which  express  both  males  and  females,  such  as  0*13,  pi. 
pwo  and  ptp3. 

Sometimes  feminines  plural  take  an  additional  plural  ending.  So  in 
Hebrew  and  Arabic;  comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  327.  5. 

Some  nouns  occur  only  in  the  plural;  as  p*p  life ,  fcpESi  heaven ;  espe¬ 
cially  those  which  designate  the  different  ages  of  life  ;  as  pab>!2  youth , 
though  some  of  these  occur  in  the  singular,  with  the  termination  . 
Others  occur  in  the  singular  only;  e.  g.  the  names  of  the  metals,  3pp 
gold ,  btpQ  iron,  t)33  silver.  But  pB33  occurs  in  the  sense  of  pieces  of  sil¬ 


ver.  Gen.  42  :  25. 


§  29.  States  of  Nouns . 

1.  Besides  tlie  absolute  and  construct ,  which  occur  in 
Hebrew,  nouns  in  Chaldee  have  also  the  emphatic  state 
in  which  they  originally  corresponded,  in  sen^e,  to  nouns 
in  Hebrew  with  the  article/"*  It  has  however  come  into 


*  So  in  Danish,  Landene ,  the  countries,  from  Landc ,  countries.  Kask,  Danish 
Grammar,  p.  14.  Also  in  Albanian,  Gour,  stone ;  Gouri ,  the  stone.  Make  Brun, 
Univ.  Geog.  vol.  VI.  p.  201. 


29.  STATES  OF  NOUNS. 


53 


use,  in  many  cases,  where  the  sense  does  not  require  the  - 
definite  article.  In  Syriac,  this  liberty  has  been  much 
more  extensively  taken. 

Note.  The  indefinite  article  is  expressed,  either  simply  by  the  absolute 

state,  or  by  the  numeral  PH  one  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2  :  31,  6  :  18.  Ez.  4  :  8. 

✓ 

2.  Construct  State.  Characteristic  terminations. 

a.  Masculines  plural  change  p—  into  .  The  termination  of  the 
construct  state  of  masc.  nouns  in  the  sing,  does  not  differ  from  that  of  the. 
absolute  state. 

b.  Feminines  in  X—  (in—)  change  these  endings  into  n—  in  the  sing.,* 
into  H—  in  the  plur.  const.  Feminines  in  *1  and  *1—  resume  their  original 
n  in  the  const,  sing.,  and  in  the  plur.  change  p  and  p  into  rn  and  FP . 

3.  The  emphatic  state  is  characterized,  in  both  gen¬ 
ders  and  both  numbers,  by  the  ending  .  (Masculines 
in  ,  which  take  n_  in  the  emphatic  state,  constitute  the 
only  exception). 

a.  To  masculines  singular  (except  such  as  terminate  in  X—  or  *'— )  this 
termination  is  directly  added ;  e.  g.  a  horse,  tttpO  the  horse  ;  mascu¬ 
lines  in  tt—  substitute  the  letter  *  for  their  final  syllable,  and  those 
which  end  in  change  this  ending  into  Fstt— ;  e.  g.  ttbs,  j  “'Epp  > 
nttapp . 

b.  Feminines  in  tt—  change  tt  in  the  emph.  sing,  into  ri ;  e.  g.  ttsbp , 

ernph.  ttFpba  ;  those  in  Fitt—  change  this  ending  into  e.  g.  FttEpp, 

emph.  ttrpapp ;  finally  those  in  >1  and  ‘1—  appear  in  the  emph.  state  with 
their  original  full  endings  F>1  and  FP— ;  e.  g.  ttlpsbp . 

c.  In  the  plural,  the  masc.  endings  p—  and  p—  are  changed  into 
tt*— ;  as  tt*pbp  .  ptt—  (from  sing.  *— )  becomes  ‘’tt—  ;  as  pttttpp,  emph. 
*tt£)Pp . 

••  t  : 1  - 

d.  In  feminines  plur.,  the  emphatic  state  is  formed  by  adding  tt—  to  the 
construct:  e.  g.  ttF3*PE ,  ttFlsb^,  ttF“>ba.  But  such  as  terminate  in  the 
sing,  in  Ftt  —  (from  masculines  in  *— )  resume  here  their  original  ^ e.  g. 
ttF^EPp  from  FlttErtp . 

4.  Before  suffixes  [in  the  suffix  state\ ,  nouns  exhibit 
the  following  modifications. 

a.  Derivative  masc.  nouns  in  *—  change  this  ending  into  tt  —  before 
8uff. ;  as  tfttEpp  from  ‘’Bpp ;  those  in  tt—  (from  verbs  tt"b)  change  this  ter¬ 
mination  into  n  moveable  ;  as  FPba  from  ttba. 

b.  All  masc.  plur.  nouns  drop  the  ending  p—  (p— )  and  then  take  the 
suff.  of  nouns  plural. 

c.  Feminines  in  tt —  change  tt  into  n  in  the  sino-. ;  as  nn3b^2  from  ttsbtt; 


ft 


I 


54  §§  30,  31.  nouns  ;  fibst  declension. 


those  in  and  take  the  construct  form  before  buffixes ;  as  pTMsba  ;  those 
in  iO  ( radical )  change  this  ending  to  in"'—  ;  and  those  in  (from  masc. 
in  )  resume  their  original  ;  e.  g.  ftrPEnp . 

d.  In  the  fern,  pi.,  suffixes  are  appended  to  the  construct  state;  e.  g. 

•jinnpna ,  linnjsV® . 

§30.  Declension  of  J¥ouns. 

Since  no  vowels  are  dropped ,  except  those  of  the  final 
syllable  of  ground-forms,  (comp.  §  7.  <?.,)  and  since 
changes  of  any  kind  are  less  frequent  than  in  Hebrew, 
(the  first  vowel  of  the  ground-form  remaining  through¬ 
out  invariable,  except  in  monosyllables  and  segholate 
forms,)  fewer  modes  of  declension  would  naturally  be 
expected,  than  appear  in  Hebrew.  Accordingly  we 
*  reckon  in  Chaldee  nine  declensions,  six  of  masculine,  and 
three  of  feminine  nouns. 


§  31.  First  Declension . 

The  first  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  have  all 

* 

their  vowels  immutable.  It  comprehends, 

(a)  Nouns  which  have  ,  s,_ ,  i  or  *i  before  their  final 
consonant;  as  pa  a  fish,  DP  a  day ,  ifr*\  a  head ,  rrnjj  near. 

In  a  few  nouns  which  would  seem  to  belong  to  (a),  the  quiescents  are 
treated  as  fulcra.  Such  belong  to  Dec.  IV.  e.  g.  Num.  25  :  15,  Pseu¬ 
do-Jon.  instead  of  . 

**  \ 

(5)  Nouns  which  have  —  in  their  final  syllable ;  as  SB 
good ,  sjji  a  thief. 


Note  1.  Nouns  with  —  in  the  ultimate  are  chiefly  of  six  classes. 

(1)  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  IS;  e.  g.  bp,  EE  (Heb.  bip,  Elia)  ; 

(2)  Nouns  of  the  form  Ero  ,  dbtt3  (Heb.  Dibd)  ; 

.  ?i 

(3)  Nouns  of  the  form  bpp  ,  (Arabic  JUCS,  Heb.  with  —  impure ;) 

(4)  Nouns  like  bap,  (Heb.  with  — pure ,)  and  bipp  ; 

(5)  Nouns  which  have  the  formative  ending  *J— ;  as  I^Ep  (Arab 

u^and 

(6)  Nouns  of  the  form  bpip  ;  as  lEix ,  ‘ipte . 

The  first  three  of  these  classes  retain  —  in  all  the  inflections,  and  con¬ 
sequently  belong  regularly  to  Dec.  I. 


§  32,  33.  nouns  ;  second  and  third  declensions.  55 


Nouns  of  the  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  classes  sometimes  take  —  instead 
of  —  in  the  construct  sing.,  and  before  the  suff.  p*3  and  pn  .  Elsewhere 
the  —  is  retained.  The  punctuation  of  these  nouns  is  however  variable; 
and  as  they  present  no  other  irregularity,  and  are  not  very  numerous,  they 
may  better  be  regarded  as  exceptions  from  Dec.  I.  than  as  forming  a  sepa¬ 
rate  declension. 

Note  2.  There  are  also  a  few  nouns,  (principally  of  the  form  biEjp,) 
having  Q,amets  in  the  penultimate,  which  are  sometimes  varied  according 
to  the  first  declension,  but  sometimes  drop  their  penultimate  vowel,  out  of 
the  absol.  sing. 


§  32.  Seco?id  Declension. 

Tlie  second  declension  includes  nouns  with  final  —  or 
- ,  either  monosyllabic,  or  having  the  preceding  vowels 
immutable  ;  as  T ,  DIB ,  Dby  ?  n&pD .  This  —  or  —  is  drop¬ 
ped  before  pronominal  suffixes  or  formative  syllables,  be- 
ffinnin^  with  a  vowel. 

O  O 

Note  1.  Form  with  a  guttural  ,  with  suffix  Job  28  :  26. 

Note  2.  Forms  like  ‘pbcajs  (—  shortened  into  — )  from  1st  part. 

Peal,  e.  g.  ppptt  Gen.  3  :  5,  etc.  are  to  be  set  down  to  the  account  of  ir¬ 
regular  punctuation.  Analogy  requires  pbpj?  . 

Note  3.  In  this  declension  may  be  reckoned  bins  ,  ernph.  KblpB  ,  etc.  as 
if  from  btpQ . 

Note  4.  Before  pa  and  pn ,  monosyllables,  as  in  Hebrew,  take  — ,  — , 
or  — 7;  e.  g.  pnp'n  Zeph.  1 :  17,  papi  Isaiah  1 : 15. 

The  form  pipp?  from  1135^  Ezek.  27 : 2,  is  peculiar. 

§  33.  Third  Declension. 

This  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  correspond 
to  the  Segholate  forms  in  Hebrew.  They  may  be  written 
in  Chaldee,  as  in  Hebrew,  either  with  two  vowels,  the 
second  of  which  is  always  considered  a  furtive  vowel ;  as 
5jbtt  ,  obn  ?  (these  forms  almost  exclusively  in  the  biblical 
Chaldee,)  ,  (t^p ;)  or  with  only  one  vowel,  which  be¬ 
longs  between  the  last  two  consonants ;  as  ,  129 . 
They  are  inflected,  for  the  most  part,  as  in  Hebrew.  But, 

a.  In  the  Plural  absol.  the  forms  Tjbp  and  *i3p  become,  as  they  do  in 
most  other  inflections,  7|ba  and  pSp  . 

b.  The  form  ttip.’p  sometimes  follows  the  analogy  of  Hebrew  ;  as  KSply 


56 


31,  35.  nouns  ; 


FOURTH  AND  FIFTH  DECLENSIONS. 


Dan.  2  :  37 ;  sometimes  takes  — ;  as  Spbnp  Ez.  5  :  8.  Very  rarely,  Hholem 
is  retained  ;  as  ,  Isa.  53  :  2. 

c.  In  a  few  cases  the  11  of  the  form  remains  moveable  in  its  inflec 
tions ;  e.  g.  fitrV'S  Ez.  5  :  3,  Sol.  S.  4  :  8. 

d.  Nouns  of  the  forms  and  *352  in  the  course  of  inflection,  generally 

take  —  or  —  under  their  first  radical,  according  to  the  paradigm.  Vrn,  *133 
cbn ,  ‘YiSJ  and  some  others  take  — .  Comp.  Dan.  4:6,  5:12.  Gen.  32  :  16 
Isa.  53  t  2.  Nouns  having  gutturals  for  their  first  or  second  radical,  natu¬ 
rally  take  — ;  as  dSB ,  . 

e.  Participles  Ithpeel,  with  a  few  nouns,  not  properly  Segholates,  fol¬ 
low  the  analogy  of  this  declension;  e.  g.  bppnia,  inflected  precisely  like 

§  34.  Fourth  Declension . 

The  fourth  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  double 
the  final  consonant  when  they  receive  accession.  They 
are  mostly  monosyllables  derived  from  verbs  The 
long  vowels,  — ,  i  and  (for  the  most  part)  *),  are  exchanged 
in  the  course  of  inflection  for  the  corresponding  short 
vowels.  In  some  nouns  —  becomes  —  ;  as  ns ,  a  ns  ;  ^  5 

^V"  Ex.  19  :  23,  baba  pbaba  Dan.  7  :  9. 

# 

b2  has  in  the  emph.  st.  etc.  with  the  tone  on  the  penultimate  ;  but 
with  suff.  which  draw  the  tone  forward,  “p'ribs  Dan.  2  :  38,  7  : 19. 


§  35.  Fifth  Declension. 

The  fifth  declension  includes  nouns,  participles,  and 
infinitives,  derived  from  verbs  fcfb  and  terminating  in  , 
or  v  ;  as  tfba ,  aba ,  ipa  ,  ,  ‘’harp? .  The  gene¬ 

rally  appears,  in  the  course  of  declension,  as  the  third 
radical,  displacing  the  substituted  a  in  forms  like  aba . 
The  termination  p—  of  the  plural  absolute  is  sometimes 
contracted  into  )— .  More  rarely  it  follows  the  Hebrew 
analogy,  and  terminates  in  p— ;  as  Job  1:13.  Lam.  1  :  3. 
Sometimes,  perhaps  by  mistake  of  transcribers,  it  is 
pointed  p—  ;  as  pjto  Dan.  7  :  3,  pTO  Gen.  3:15,  Jeru. 
Targum,  where  the  connection  decides  that  these  forms 
are  masculine.  In  the  const,  and  emph.  plural,  no  trace 
of  the  radical  **  remains. 


i§  36,  37.  nouns  ;  sixth  and  seventh  declensions.  57 


Note  1.  Peculiar  forms  of  this  declension.  *p2?;  PI.  with  suff.  “piTHS; 
Is.  10  :  2—^25  Plur.  \*5S  Lev.  19  : 10— ^£3  PI.  pj53  Deut.  6  :  3,  Jer.  Targ  — 
"m  PI.  Ruth  2 :  21. 

Note  2.  Infinitives  Peal  of  verbs  i<b  are  sometimes  regularly  inflected 
in  this  declension.  Comp.  Dan.  4:23.  2  Sam.  13  :  6.  Ez.  5  :  9.  But 
sometimes  the  X  is  dropped;  as  ^5533  1  K.  18:16,  2  Sam.  13:5, 

Tb*’Tn»  Josh.  3 :  3,  rrsn-a  Gen.  23:2.’ 

"  ••  :  v  '  t  :  • 


§  36.  Sixth  Declension . 

Here  belong  tlie  derivative  nouns  terminating  in  the 
formative  syllable  ,)  compare  §  27.  3.  They  are 

mostly  gentile  or  patronymic  nouns ,  or  ordinal  numerals . 

a.  These  nouns,  when  they  receive  accession,  change  their  final  11  into 
N  ,  which  is  likewise  moveable,  and  commences  a  new  syllable.  As  a  con¬ 
sequence,  —  is  here  changed  into  — . 

b.  The  plur.  emph.  terminates  in  ,  agreeing  in  form  with  the  con¬ 
struct,  as  has  been  remarked  above  §  29.  3.  c. 

Exc.  from  b.  tombs'  Dan.  2 :  5,  fcOftsn  Dan.  3:2,  3,  Dan.  3 : 8. 

Ez.  4 :  12,  23,  5  :  1,  5.  This  declension  includes  also  some  derivatives  from 
verbs  fb  which  terminate  in  h|—  but  are  not  passive  participles.  (Comp, 
the  preceding  deck) ;  e.  g.  ,  pi.  Gen.  1 :  6,  Jer.  T.  Ps.  104  : 13,  ‘’St , 
emph.  ,  pi.  past  Jer.  19  :  4. 


§  37.  Seventh  Declension . 

The  seventh  declension  includes  all  invariable  femi¬ 
nines,  i.  e.  all  nouns  with  the  feminine  endings 
and  *1 ,  the  final  syllable  of  which  commences  with  only 
one  consonant ;  as  height ,  as?  counsel ,  strength , 

a  roll ,  ^  goodness ,  ‘fcnfc  a  nurse . 

Whatever  vowels  precede  this  termination  are  immu¬ 
table  ;  so  that  the  paradigm  exhibits  all  the  changes  of 
these  nouns  in  accordance  with  the  principles  stated  in 
§§  28,  29.  1 

Note.  In  forms  like  a,  if  the  penultimate  be  a  simple  syllable,  the 
Sheva  which  takes  the  place  of  the  final  Q,amets  in  the  emphatic  and 
suffix  states  singular  is  silent ;  e.  g.  msdhinU ,  emph.  msdhinta :  if  the 
penultimate  be  a  mixed  syllable,  that  Sheva  is  vocal ;  as  ms  gill  a,  emph. 
msgillstha. 


58 


38,  39.  nouns  ;  eighth  and  ninth  declensions. 


§  38.  Eighth  Declension . 

The  eighth  declension  includes  all  those  feminines,  the 
final  syllable  of  which  commences  with  two  consonants ; 
e.  g.  Sto  a  lip,  ‘topsai  (i.  q.  oroXrj)  a  robe ,  W  purity. 

a.  Nouns  in  K—  of  this  declension  must  evidently  supply  a  vowel  in  the 

emph.  and  suff.  states ;  for  otherwise  they  would  exhibit  the  impossible 
forms  Knsto ,  KnbE'iK  etc.,  viz.  with  two  vocal  Shevas  in  immediate  sue- 
cession.  This  supplied  vowel  is  Hhireq  or  Pattahh,  (the  latter  with  gut¬ 
turals  ;)  more  rarely  Seghol;  e.  g.  KSitt,  KFiSb,  K£K ,  Kan,  Klnan. 

Kbb2  belongs  here,  and  is  treated  as  if  written  Kbbs? ;  e.  g.  emph.  st. 
KJnbbSJ :  but  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  dropped  for  the  sake  of 
euphony. 

b.  The  paradigm  b.  comprises  all  feminines  in  K'J ,  derived  from  verbs 
K  b  ,  which  have  a  consonant  without  a  vowel,  immediately  preceding  this 
termination.  The  supplied  vowel  is  Hhireq,  in  which  *  quiesces. 

c.  Those  in  and  *i  are  regular  in  the  sing,  like  Dec.  VII.  In  the 
plur.,  as  becomes  necessary,  they  also  take  .a  supplied  vowel,  Hhireq  or 
Pattahh. 


§  39.  Ninth  Declension. 

Here  belong  feminines  in  derived  from  mascu¬ 
lines  in  of  Dec.  VI.  Comp.  §  28.  1.  Note  1.  In  the 
emphatic  state  and  before  suffixes,  is  exchanged  for  41 
moveable ,  though  ordinal  numerals,  for  the  most  part, 
take  V  or  or  entirely  drop  it ;  e.  g.  Lev.  25:22, 

Deut.  15  :  9,  v.  12.  (but  comp,  , 

Dan.  7  : 19.)  The  same  substitution  of  h  for  ^  occasionally 
appears  even  in  the  absolute  and  construct  plural;  as 
Gen.  13  :  15. 

Note  1.  As  in  Hebrew,  the  fern,  forms  are  sometimes  so  mixed  that  the 
singular  is  of  one  declension  and  the  plural  of  another;  e.  g.  pi.  *5^3, 
as  if  from  ;  rvb'S'na ,  pi.  and  ‘j^S‘13?  . 

Note  2.  When  feminine  nouns  are  formed  from  masculines  by  adding 
the  terminations  K— ,  *1  and  the  changes  in  the  ground-form  are  pre¬ 
cisely  the  same  which  appear  in  the  emph.  st.  of  masculines. 

Note  3.  Segholates  in  f'-y-r  are  rare.  They  are  inflected  precisely 
as  in  Hebrew. 


§§  40 — 42.  IRK.  NOUNS - ADJECTIVES - NUMERALS. 


59 


§  40.  Irregular  and  Defective  Nouns. 

These  are  doubtless  such  as  were  in  most  frequent 
use.  The  following  are  the  principal.  ax ,  fix ,  ox ,  Xftx  ? 
©2x ,  ^px ,  *nx ,  xnx ,  rpa ,  na ,  ns  ,  an  ,  *»bt? ,  ,  x^j ,  d?  , 
‘’TS,  ^p,  ®T!?  and  at?  or  DW .  Their  anomalies  are 
given  in  the  vocabulary. 


§  41.  Adjectives. 

The  most  frequent  forms  of  adjectives  are  bap ,  b^ap 
and  b“>ap ;  less  usual  are  bap  and  baip .  They  are  in¬ 
flected  like  nouns.  For  the  comparison  of  adjectives  see 
§64. 

Note.  Adjectives  of  the  first,,  third,  and  fourth  declensions  have  theij 
feminines  generally  declined  according  to  the  seventh;  those  of  the  sec 
ond  and  fifth,  according  to  the  eighth  ;  and  those  of  the  sixth,  accord 
ing  to  the  ninth. 


42.  Numerals. 


1.  Cardinals,  a.  These,  from  3  to  10,  present  the  same  anomaly  as  in 
Hebrew,  the  masculines  being  indicated  by  fem.  forms,  and  the  feminines 
by  masc.  forms.  See  Par.  XI. 

Note.  "Hp  sometimes  takes  suffixes,  and  then  appears  in  the  form 
*nn ;  e.  g*  ‘T'ivnpfi  both  °f  them ,  Gen.  2  :  25,  both  of  you,  Gen. 

27  45. 

b.  From  11  to  19.  The  units  are  prefixed  to  “ip3>  for  the  masc.,  and 

to  for  the  fem.  It  must  be  remarked  however,  (1)  That  the  units 

appear  somewhat  different  from  the  regular  form,  (comp,  the  paradigm,) 
and  (2)  That,  in  the  later  Targums,  the  units  and  “ip?  or  “’pop  are 
contracted  into  one  word.  These  forms  are  presented  in  the  paradigm  in 
parentheses. 

c.  The  tens  from  30  to  90  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  simple  plurals  of  the 
units  3 — 9 ;  e.  g.  prbn  thirty ,  *pp3plK  forty ,  etc.  Eighty  is  somewhat  ir¬ 
regular,  viz.  pttfi  [i.  e.  p3,an]  or  ‘jYpfi,  Jer.  41 :  5.  Ex.  7  :  7.  Twenty  is 
expressed  by  the  plural  of  ten ,  ‘ppO?  or  *pppp .  Though  masc.  in  form, 
these  are  all  of  the  common  gender. 

d.  The  intermediate  numbers  21 — 29,  31 — 39,  etc.  are  expressed  by 
simply  placing  the  smaller  number  after  the  larger,  connected  by  i ;  e.  g. 
masc.  “ini  *pppp ,  fem.  fctprn  “Fppp  twenty-one ,  etc. 

e.  One  hundred  nso ,  200  ,  ■jnXTa ,  300  nao  nbn  ,  400  nso  S3px  , 


I 


60  §43.  ADVERBS. 


etc.  the  prefixed  units  being  feminine  ;  1000  ,  2000  “pBbfct  “,'nri ,  3000 

■psbfit  Knbn,  etc.  the  prefixed  units  being  masculine;  10.000  12*1,  i20,000 
yin'i  KWitn ,  Jon.  4  : 11. 

2.  Ordinals.  The  first  two  have  peculiar  forms,  viz.  first  ,  second 
•j^n ,  (comp.  Heb. 

a.  From  third  to  tenth  they  are  formed  from  the  cardinals,  and  ter¬ 
minate  in  *1—  (*1X— ,)  emph.  nx—  for  the  masc.,  and  ,  empli.  i<n—  or 
xn*i  for  the  fem. 

r  : 

b.  From  eleventh  to  nineteenth  the  units  are  prefixed  to  ,  but 

contracted  into  one  word ;  e.  g.  eleventh ,  Num.  25  :  8, 

twelfth ,  etc.  In  designations  of  time  (as  the  fourteenth  year,  &c.)  the  car¬ 
dinal  numbers  are  generally  employed. 

c.  Above  20,  as  in  Heb.,  cardinals  and  ordinals  are  the  same.  For  the 
mode  of  designating  distributives  and  numeral  adverbs  see  §  65.  4,  5. 


CHAPTER  V. 
PARTICLES. 


§  43.  Adverbs. 

1.  The  following  are  primitive  /  where?  "’TO  when? 
Pjtf  also,  man  there ,  ab  not. 

2. . Derivatives  with  characteristic  ending  /  by  day , 

sjw  to-day ,  carefully ,  inwa  in  Aramean  QAqa- 

facuOTt ),  hastily ,  rwjft  again. 

3.  Other  parts  of  speech  used  adverbially  ; 

a.  Substantives,  either  with  prepositions ;  as  "i^pa  in  short ,  shortly 
!KBl23*ip2  in  truth,  truly ,  immediately  ;  or  without  them  ;  as  bbs  wholly, 
below. 

r  :  - 

5.  Verbal  forms,  viz.  Inf.  and  Part. ;  as  backwards ,  again, 

once  more. 

c.  Adjectives,  numerals,  and  pronouns ;  e.  g.  “jp  [firm]  truly ,  thus,  etc. 
sops  |  one 1  together,  HE2  [ like  what  ?]  7/ow/  /low  very  ! 

4.  Compound  adverbs ;  ‘p'npi;*  how  ?  when  ?  [to  here] 

hitherto,  H3p  [from  here ]  hence,  whence  ?  thence,  rob  [rPi*  Kb] 

there  is  not.  For  the  mode  in  which  the  last,  as  well  as  tV'K,  takes  pro¬ 
nominal  suffixes,  see  S  8.  3.  II.  Note  4. 


§  44,  45.  preposition s  ;  conjunctions. 


61 


5.  A  simple  question  is  expressed  by  the  prefix  r? ,  (before  a  conso¬ 
nant  with  Sheva,  simple  or  composite,  in).  Pronouns  or  adverbs  express 
an  interrogative  sense  by  prefixing  ;  e.  g.  ‘S'E  ''X  whence  ?  "'i*  who? 

Comp.  §  9.  3.  Before  interrogative  adverbs  is  intensive  ;  as  *^2  , 

to  which  I  believe  our  language  has  nothing  precisely  equivalent,  unless 
it  be  the  colloquial  phrase,  where  in  the  world  ? 

§  44.  Prepositions. 

1.  The  following  are  originally  prepositions  : 

(a)  The  inseparable  3,  3,  and  b  prefixed  to  nouns 
and  pointed  witli  —  before  simple  Sheva  ;  as  35C3  ;  be¬ 
fore  a  word,  the  first  letter  of  which  has  a  composite 
Sheva,  with  a  corresponding  short  vowel ;  as  ,  *0?b 
.In  the  latter  case,  contraction  sometimes  takes  place  ;  as 
«nb«b  Dan.  5:23. 

(5)  The  separable  monosyllables  rnb  ?  m'D ,  nis , 
which  before  nouns,  appear  as  separate  words.  They 
take  pronominal  suffixes  without  change  ;  as  Wb  with 
me . 

Instead  of  2  prefix,  appears  the  separate  form  *'2,  Sol.  S.  1 :  9,  13. 

•  •  * 

2.  Words  employed  as  prepositions  but  originally  nouns  or  other  parts 
of  speech;  viz.  ttbs  without ,  (compounded  of  the  adv.  tfb  and  2,)  *J2 
[  part ]  from ,  of  b2jb  and  D^jD  before,  *p3  between ,  instead  of,  ninfi 
under,  and  bwax  on  account  of  These,  (with  the  exception  of  the 
first,)  and  some  others,  are  originally  nouns,  and  conform  to  the  analogy 
of  nouns,  in  receiving  suffixes  ;  sometimes, 

a.  Having  feminine  forms  ;  e.  g.  iO  fib  *12  a  .  But  b*il3a  retains  the  masc. 
form  before  “jin  and  *p3  ;  or 

b.  Having  plural ‘forms;  e.  g.  Tpb$ ,  ‘la'njs  ,  *'fi‘hfi3,  etc. 

3.  Compound  prepositions ;  ,  ‘VJ&ba . 

§  45.  Conjunctions. 

1.  Primitive  conjunctions  are  *1  and,  3  as,  b  that  (before  Fut.),  “jfi  if 

T2  since ,  because,  ii<  or.  Borrowed  from  other  parts  of  speech  2^2 

but,  *jfib  so,  “F  that.  Compounded  xb  “’’n  or  Kab'n  that  not ,  *1'n  *12  until, 

t]bfi  ar>d  1  because,  FI?  b2  therefore,  ^  *)F?  after. 

2.  The  inseparable  conjunctions  2,  'n,  and  b  are  prefixed  like  the 
prepositions,  §  44.  1.  a.  Vav,  before  consonants  with  Sheva,  also  before  2, 
2 ,  and  2 ,  is  pointed  *1 .  When  b  is  prefixed  to  the  Fut.  the  preforma- 


62  §  46.  INTERJECTIONS. 


tive  of  the  latter  is  dropped ;  e.  g.  buzj^b  instead  of 
low  §  50.  2. 


§  46.  Interjections . 

1.  These  are  for  the  most  part  primitive  ;  e.  g.  lo  !  , 

that  !  oh  that  !  wo  !  (comp.  Lat.  vae.) 

2.  Some  are  borrowed  from  other  parts  of  speech;  e.  g 
on!  (Imp.  from  -H1?),  WM  I  pray !  [lit.  in  entreaty ], 

to  destroy .) 


.  See  be- 

wb  would 

.  Wn  come 
wo  !  (from 


PART  III. 


SYNTAX. 


CHAPTER  I. 

SYNTAX  OF  PRONOUNS. 


§  47.  Personal  Pronouns. 

1.  Tlie  separate  pronouns  sometimes  supply  the  place 
of  the  substantive  verb,  or  at  least  render  the  use  of  that 
verb  unnecessary;  e.  g.  ian  Kama  we  are  [lit.  we  they\ 
Ez.  5:11;  aja  I  [am]  the  seer ,  1  Sam.  9:19.  Most 
frequently  is  the  verb  omitted  when  the  pronoun  is  joined 
to  a  participle. 

The  reason  of  this  omission  of  the  substantive  verb,  in  such  cases, 
seems  to  be  this.  These  pronouns  have  a  certain  strength,  an  inherent 
emphasis,  (so  to  speak),  unattainable  in  English,  on  account  of  the  fre¬ 
quency  with  which  we  are  compelled  to  use  them  in  the  ordinary  inflec¬ 
tion  of  verbs. 

2.  The  suffixes  are  used  in  Chaldee  as  in  Hebrew.  Compare  Stuart’s 

Heb.  Gram.  §§  470 — 472,  Conant’s  Gesenius  §  121.  The  pleonastic  use  of 
suffixes,  where  the  noun  to  which  they  relate  immediately  follows,  is  more 
frequent  here  than  in  Hebrew.  Thus  ^  servants  of  God ,  Ez. 

5  :  11,  in  Daniel .  Dan.  5 : 12. 

Note.  Even  the  separate  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  in  the  same 
manner. 

3.  Anomalies  likewise  are  the  same  as  in  Hebrew ;  e.  g.  masc.  for 

fern.  Ruth  1:8,9,  *(13532),  (referring  to  the  daughters-in-law  of  Naomi;) 
suff.  of  pi.  nouns  appended  to  sing,  nouns,  as  in  Num.  24 :  7,  his 

kingdom ,  the  latter  probably  a  result  of  the  full  orthography,  *■'  being  only 
a  mater  lectionis. 


64 


48 — 50.  SYNTAX  OF  verbs;  tenses. 


§  48.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

1.  The  relative  pronoun  ^  ,  (as  a  prefix  *7,)  corresponds  to  the  Hebrew 

ni2&.  ;  e.  g.  with  noun  suflf.  forming  a  Gen.,  FT3i2^b  2  » ’lift  xb  “'1n ,  whose  lan¬ 
guage  thou  shalt  not  understand ;  with  the  adverb  of  place,  “jssn  .  .  .  .  , 

sometimes  =  Hebrew  212  ....  “idx ,  where. 

2.  The  interrogative  appears  as  a  Genitive ,  where  a  noun  immediately 
precedes  it  in  the  construct  state;  e.  g.  Fix  *}»  r2  whose  daughter  art 
thou  ?  Gen.  24  :  23. 

3.  In  respect  to  the  compound  possessive  pronouns  “'b^  my,  Fib^  his, 
&c.  see  §  8.  3.  note  3. 

§  49.  Mode  of  designating  pronouns  for  which  specific  forms  do 

not  occur  in  Chaldee . 

1.  Reflexive  and  reciprocal.  These  senses  are  indicated, 

a.  Simply  by  passive  verbs ; 

b.  By  the  personal  pronouns ;  e.  g.  Judg.  20  :  40.  The  Benjamitcs 
looked  ‘pn“>’nri2  behind  them  [i.  e.  behind  themselves,  the  English  usage 
being  analogous!. 

o  o  J 

c.  By  1253 ,  2b  or  Fi2»  ;  e.  g.  ‘'1253  myself,  Tj2b2  upon  thyself  Ex.  9  : 14  ; 
XH2E2  Gen.  IS  :  12,  Sarah  laughed  within  herself.  So  FP22PE  himself 
Ruth.  3 :  S. 

2.  Indefinite.  Some  one  123X,  something  ESFiQ,  XESFiQ  (  =  Hebrew 

*!21n)  and  dS'na  .  So  no  one  123X  xb,  xb ,  nothing  xb,  also  “’Ve  xb 

Job.  6 : 6. 

3.  Demonstrative.  Sometimes  by  fcWFi ,  X^F] ,  or  with  the  Hebrew  arti¬ 
cle  X^FiFt ,  X^FiFi . — A  peculiar  mode  of  designating  the  same  idea  is  to  at¬ 
tach  a  suffix  to  the  preceding  word;  e,  g.  X3dt  Fi2  Dan.  3  :  8,  at  that  time , 
(lit.  in  it,  the  time),  comp.  X^df  X^F)  ^2  Sol.  S.  1 :  13. 

Other  forms  might  be  mentioned,  but  they  will  occasion  no  difficulty 
which  the  analogy  of  the  Hebrew  will  not  readily  solve. 


CHAPTER  II. 

SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

§  50.  Use  of  the  Te?ises. 

1.  The  same  variety  of  signification  exists  here  as  in 
Hebrew.  Thus  the  Praeter  sometimes,  (especially  in 
verbs  of  existence  or  condition,)  corresponds  to  our  Pres- 


51.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 


65 


ent,  sometimes  to  our  Pluperfect;  and  tlie  Future  to  the 
Optative,  Subjunctive,  or  Imperative  mood.  It  some¬ 
times  expresses  even  past  time.  See  Dan.  4  :  9,  33. 

2.  When  the  Future  is  used  in  an  Optative,  Impera¬ 
tive,  or  Subjunctive  sense,  it  not  unfrequently  takes  the 
prefix  b  that,  ut ,  and  the  preformative  11  falls  out ;  e.  g. 
p"“b  ijb  tjrjm  tliy  presents  he  to  thyself  \  Dan.  5:17.  tfirb 
,  with  the  beasts  of  the  field  shall  he  thy  dwelling , 
Dan.  5:22.  Though  in  the  latter  case  Gesenius  (Lehrgeb., 
p.  787,)  considers  tfirb  as  Inf.  instead  of  Klijab,  and  com¬ 
pares  the  frequent  use  of  the  Infinitive  for  finite  tenses  in 
Hebrew.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  543. 

To  this  use  of  b  with  the  Fut.,  corresponds  entirely  the  Arabic  J 

• 

j 

Rosenmuller’s  Inst,  ad  fundam.  Ling.  Arab.  p.  331.  Compare  also  the 
French  que. 

Prof.  Winer  in  his  2d  ed.  abandons  this  explanation,  on  the  ground  that 
this  use  of  b  is  found  nowhere  else  in  Chaldee,  and  prefers,  with  Beer,  to 
consider  the  b  as  an  unusual  preformative  of  the  Future  tense,  (not  unfre¬ 
quent  in  the  Talmud)  instead  of*1.  He  quotes  two  passages  from  the 
Targums  to  which  he  considers  this  explanation  suited;  viz.  Ex.  10:28, 
Jer.  T.  SEtB  ‘Vlib  xb}  *’212 ,  ( Pharaoh )  desires  to  die,  and  not 

to  be  listening  to  your  words ;  and  Ex.  22  :  24,  Jon.  ■'\lib*i  ‘1lbs>  ywn  xb 
•p*ifiO  *1“ibr,  ye  shall  not  impose  upon  him  that  there  should  be  witnesses 
against  him.  But  the  old  explanation  seems  to  me  preferable.  Is  not  this 
very  idiom  the  basis  of  the  Talmudical  use  of  b  as  a  preformative  of  the 
Future  ? 

§  51.  Peculiar  mode  of  designating  certain  finite  tenses. 

1.  A  Pluperfect  is  formed,  in  the  later  Targums,  by- 
prefixing  ajn  to  the  Praeter ;  e.  g.  p£D  he  had  gone 
out .  The  Arabic  lias  a  similar  usage. 

2.  A  kind  of  Paulo-post-future,  to  he  about  to  do  any 
thing ,  is  expressed  by  prefixing  Try  [ready]  to  the  Inf. 
with  b  ;  e.  g.  snsrab  ^  Try,  Jehovah  is  about  to  punish , 
i.  e.  will  speedily  punish /  by  e.  g.  byrb  xm©  T.rn 
Gen.  15:12,  the  sun  was  just  about  setting.  In  the  lat¬ 
ter  construction,  the  sense  of  the  Inf.  active  sometimes 

5 


66 


§§  52,  53.  USE  OF  PARTICIPLES. 


becomes  passive  ;  e.  g.  Deut.  31  : 17,  bp^b  pirn  they  shall 
speedily  he  destroyed. 

§  52.  Use  of  the  Imperative  ay  id  Infinitive. 

1.  Of  two  Imperatives  connected  by  1 ,  the  second 
must  often  be  rendered  by  the  Future,  being  a  promise, 
of  which  the  first  was  the  condition.  So  in  English  we 
say  Do  and  live ,  i.  e.  If  ye  will  do,  ye  shall  live. 

2.  The  use  of  the  Inf.  governed  by  verbs  indicating 

desire,  purpose,  &c.  and  sometimes  by  nouns,  with  (or 
without)  b ,  is  more  frequent  than  in  Hebrew ;  e.  g.  Ex. 
2:15,  b-jppb  he  sought  to  hill ;  Gen.  29  :  7,  E3pttb  ppa  ab 
it  is  not  time  to  collect,  b  is  sometimes  omitted,  espe¬ 
cially  when  the  Infinitive  is  governed  by  a  noun ;  as  Josh. 
10:27,  b tsi  pip,  the  time  of  sunset. 

In  other  respects  these  moods  are  employed  as  in  Hebrew. 

§  53.  Use  of  Participles. 

1.  Participles  joined  («,)  To  the  substantive  verb ,  in¬ 
dicate  generally  the  Imperfect ;  as  imn  nrn  Dan.  2:31, 
Thou  saivest  [or,  wast  looking  /]  also  with  the  Future, 
pinn  fang  a  b  Ruth  1:20,  Ye  shall  not  call  \be  in  the  habit 
of  calling ]  me  Naomi.  The  same  indefiniteness  seems  to 
be  given  to  the  sense,  as  in  the  corresponding  construc¬ 
tion  in  English.  This  usage  is  more  frequent  in  Chaldee 
than  in  Hebrew.  (5)  Joined  to  the  personal  pronouns  and 

,  they  designate  generally  the  Present  tense  ;  some¬ 
times  others;  e.  g.  b*w  Gen.  32:11,  /  was  afraid , 
-jitps  as  Judg.  6:36,  if  thou  wilt  save. 

Note.  Sometimes  the  snbst.  verb  is  omitted  in  this  construction  ;  e.  g. 
Job  1 :  13.  phis']  pbsx  his  sons  (were)  eating  and  drinking. 

2.  Participles  govern  nouns  ;  either,  ( a )  In  the  Geni 
tive,  the  participle  being  in  the  construct  state ;  as  “'bps 
sftriB  1  K.  2  :  7,  those  who  eat  at  thy  table  /  or,  (l?)  In  the 


67 


54 - 56.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;  OPTATIVE, 


ETC. 


case  governed  by  tlie  verb  from  which  they  are  derived  ; 
as  prvsna  jona  Ex.  25:20,  stretching  out  their  wings . 

§  54.  Optative  mood. 

This  is  indicated  in  Chaldee,  either, 

a.  By  the  simple  future  (compare  §  50 ;)  or, 

b.  By  questions  expressing  desire;  e.  g.  Judg.  9:29,  ri1]  *}£ 

who  will  deliver  this  people  to  me  ?  i.  e.  would  that  this  people  were  under 
my  control.  Especially  is  the  formula  *)W“*  *)£  (comp.  Heb.  ‘jn“l  “’e)  em¬ 
ployed  in  this  optative  sense  ;  e.  g.  Deut.  28  :  67,  “it-}1?  *]?3  ,  Oh  that  it 

were  evening ,  lit.  who  will  give  evening  ? 

c.  By  “vb  with  the  Future,  when  the  wish  respects  future  time  ;  as 
o*£rv  iib  ,  may  he  stand  before  thee!  Gen.  17  :  18. — With  thq  Prae- 

ter  when  the  wish  regards  time  past ;  e.  g.  Num.  20  :  3,  KSrpa'n  ^b ,  Oh 
that  we  had  died  ! 

§  55.  Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject. 

1.  The  general  principles,  as  well  as  most  anomalies, 
are  the  same  here  as  in  Hebrew.  See  Stuart’s  Heb. 
Gram.  §  479,  seq.  Conant’s  Gesenius,  §§  146-148. 

2.  When  a  verb  has  several  predicates  it  is  generally 
put  in  the  plural.  Sometimes  however,  especially  when 
the  verb  precedes  the  predicates,  it  is  singular ;  so  Gen. 
8  : 16.  Num.  20  :  11. 

§  56.  Impersonal  verbs  and  verbs  with  indefinite  Nominatives. 

1.  Impersonal  verbs  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  simply  the 
third  person  singular  of  personal  verbs  without  any 
Nominative.  They  also  take  a  Dative ;  e.  g.  1  Sam.  30:6, 
lilb  npp ,  David  was  distressed. 

2.  To  express  the  idea  of  a  verb  with  an  indefinite 
Nominative ; 

(a)  The  3d  person  singular  is  sometimes  employed 

exactly  as  in  impersonal  verbs  ;  e.  g.  said  (some 

one)  to  Joseph  ; 

(b)  The  3d  pers.  plur, ;  which  frequently  must  be 


68 


57 - 59.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;  REGIMEN,  ETC. 


rendered  by  tlie  passive  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  4:13,  [English  Ver¬ 
sion  4  : 16,]  patiP  naab  let  his  heart  he  changed ,  lit.  let  them 
change  his  heart. 

(c)  The  2d  per.  sing,  sometimes  expresses  the  same 
idea,  Is.  41 : 12. 

(d)  Also  the  plur.  Part. ;  as  ppitta  Dan.  3  :  4,  it  is 

spoken. 

§  57.  Regimen  of  Verbs. 

The  nse  of  the  simple  Accusative  or  Dative,  of  two 
accusatives,  and  of  verbs  with  prepositions,  may  be 
learned  from  the  Hebrew  analogy.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb. 
Gr.  §§  508 — 513.  Conan t’s  Gesenius,  §§  138 — 140. 

§  58.  Verbs  used  for  Adverbs. 

In  Chaldee,  as  in  Hebrew,  two  verbs  are  often  so 
connected  that  one  of  them  may  be  best  translated  by 
an  adverb.  The  verbs  most  commonly  so  employed  are 
►poia  to  add ,  for  again ,  more /  awa  to  make  good ,  for 
well  /  snp  to  precede,  for  before /  ain  to  return ,  for  again  / 
Tiia  to  hasten ,  for  quickly  /  e.  g.  aTa  rp  nsm  an ,  Isaac 
digged  again  (lit.  returned  and  digged)  the  ivells ,  Gen. 
26:18. 

So  in  English  we  say,  make  haste  and  come ,  for  come  quickly. 

§  59.  Constructio  praeg nans  and  Ellipsis. 

1.  Const/ructio  praegnans .  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gr. 
8  566.  Conant’s  Gesenius,  8  141.  amnia  tfab  ^  nP  , 
cm/7  Jehovah  changed  (his  heart  and  gave)  to  him  another 
heart.  1  Sam.  10:9. 

2.  Ellipsis  is  not  frequent,  except  of  the  substantive 
verb.  Ps.  120:7,  aajjpb  pan  aaa  ?  I  (desire)  peace , 
they  (are)  for  war. 


60.  SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS  J  CASES. 


69 


•  CHAPTER  III. 
SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS. 


§  60.  Designation  of  Cases. 

4 

1.  The  Genitive  is  indicated, 

( a )  As  in  Hebrew,  by  tlie  const,  state  of  the  preceding 
noun ;  e.  g.  the  words  of  the  hing . 

Qi)  By  the  prefix  ^  (or  ^ ,)  in  which  case  the  preced¬ 
ing  word  is  ordinarily  in  the  emphatic  state ;  e.  g.  fcobtt 
the  hing  of  the  earth ,  V  the  hinges  cap¬ 

tain,  Han.  2:15. 

(c)  In  designations  of  time,  by  b ;  e.  g.  fctfi^b  Gen. 
8:5,  the  day  of  the  month /  2  Kings  12  :  1,  ysflj  nstta 
tfTPb  m  the  seventh  year  of  Jehu . 

Note  1.  The  case  &.  may  be  compared  with  the  Hebrew  b  “niix  ,  and 
^  be  regarded  as  a  real  relative ;  thus  might  be  rendered 

the  captain  who  (belonged  to)  the  king,  fctsbtt  might  be  regarded  as  a  Da¬ 
tive  (b  being  omitted  by  ellipsis),  or  as  a  Genitive  governed  by  in  the 
construct  state. 

Note  2.  In  the  later  Targums  the  characteristic  prefix  of  the  Genitive 
is  sometimes  omitted ;  e.  g.  Esth.  1 :  9,  banquet  of  the  women. 

In  some  instances,  on  the  other  hand,  the  characteristic  of  the  Genitive 
case  (f)  is  inserted  after  a  noun  in  the  construct  state. 

Note  3.  The  form  of  the  construct,  especially  of  the  const,  pi.,  some¬ 
times  appears  in  the  Targums  instead  of  the  absolute  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  1  :  10,  the 
collections  of  water  "'E?  K'njs  ,  he  called  seas. 

2.  As  in  Hebrew,  b  prefixed  forms  the  Dative. 

8.  The  Accusative  takes  either  b ,  (like  the  Syriac,— 
and  this  is  almost  universal  in  the  Targum  on  Proverbs ;) 
or  in?  (i.  cp  Ideb.  na ;)  or  it  has  the  simple  form  of  the 
Nominative. 

4.  The  Vocative  is  generally  expressed  by  the  form, 
of  the  emphatic  state. 


70 


61,  62.  SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS  ;  USE  OF  CASES,  ETC. 


§  61.  Peculiar  use  of  the  cases. 

1.  The  Genitive  is  often  employed  instead  of  an  adjective  qualifying 

the  preceding  noun;  e.  g.  Dan.  3  :  5,  obs  an  image  of  golf  i.  e.  a 

golden  image. 

Note  1.  Sometimes  the  first  noun  qualifies  the  second;  e.  g.  ^  pipns 
with  a  strong  hand — lit.  with  strength  of  hand. 

Note  2.  The  Hebrew  student  will  not  be  disappointed  to  meet  in  Chal¬ 
dee  with  phrases  like  SOttbtt  Gen.  37  :  19,  lit.  master  of  dreams ,  i.  e. 
interpreter  of  dreams;  Xtnd  “>3  son  of  a  year ,  i.  e.  a  year  old. 

2.  The  Accusative  of  place  answers  the  question,  where?  and  must 
consequently  be  translated  by  at  or  in.  The  simple  Accusative  is  also 
sometimes  employed,  by  synecdoche  where  we  must  render,  in  respect  of; 
e.  g*  ^P^P  ruddy  in  respect  to  complexion ,  or  of  a  ruddy  complexion , 
Lam.  4  :  7. 

This  construction  is  less  frequent  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  Instead 
of  it  the  Targums  sometimes  employ  3. 

3.  The  case  absolute,  either  the  Nom.  (which  is  most  frequent),  the 
Acc.,  or  even  sometimes  the  Dat.  (with  b  signifying  quoad,)  is  employed  as 
in  Hebrew.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gr.  §§  415 — 417. 

§  62.  Use  of  the  'plural  and  repetition  qf  nowns. 

1.  The  plural  is  sometimes  employed  where  only  one  of  the  things  des¬ 
ignated  is  meant.  Judg.  12  :  7,  Jephthah  was  buried,  *\’HP^  j  ira  one 
of  the  cities  of  Gilead  ;  Gen.  8  :  4,  The  ark  rested  on  one  of  the  moun¬ 
tains ■,  etc. 

2.  ‘pp’9  and  ‘piis'n  are  employed  as  plurals  of  excellence  or  respect. 
On  the  other  hand  ‘pfibi*  has  always  a  plural  sense.  In  the  biblical  Chal¬ 
dee  only,  occurs  'pS'Pbltf ,  the  Most  High ,  as  a  name  of  God,  Dan.  7  :  15. 

3.  The  double  members,  etc.,  which  in  Hebrew  require  the  dual,  are 
designated  in  Chaldee  by  the  plural.  When  the  dual  in  Hebrew  is  em¬ 
ployed  to  designate  definitely  two  persons  or  things,  it  is  rendered  in 
Chaldee  by  the  plural  with  . 

4.  The  immediate  repetition  of  a  noun  indicates, 

a.  Midtitude.  Gen.  14  :  10,  ‘ptaP3  many  wells. 

b.  Partition  or  separation,  expressed  by  each ,  etc. ;  as  Gen.  32  :  16, 

each  particular  herd  ;  Esth.  3  :  4,  KE'n  every  day. 


§  63.  Construction  qf  Adjectives. 

1.  Exceptions  from  the  general  principle  “that  adjectives  agree  with 
the  substantives  which  they  qualify  in  gender  and  number”  are  the  same 
as  in  Hebrew.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gr.  §  449. 

2.  When  an  adjective  is  the  predicate  of  the  sentence,  it  stands  gen¬ 
erally  after  the  noun.  Rarely,  and  only  when  the  substantive  verb  is 
omitted,  it  precedes. 


71 


64,  65.  SYNTAX  OF  ADJECTIVES, 


ETC. 


3.  Adjectives  used  as  simple  epithets ,  follow  their  nouns. 

4.  The  neuter  gender  is  usually  expressed  by  feminine  adjectives; 
Ps.  27  :  4,  *irV‘'5?n  Kin  one  thing  have  I  desired. 

5.  An  adjective  is  put  in  the  construct  state  before  a  noun  expressing 
the  thing  in  respect  to  which  the  quality  is  affirmed;  e.  g.  Prov.  16:  19, 
nsn  b2l2  of  a  humble  spirit ,  lit.  humble  of  spirit. 


§  64.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

1.  The  comparative  is  formed,  either 

( a )  By  pa  simply,  as  in  Hebrew ;  or 

( b )  By  inserting  nw  or  TW  ( abundant ,  but  here  in 
the  sense  of  more)  before  pa  ;  e.  g.  Ps.  119  : 103.  pa^&a 

tfp  sweeter  than  honey ,  lit.  sweet  more  than  etc. 

2.  The  superlative  is  designated  as  in  Hebrew.  Thus 
bsia  Dan.  4  : 14,  the  basest  of  men  ;  X'ftv  Lev. 

24:9,  the  highest  heaven  ;  etc. 

§  65.  Numerals. 

1.  Numerals  from  1  to  10  are  placed  either  before  or  after  nouns.  Gen. 

8  : 10,  pa'p  K22U5 .  Dan.  3  :  25,  pn2a . 

2.  From  11  to  100  the  numerals  precede  the  substantive  in  the  plural. 

Jud.  11:33,  .  But  the  tens  sometimes  follow  their  substan¬ 

tives.  Gen.  32 :  14. 

Note  1.  In  a  few  instances  the  substantive  appears  in  the  construct 
state  before  its  numeral.  1  K.  8  :  63,  502*1  p*ii!J21  pl-ptt  piitn  220,000  oxen. 
Comp.  §  60.  1.  note  3. 

Note  2.  When  rp  precedes  the  numeral,  the  noun  is  in  the  emph.  st. ; 
e.  g.  Gen.  1  : 16,  5p'p!-i3  ppn  rp  the  two  great  lights. 

Note  3.  In  designations  of  weights  and  measures  the  noun  expressing 
the  weight,  etc.  is  often,  though  not  so  frequently  as  in  Hebrew,  omitted. 
Thus  Gen.  37  :  28,  f)D2  pp&22  for  20  (shekels)  of  silver.  So  in  designa¬ 
tions  of  time,  fifav  is  still  more  frequently  omitted.  Comp.  Gen.  8:  13, 
Lev.  23  :  32. 

3.  Instead  of  the  ordinals  from  1  to  10  the  cardinals  are  not  unfrequently 
employed.  Gen.  8  : 13,  5<ivpb  ‘"012  ,  on  the  first  of  the  month.  2  K.  12  :  1, 
50rnb  22115  rou52  in  the  seventh  year  of  Jehu — lit.  in  the  year  VII.  of 
Jehu. 

4.  Distributives  are  expressed  by  a  simple  repetition  of  the  cardinals 
without  1 ;  as  K22H3  5*22125  by  sevens,  p*ifi  pPn  two  and  two,  by  pairs. 
Gen.  7  :  2,  9. 


72 


§  66,  67.  SYNTAX  OF  PARTICLES  ;  ADVERBS,  ETC. 


5.  Numeral  adverbs  are  of  two  kinds. 

a.  Those  of  degree  or  intensity.  These  are  expressed  in  Chaldee  by 
prefixing  ‘in  to  the  cardinals  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  3  :  19,  X2212  2n  ,  seven  fold. 

b.  Those  of  repetition.  These  are  expressed,  precisely  as  in  English, 
by  times,  pse-t ;  as  Josh.  6  :  3,  Xjel  i OH ,  one  time ,  once.  Ex.  34  :  23,  p3ei 
nbn  three  times ,  etc. 

t  ;  ' 


CHAPTER  IV. 

SYNTAX  OF  PARTICLES. 


§  66.  Adverbs  generally. 

1.  The  repetition  of  an  adverb  expresses 

a.  Intensity.  Dent.  28  :  43.  XHHnb  XHprib  very  low ; 

b.  Repetition  or  continuation.  Ex.  23  :  30,  "V^l  by  little  and  little. 

2.  Adverbs  sometimes  qualify  nouns  by  being  placed  before  them  as 
nouns  in  the  construct  state.  Gen.  18  :  4,  X^e  "HSt  a  little  water. 

3.  Adverbs  sometimes  take  prepositions  before  them;  e.  g.  1X2  instead 
of  IX  simply.  Comp.  Gesenius’  Lehrgeb.  p.  828. 

Note.  In  the  last  three  cases,  1.  b,  2  and  3,  these  adverbs  may  be  re¬ 
garded  as  real  nouns.  Thus  X^c  taH21  a  small  quantity  of  water.  1X2  at 
that  time.  And  so  of  many  other  cases. 

4.  Many  adverbs  are  expressed  by  periphrasis  of  verbs.  See  §  58. 

§  67.  Negatives. 

1.  The  same  diltinction  exists  between  xb  and  PPb ,  as  in  Hebrew  be¬ 
tween  xb  and  px  ;  the  latter ,  in  both  languages,  implying  the  substantive 
verb. 

2.  bb.  .  .  xb  none ,  nobody ,  nothing.  So  in  Hebrew.  Compare  Gesenius’ 
Heb.  Lex.  word  X'b. 

3.  In  oaths  or  strong  declarations,  *]X  or  cx  ,  if  takes  the  place  of  a  di¬ 
rect  negative.  Thus  Is.  62  :  8.  “HX  cx  /  will  not  give ,  lit.  if  I  will  give. 
So  xb  cx  affirmatively ,  Josh.  14  :  9. 

4.  “  That — not  ”  is  sometimes  expressed  by  be  before  the  Inf.  e.  g.  Lev. 
26  :  19.  I  will  make  the  heavens  strong  as  iron  above  you  X2ee  xnnxbe, 
that  they  may  not  send  down  rain ,  (lit.  from  that  they  should ,  etc.)  For  the 
signification  cf  b  alone  prefixed  to  the  Infinitive,  see  §  50.  2. 


68.  INTERROGATIVE  PARTICLES. 


73 


§  68.  Interrogative  Particles. 

1.  The  direct  question  is  indicated  by  ,  or  has  no  peculiar  designa¬ 
tion. 

2.  The  double  interrogation  is  generally  expressed  by  EX  .  .  .  .  n  ;  e.  g. 
Num.  13 :  20,  Ntt)*1:!  fix  Xfififil"! ,  whether  good  or  had.  1  K.  22  : 15,  .  .  .  . 

?Dfin3  EX,  shall  we  go  up  to  Ramoth  Gilead  to  battle,  or  shall  we  for¬ 
bear  ? 

3.  The  question  with  xb|n ,  being  employed  simply  to  excite  attention, 

is  frequently  better  rendered  by  behold  !  Comp.  X'bn  under  the  word  X?  in 
Gesenius’  Heb.  Lex.  Thus  Deut.  11  :  30,  x8fi5>2  *ji|5X  xbft  behold 

they  are  on  the  other  side  Jordan ,  lit.  are  they  not ,  etc.  So  also  the  fre¬ 
quent  expression,  yisx  xbn.  behold  they  are  written. 


PARADIGMS. 


Paradigms  of  verbs,  nouns,  and  numeral  adjectives  are  here  subjoined, 
accompanied  by  references  to  the  corresponding  sections  in  the  Grammar 


74 

Par. 

I.  Regular  Verbs.  §§  11 — 13. 

Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Praet. 

3  m. 

^92 

ba  or  bapna 

^9E 

3  f. 

nbap 

nbapna 

—  I#  •  • 

i*99 

2  in. 

an  or  nbap 

nbapra  an  or  nbap 

••••#•  •  •  T  •  •  ••  f — 

2  f. 

nbap 

nbapna 

nbap 

1  c. 

i*9E 

nbapna 

nbap 

PL 

3  m. 

*92 

*apns 

*92 

3  f. 

abap 

t  —  1; 

abapna 

abap 

2  m. 

finbap 

■pnbapna 

1^92 

2  f. 

19^92 

a:bap 

-.nbapna 

?E’?92 

1  c. 

aibapna 

tfjb-top 

Inf. 

top? 

abapna 

t  t  b  :  • 

abap 

T  T  1— 

Imp. 

2  m. 

*?2 

bapna 

I*3B 

* 

2  f. 

*92 

-bapna 

•  ••  *  ;  ;  • 

*92 

pi. 

2  m. ' 

*91? 

abapna 

*92 

2  f. 

a'bap 

a:bapna 

T  *  ••  1  •  •  • 

aibap 

Fut. 

3  m. 

bap' 

%  \ ;  • 

bapn' 

•  •  I  •  •  • 

bap* 

3  f. 

bapn 

bapnn 

bapn 

2  m. 

bapn 

btDpnn 

••  p  •  •  • 

bapn 

•  •  >—  ; 

2  f. 

i*929 

■pbagnn 

1*999 

1  c. 

baps 

\  * :  v 

bapna 

bapa 

PL 

3  m. 

1*91?: 

£92: 

1*9991 

1*99? 

1*99: 

3  f. 

■jbttprp 

2  m. 

1*999 

fibapnn 

■)*apFi 

2  f. 

1*929 

1*9999 

£999 

1  c. 

5=91?? 

bopno 

^92? 

1  Part.  m. 

bap 

bap  a 

f. 

sbap 

t  :  »it 

abapa 
*  •  r  • 

2  Part.  m. 

b'ap 

bapna 

••  1 ;  ;  * 

bapa 

f. 

ab'ap 

abapna 

abapa 

t  ; 

75 


Par.  I.  Regular  Verbs.  §§  11 — 13. 


Ithpaal.  Aphel.  Ittaphal. 


bapns 

baps 

bapns 

nbapns 

nbaps 

nbapns 

nbapns 

sn  or  nbaps 

nbapns 

nbapns 

nbaps 

nbapns 

nbapns 

nbaps 

nbapns 

:ibapns 

iibaps 

iibapns 

sbapns 

t  — ' —  ;  • 

sbaps 

t  •• > ;  — 

sbapns 

r  —  > :  —  • 

■pnbapns 

■pnbaps 

l^ps 

^nbapns 

■jnbapns 

■jnbapns 

s;bapns 

sjbaps 

s:bapns 

sbapns 

t  tI-  :  • 

sbaps 

t  t  t :  — 

sbapns 

t  t  I :  —  • 

bapns 

baps 

bapns 

'bapns 

'baps 

'bapns 

nbapns 

'baps 

!)bapns 

s;bapns 

s'baps 

Sjbapns 

t  :  —  —  • 

bapnr 

Saas 

bapn' 

bapnn 

bapn 

bapnn 

bapnn 

bapn 

bapnn 

■pbapnn 

ite 

■j'bapnn 

bapns 

(tapm)  baps 

bapns 

iter? 

ite 

te 

ter 

te? 

■pbapnn 

,*apn 

■pbapnn 

te4? 

te 

“btppnn 

bapn? 

bapn? 

bap  a 

sbapa 

t  :  > :  — 

bapna 

bapa 

bapna 

sbapna 

sbapa 

t  : >:  — 

sbapna 

t  :  •:  -  • 

T  6 


Par.  II.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffixes.  §  16. 


Suffixes. 

Sing.  1  com. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

3  masc. 

3  fern 

Pe.  Pr.  3  m. 

'pbtig 

P?“P 

nbftp 

nbtap 

3  f. 

h;nbt3p 
.  —  :  —1; 

"tPP 

■#PP 

nrfcp 
..  ;  —1  ■ 

nnbap 

t  :  —  >: 

2  m. 

‘tnbtip  &c.  Same  as  3  f.  except  that  it  does  not  take 

2  f. 

'3Tibtp 

•  •  :  — >z 

TPFibfcp 

n*nbap 

T  •  •  —  t  • 

itnbtip 

1  c. 

“nbtip 
•  r  • 

nnbup 

PL 

3  m. 

2  m. 

■wbpg 
*03  h32tfbt2p 

P*PP 

“:*.rbnp 

nfeg 

rwnbiap 

"~Pp 

“•rPP 

1  c. 

*n:bt® 

•t  :  -J; 

arabap 

Inf,, 

Inf.  with  ) 

2  epenth.  f 

-bnpv: 

.  —  •  ;  1;  • 

■osbtapa 
•  -  •  : • 

^pa 

Tt  P'PPr 
Ttibt 

hni  nbtip/j 

.  ...j.. 

TObtipE 

nbpps 

robopa 
•  •  • 

Fill. 

3  m. 

T^pr 

mb  tip1 " 

3  m.  with  ) 

2  epenth.  J 

'jSbtJp^ 

•  :  J;  • 

“rpp: 

hD5  _  olb^p" 

•  ••  •  j ••  •  j  j  j  • 

rttbt:ph 

nsbup' 

Pl. 

3  m. 

*222baph 

^  ‘nsfibttp* 

•  ••  | ;  1  ;  • 

rafep*' 

fi22buip* 

Imp. 

2  m. 

h*!  hh 

• 

nbtip  an-  nbt3p 

••  v:  t  :  t  v: 

. —  - —  ^uu 

•:r:np 

2  m.  with  ) 

2  epenth.  f 

nsbcp 

rebtsp 

2  f. 

*2hbt3p 

•  •  v: 

vrirap 

an'bap 

PL 

2  m. 

33  ■‘SsfctJp 

•“iibap 

arrtbtap 

t  v: 

2  f. 

*03bt3p 

•  t  : 

“nobttp 

•t  :  v : 

ansbtap 

Pa.  Praet. 

“ObtDp 
•  —  :  *— 

nbtap 
•  •  ;  1— 

nbt ap 

t  :  *— 

wbtap  ‘nm^ibtsp  mbtop  ttMbtop  nritep 

•  T  I  T  T  l  ••  T'"“  ..  T>—  T  T 


Inf. 


Par.  II.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffixes.  §  16.  77 


Plur.  1  com. 

2  masc. 

2  fern. 

3  masc. 

3  fern. 

tfDbtip 

t  t  : »- 

Tbbap 

T3$g? 

Iisbtpp 

aanbap 

r  r  :  —  •: 

-pbnbap 

i=rtg? 

laanbap 

anbap 

suffixes  of  the  second  person. 

trnnbap 

laaTibap 

IJTibap 

T^g? 

I3$g? 

laarbap 

■jj  aaabap 

pbaabap 

Ipaabap 

laaabag 

TP**?E 

833  MVlbap 

iwnbap 

laarbap 

1=5^1? 

VS*g? 

T?*g? 

sabapa 

1'tobapa 

i*g» 

linbapa 

v#g?j? 

ittsbapa 

tt  •  :  *:  • 

rtaabapa 

pibttpft 

l^btppa 

to5? 

xaabap-1 

aasabap" 

■pbabap' 

f  •  •  r  • 

lisaabap" 

1  •  •  •  * 

T?&g?r 

Ipaabapi 

V*g?: 

l^aabap- 

labap-1 

It  •  :  »:  • 

■aabapi 

aabap 

laabap 

xa'bap 

lT?bR 

irVg? 

laa-btap 

xaabap 

aaabap 

l^aabap 

13% 

aabap 

|tt  :  v: 

aabap 

■jiabaaja 

■$t?E 

l^bap 

aanabap 

T  T  T  J- 

■pbrabap 

Ipnabap 

linwibap 

■“nabap 

78 

Par.  III.  Verbs  Pe  Nun.  §  18. 

Peal. 

Aphel. 

Itta^hal. 

Praet.  3  in. 

PS? 

PI5? 

psnNi 

3  f. 

re  S3 
:  • 

npss 

rpErs 

2  in. 

am  or  npSD 

t  ;  L 

PpBSS 

npBna 
•  “  • 

2  f. 

rpsx 

npBPN 
•  '  • 

1  c. 

nps? 

rpB« 

npEFK 

PL  3  in. 

*lp|? 

3pEX 

sipBPs; 

3  f. 

Np33 

ajjia 

spina 

2  m. 

re? 

■jWpESt 

■pnpBna 

2  f. 

re? 

■jPpBN 

■jnpBRS 

1  c. 

K3p33 

t»:  — : 

N3pBK 

K3pBPX 

Inf. 

pB3? 

KpBK 

SpEPS 

>T  T  —  * 

Imp.  2  m. 

PI,  pB 

pm 

pBPS 

2  f. 

■pBH 

'Pin5? 

PL  2  m. 

ilpB 

ilpBS 

ilpEFS 

2  f. 

X3pB 

■  •  % 

N3pB« 

83PBF1S 

Put.  3  m. 

pi:,  pc 

P?_ 

psn? 

3  f. 

psn 

psn 

psnn 

2  m. 

pan 

psn 

psnn 

2  f. 

Vpsn 

1'psn 

Tpsnp 

1  c. 

PI5? 

pm 

pEPS 

Pl.  3  m. 

re 

•pips? 

■pip^rr 

3  f. 

1PC 

TPC 

■psn 

2  m. 

■j^ppn 

■ppsn 

•ppBrn 

2  f. 

re 

W 

Ipsnn 

1  c. 

ps? 

PI? 

psn? 

1  Part.  m. 

p33 

1  ..T 

pBB 

f. 

NpS3 

*  T  .IT 

«PT?  = 

2  Part.  m. 

P'S? 

PB‘2 

P5tt? 

f. 

re? 

K'E'J 

>t  :  — 

aps-pa 

Par.  IV.  Verbs  Ayin  doubled.  §  19. 


lit 

Peal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

Praet.  3  m. 

P3 

P7» 

p^m 

3  f. 

rjt" 

nppx 

nppns 

2  m. 

pi  npi 

np5« 

pp~pbb 

2  f. 

nppx 
• ' «  **  ™ 

pp~m 

1  c. 

ppn 

np"s 

np^nx 

PL  3  m. 

*ip5 

!ip|s 

^Ip^FlX 

3  f. 

m 

sp?is 

lT  ••  — 

Np^im 

*T  ~  —  • 

2  in. 

]®P5 

■jtnppst 

■jilFpflm 

2  f. 

|F|?5 

■jPp'W 

■plp^Fit 

1  c. 

bMp^bt 

bOp^lPbb 

Inf. 

Kpis 

It  t  — 

sp“m 

Imp.  2  m. 

pi 

P7» 

p“FX 

2  f. 

hp™ 

•p?Fbt 

PL  2  m. 

*1)5^ 

*ip5bt 

Jlp^Pbb 

2  f. 

«?)?* 

T  I :  — 

bbjplPbt 

Fut.  3  m. 

PT 

P-C 

p^F' 

•  3  f. 

P™ 

pw 

p^IFF 

2  m. 

PT 

p™ 

p^FF 

2  f. 

n?7*? 

TP75 

rpwF 

1  c. 

p™ 

P“bb 

p^PX 

Pl.  3  m. 

wr 

TPE 

TP^nr 

3  f. 

IP?: 

tp^r 

2  ra. 

|!|pTO 

Itppn 

■pppPP 

2  f. 

IP™ 

IP™ 

|P“FP 

1  c. 

p^l? 

pp: 

P5F3 

1  Part.  m. 

PP7 

P7P 

f. 

Spp^l 

bb  it 

spia 

*t  :  — 

2  Part.  m. 

PT?7 

p5<2 

jwna 

f. 

«5T?7 

btpTJ 

<t  :  — 

bbpTOU 

It  ;  —  • 

Par.  V.  T9 
Verbs  is.  §  20. 

Peal.  Pr.  *ibn 

Ac.  reg. 

Inf. 

Imp.  lb 

(inn  nn) 

Fut.  nb^ 

1  Part.  lbM 

••T 

2  Part.  Tbh 

•  • 

Itbpeel.  bb^intf 

-i-  ••  •  •  • 

•  • 

Pael.  Pr.  ‘■ft* 
Fut.  taibh^ 

•  •  tm  • 

Itlipaal. 

ApheL  Tbitf 

Fut.  TbV 

• 

Par.  VI. 
Verbs  ■’3.  §20. 

Peal.Pr.  2tF 

Fut.  atr' 
—  • 

Pael.  Pr.  21 T 

Fut.  2X2'_' 

Apb.  Pr. 

Inf.  antra 

T  T 

Fut.  2*2" 

•  •• 


80 


Par.  VII.  Verbs  Ayin  Vav.  §  22. 


Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Ithpaal. 

Praet. 

3  m. 

°i? 

apns 

D'P 
••  >— 

D'pnx 

3  f. 

TO 

napnx 

na'p 

TOETO 

2  m. 

n  nap 

napns 

•  •  Ir  •  • 

•  •  •  • 

na'P 

na^ns 

2  f. 

nap 

napm 

na'p 

na'pnx 

1  c. 

nap  or  nap 

V  *T 

napnx 

v*t  :  • 

TOE 

na'pna 

pi. 

3  m. 

TO 

iiapnx 

TOP 

TOpna 

3  f. 

sap 

sapns 

t  It  ;  • 

sa'p 

sa'pnx 

t  —i—  :  • 

2  m. 

TO? 

“|WapnN 

■pnp.'p 

■pnpgpm 

2  f. 

'TO 

(TO1?5? 

-(na'P 

*in53*pin8 

i  ••  j -4-  •  • 

1  c. 

&»a6 

t  :  — 

ittapna 

«3a»p 

twa  ^pnx 

Inf. 

(taps?)  Dpa 

sapm 

aa'p 

T  Tl— 

sa'pns 

t  t  i—  :  • 

Imp. 

2  m. 

fiilp 

opns 

D'P 

2  f . 

TOP 

rapm 

'D'P 

'a'pns 

pi. 

2  m. 

na^rp 

r:pm 

w5pr» 

2  f. 

s:a*p 

r  :  It  :  • 

81353*  p 

wa'pns 

Put. 

3  m. 

TO 

cpn^ 

D'pp: 

3  f. 

n*pn 

Dpnn 

n.'pn 

Diprn 

2  m. 

D^ipn 

Dpnn 

It  :  • 

D'pn 

n^pnn 

2  f. 

■panpn 

■papnn 

TOP*? 

1'52'pnn 

1  c. 

c^ipx 

Dpna 

It  :  v 

D'ps 

D.'pnx 

PL 

3  m. 

TOP' 

iTO1?? 

•rnpn- 

3  f. 

ito 

iapn' 

1  t It  :  • 

TO 

TOP" 

2  m. 

TOPP1 

•papnn 

na'pn 

■jpj'pnn 

2  f. 

TOP1? 

lapnn 

TO1? 

ra'pnn 

!  t  :  l—  :  • 

1  c. 

D“pD 

opni 

DfP? 

p?pn: 

1  Part.  m. 

D'p ,  DKp 

D.'pa 

f. 

sa'p 

t  :  ir 

aa'pa 

t:  : 

2  Part.  m. 

D'P 

npna 

D'P’P 

D'pna 

-i~  i  • 

f. 

TOP 

sapna 

t  <t  :  • 

sa'pa 

t  ;  I—  ; 

sa'pna 

r  :  l  :  • 

Par.  VII.  Verbs  Ayin  Vav.  §  22.  81 


Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

Polel. 

Ithpolal. 

D'pK 

D'pPS 

TOP 

aaipm 

(R) 

nahpm 

naaip 

naaipns 

n  py'pa 

.  mwa 

naaip 

paaipns 

na-ps 

pypns 

naaip 

paaipns 

(fi)  *TO$ 

na'pns 

naaip. 

nyyipns 

sia'pN 

WpES 

iiaaip 

*iyaipns 
—  *  :  • 

t  »•  -: 

sa'pns 

t  !•  :  • 

saaip 

saaipns 

t  —  *  :  • 

■ppypK 

iwa^pps 

■pipaaip 

•j®aaiippis 

Tpypps 

■jpaaip 

■jpaaipns 

ssaps 

saypps 

saaaip 

t  :  —  *  :  • 

t  >t 

sapps 

t^t  :  • 

saaip 

saaipns 

D'pH 

D'pPS 

TOP 

aaipns 

■waps 

•  m  ;  • 

■aya'p 

‘wyipns 

wps 

wpps 

^laaaip 

iaaipns 

swaps 

saypps 

saaaip 

swaaipns 

srp-1 

D'pp' 

oaip1' 

aaipn-1 

nhpp 

D'pnn 

aaipp 

naipnn 

Q'pn 

D'pPP 

aaipp 

oaippp 

TTO? 

■pyppp 

■j'aaipr. 

yaaipnn 

D'pS 

ypPSS 

oaips 

aaipnx 

—  *  :  v 

ito 

■pyppp 

•fiyyipi 

■payipiT 

TO 

T9W 

TTO 

l^aipn: 

TTO? 

■jiiyppp 

■paaipn 

■paaippp 

m* 

rypnn 

It  I'  :  • 

TOW 

^aaippp' 

o'!?? 

D'pPa 

aaipa 

aaipn? 

Q'pa 

taaipa 

tin'll 

saaipa 

m 

yppy 

aaipa 

aaipna 

sapa 

t  *r  : 

t  >•  :  • 

saaipa 

saaiPW 

f> 


82  Par.  VIII.  'Verbs  Lamedb  Alepli.  §  23. 


Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Praet. 

3  m. 

'_  sba 

•  ••  t  : 

•’barns 

'ba 

3  f. 

nba 

r  : 

n'ba  ns 

ns'_  r'ba 

2  m. 

rrJ  r'ba 

T  J—  r  ••  • 

n'bans 

t  ;  :  • 

n'ba 

2  f. 

rr_  n'ba 

•  •  M.  ••  * 

n'bans 

••  ;  j  • 

n'ba 
•  — 

1  c. 

'tv-  n'ba 
•  ••  ; 

n'bans 

T'—  n'ba 

•  •  •  Mm. 

PL 

3  m. 

iba 

rbans 
•  •  •  • 

“S'-  vba 
•  •  . 

3  f. 

nsb'a 

T  T  l 

s'bans 

t  •  :  :  • 

s'ba 

2  in. 

yn'ba 

yn'bans 

I  ••  :  :  • 

0.)  r^-ba 

2  f. 

irrbsna 

(b)  in'ba 

1  c. 

Sj'ba 

t  ••  : 

srb' ans 

t  :  :  • 

($)  *rn 

Inf. 

S'_  s_  sbaa 

t  :  r  • 

nsbans 

t  t  :  :  • 

nsba 

T  T  — 

Imp. 

2  m. 

■_  s_  'ba 

s_  'bans 
••  •  :  :  • 

s_  'ba 

•  •  •  mmm 

2  f. 

■_  sba 

•  t  : 

sba  ns 

t  ;  ;  • 

sba 

T  — 

PL 

2  m. 

iba  ns 

;  ;  • 

•* 

*153 

2  f. 

1-  Mb's 

IT  T  T  : 

sabans 

t  t  :  :  • 

s:b'a 

T  T  — 

Fnt. 

3  in. 

sba* 

•  ••  •  • 

'_  sban' 

•  ••  ;  ;  • 

sba' 

•  ••  —  ; 

3  f. 

sban 
••  ;  • 

sbann 

•  •  •  •  • 

sban 
•  • —  • 

2  m. 

sban 
•  •  •  • 

sbann 

•  •  •  •  • 

sban 
•  •  —  • 

2  f. 

ybann 

yban 

1  c. 

sbas 

••  ;  v 

sba  ns 

••  •  •  •• 

sbas 

PL 

3  m. 

i  ty: 

ybary 

3  f. 

ybary 

1'ba' 

It  :  -  : 

2  in. 

•(ib;m 

ybann 
!  :  :  • 

yban 

2  f. 

■$?*? 

rtswn 

lr  :  —  :  • 

yban 

1  c. 

sbaa 

••  :  • 

sbana 

sba: 

1  Part. 

m. 

f. 

'-  sba 

••  ••  T 

s'ba 

t  :  -r 

sba  a 
•  •  •  *  _  • 

• 

T  •  *■  * 

•  •  • 

2  Part. 

m. 

aba 

sbana 

••  ••  ;  •  • 

'baa 

f. 

S'ba 

s'bana 

s'baa 

t:—  t  ;  —  :  •  t  :  —  . 


t 


Par.  VIII.  Verbs  Larnedh  Aleph.  §  23.  83 


Ithpaal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

*’_  hbataK 

•bas 
•  •  *  •  — 

•bars 
•  ;  —  • 

rrb?» 

nss_  rrbars 

r^baras 
•  —  ;  • 

nv  rrl  rrbas 

•  T  •*  t  •  ;  — 

rrbars 
•  ;  —  • 

rpbans 

rrbas 

n'bans 

rabaras 

■n-  rrbas 
•  ••  ••  •  — 

rrbars 

a'baras 
•  —  :  • 

as"1-  vbas 
•  •  ;  — 

rbans 
•  •  —  • 

“s'bans 

T  •  —  :  • 

s*bas 

t  •  ;  — 

shears 

t  •  :  —  • 

aarrbans 

1  •  —  :  • 

■pirrbas 

a  rrbas 

1  ••  •  :  - 

sarbas 

t  •  :  — 

■prrbans 

arrears 

1  ••  •  ;  —  • 

ss'bans 
T  .  ;  —  • 

arahbans 
|  ••  •  —  ;  • 

srbans 

r  .  —  :  . 

r  t  —  ;  • 

nsbas 

t  t  :  — 

nsbans 

t  t  :  —  • 

S—  ■'bans 
•  •  •  — »  •  • 

s_  -bas 

s_  ‘bars 
•  •  •  •  —  • 

sbans 

seas 

sbans 

■ibans 

abas 

ib:<m 

•  —  • 

sabans 

t  t  —  :  • 

srbas 

t  — 

ss’b*  ars 

*’_  a_  sbara* 

sbao 

•  ••  ••  ;  —  , 

sbarr 

•  ••  ••  •  mm  9 

sbatan  * 

sban 
•  •  *  — 

sbann 

•  •  •  —  • 

sbann 

•  •  mmm  •  • 

sban 

•  •  •  MB 

sbarn 

rbaran 

1  •  —  :  • 

■pbann 

sbatas 

sbas 

sbans 
...  —  •; 

■jibara;' 

T&J- 

fibarr 

a-barr 

it  :  :  -• 

rbarr 

it  :  —  :  • 

■jibatain 

]iban 

■jibann 

rbann 

it  :—  :  • 

■pbann 

share 
•  •  —  •  • 

• 

sbas 

sbans 

..  . 

sbaa 

• 

s-ba‘a 

T  *  •  — 

•  •  • 

s'aar" 

••—  :  • 

■■baa 

sbana 

s*ban" 

s'baa 

S'barra 

t  :  —  :  • 

t  :  :  — 

• 

T  •  ;  —  • 

84 


Par.  IX.  Declension  of  Nouns  masculine. 


Sing.  Abs.  Const.  Emph.  Suff.  3  s.  m.  Suff.  2  pJ.m. 


Dec.  I.  Singular.  §31. 


0) 

(0 

t*  t- 

“iTO 
)'8  or  ■jb'S 

T 

Mb'8 

T  T  • 

•  • 

nsb'8 

••  T  • 

‘I'toniia 

liD3b'8 

Dec.  II.  Singular.  § 

32. 

0) 

Db? 

—  T 

D b? 

—  T 

sabs 

t  :  it 

nabs 

•• :  it 

■jisabs 

(0 

ins 

1  ••  r 

ins 

I  ”  T 

Mm3 

t  -:t 

rans 

••  -S  T 

Tbara 

I  :  ••  t 

Dec.  III.  Singular.  § 

33. 

0)  Oi 

ssba 

t  :  — 

“333 

•  •  •  mm 
• 

■jiasba 

(5) 

-n 

M3T 

t  :  • 

mat 
••  •  • 

• 

]i3?aj 

(0 

Db“ 

v  •• 

Dbn 

V  •• 

sabn 

t  :  v 

nabn 
•  •  •  •• 

•  • 

pabn 

(d) 

V* 

r? 

M'S 

T  •* 

na's 
•  •  •» 

ri33'S 
1  :  •* 

■  («?:?) 

(ns  ^5) 

0) 

trip 

pp 

XUilp 

t  :  »t 

nuhp 

T°t% 

(or  etc.) 

(/) 

bapna 

'  bapna 

abapna 

T  •  1—  •  • 

nbapna 

rtobapna 
•  •  • 

Dec.  IV.  Singular.  § 

34. 

(a) 

-5 

23 

832 

T  — 

'  pa* 

(0 

»? 

V 

•• 

T  * 

ws 
•  •  • 

PI? 

(0 

D8 

aaa 

T  \ 

nas 

•*  *•. 

jiSBS 

Dec.  Y.  Singular.  §  ; 

35. 

(a) 

ab2 

••  T 

8b2 

••  T 

8'b2 

t  :  t 

“'32 

•• :  t 

(0 

'bpa 

■'baa 

Mbaa 

t  :  :  — 

mbaa 

••  •  •  mm 
•  • 

fb'baa 

Dec.  VI.  Singular.  §  36. 

•wig 

laip 
""  •  """ 

iisanp 

t  t  :  l— 

••  t  ; 

Pm 

Par.  IX.  Declension  of  Nouns  masculine.  S5 


Plur.  Abs. 

Const. 

Emph. 

Suff.  3.  s.  m. 

Suff.  2.  pi.  m. 

Dec.  I.  Plural. 

TO 

•• 

T  — 

arrfiti 

• 

■jisrsia 

r:b-a 

|  •  T  • 

\ 

abat 

••  T  • 

aab'it 

■nijb'X 

•  T  • 

■pbabat 

|  •*  T  • 

Dec.  II.  Plural. 

rah? 

!  •  :  it 

■'abs 

•• :  it 

toah? 

t  — :  it 

rriab? 

•  :  it 

lirab? 

J  :  it 

TO 

nra 

••  “I  T 

sans 

t—  t 

'nans 

•  — :  t 

ftoare 

* 

Dec.  III.  Plural. 

TO 

a?b  a 

ss3ba 

t—  :  — 

anbba 
•  •  — 

• 

■jia'lba 

aar 

.  ••  :  • 

saar 

t—  :  • 

'piaat 

•  •  • 

• 

rbaa- 

rain 

1  •  :  v 

'abn 

tssab“ 

«r  —  •  •• 

*  •  • 

vriabn 

•  :  v 

Tto'abn 

I  ••  :  v 

r?:? 

aa> 

••  •• 

aaa> 

T—  •• 

vnr? 

•  *  • 

r bw 
••  •* 

(»:?:?) 

CsTia*!?) 

TO 

'Php 

xnihp 

ttfojTg 

TO?E 

TO*?5? 

'bapna 

N'bapna 

t—  :  :  • 

'hibapna 

■pb'bagna 

Dec.  IV.  Plural. 

V^s 

raa 

-ninn 

■pbraa 

rr? 

"•T3> 

••  • 

it-TJ 

T  —  • 

Triw 
•  • 

■pba? 

'Bit 

ksbk 

T  —  \ 

■rriax 

• 

■prat* 

Dec.  V.  Plural. 

v-s 

"bs 

••  T 

xaa 

r  —  t 

rriba 

•  >  T 

Tb'ba 

1  *•  T 

TO 

'baa 

xaaa 

t  —  :  — 

aribaa 
•  :  — 

fb'baa 

Dec.  VI.  Plural. 

TOTE 

hi«np 

..  r  :  l— 

'saip 

••  t  ;  i— 

"nil 

•  t  :  ■— 

ftoataija 

86 


Par.  X.  Declension  of  Nouns  feminine. 


Abs. 

Const. 

Emph. 

Suff.  3  s.  m. 

Suff.  2  pi.  m. 

Dec.  YII.  1 

Singular.  \ 

\  37. 

O) 

k;-t* 

t  •  ; 

rana 
-  •  : 

Kiana 

t:  •  : 

oth: 
...  .  ; 

■p'ptana 

0) 

■'"ram 
•  :  — 

maa 
•  •  — • 

• 

arnica 

t  •  :  — 

nrrriCa 
••  •  :  — 

■p'prrpiCa 

(0 

*oba 

• 

wpba 

mmm 

• 

awsba 

r  :  — 

wtvsba 
••  •  — 

• 

“p'pwsba 

Plural. 

0) 

ana 

it  •  : 

rona 

t  •  ; 

arona 

tt  •  : 

Vrirona 

•  t  •  : 

nibro^a 

I  :t  •  : 

(0 

“Hfla 

rvnoa 

t  :  :  — 

armsa 

tt  :  ;  — 

•  t  :  :  — 

•  T  •  •  “ 

.0) 

asba 

It  :  ;  — 

tvsba 

t  :  :  — 

aMPba 

tt  :  :  — 

rriMsba 

•  t  :  :  — 

Ttomsfea 

•  T  •  • 

Dec.  VIII. 

Singular. 

§  38. 

0) 

xba_x 

t  :  :  — 

rfeffiat 

mmm  •  •  m 

•  • 

anbaia 
•  •  • 

Bpjbaps 

Tianbara 
•  •  • 

(0 

i^ba 

t  :  t 

rrba 

- :  T 

arrba 

T  •  T 

nn'ba 

••  •  T 

riprrba 

I  :  •  t 

(0 

tty 

mpt 

arflPT 

t  : 

“MPT 
•  •  • 

■jiPMPT 

Plural. 

0) 

Tbaia 

It  :  :  — 

nbaus 

t  :  :  — 

arba-a 

t  T  :  :  — 

ninbana 

•  T  ;  :  — 

Tipnba-ia 

!  it;:™ 

(0 

|T  :  T 

raba 

t  :  t 

arrba 

tt  :  t 

,,“‘inhba 

•  t  :  t 

rbivby 

1  :  t  :  t 

(0 

r-p: 

t  :  — 

arvor 

tt  :  — 

'“iniPT 

•  r  :  — 

fiatvor 

Dec.  IX.  Singular.  § 

39. 

nx-j"!p 

nxapp 

arwip 

t :  r  :  i- 

wnfro 

.. :  T  ;  I- 

T>=ra 

Plural. 

1«?7E 

naaip 

t  t  : 

arraip 

TT  T  ; 

■’“Trapp 

■fipraarp 

!  : t  t  :  »- 

Par.  XI.  Numerals. 


87 


Par.  XI.  Numerals. 

A.  Cardinals  from  1  to  10. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 


No. 

Abs. 

Const. 

Abs. 

Const. 

1 

in 

in 

am 

T  -2 

nnn 

2 

r$? 

"in 

#.  • 

• 

■pirn 

-nm 

..  •  mm 
. 

3 

nnbn 

T  T  2 

nnbn 

—  t  : 

nbn 

t  : 

'nbn 

••T  2 

4 

“SDniS 

t  :  :  — 

n?sia 

sans 

'nsaas 

5 

anion 

T  2  — 

naan 

ui;on 
.*  -. 

hmo*on 
..  T  :  — 

6 

ana  • 

T  • 

nnib 

t  —  • 

mo 

.. 

-nna 
•  •  T 

7 

nsna 

t  :  • 

nsna 
—  :  • 

spa 

'nSDiE 

••  r  2  • 

8 

saan 

t:  -  : 

naan 

aan 

..  «  — O 

>M/on 

••r:  —  2 

9 

rssibn 

t  :  • 

nsan 
“  2  * 

san 

'nsan 
..  T  2  * 

10 

KSDS 

t  ;  — 

nnps 
””  . 

IDS 

■nsos 

..  •  mm  —• 

• 

11 

12 


13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 


B.  Cardinals  from  1 1 

Masculine. 

id?  in 

ids  ‘hf' 

|  ^  |  -os  anbn 

l  np'nbn  [  TT : 

(iD'a-ia)  ids  nsom 

X  —  .»  •  »/  _  —  •  r  ;  •  — 

•  .  •  •  • 

( iD"nti ) 

3  -  ••  •  L  io5  arvc 

( W}? ) 

io?  ronio 
(ran)  '  w  «* 


“DS  Naan 

—  — •  t  •  «  • 

•  •  •  • 


“ids  nson 


to  19. 

Feminine. 

•’■ids  asn 
(noTnn)  nos  snip 

\  ••  •  •  •  •  _  /  •  mm  r  • 

•  •  •  I  .  mmm 

(no'bn)  nos  nbn 

\  ••  •  •  •  •  /  ••  •  «■  T  • 

•  •  7  •  T  . 

(•’“©■’Dm)  ’“ids  sais 
(“pp“/0!j)  nps  wan 

(no  nab)  nos  nib 

(nppib)  nos  spib 


( ’“-r ) 

l  ) 


nos  van 


nos  sar 


88 


Par.  XI.  Numerals. 


/ 


G.  Ordinals  from  1  to  10. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

No. 

Abs. 

Emph. 

Abs. 

Emph. 

1 

-  'WE 

nating 

nwapp 

nnaapp  • 

T2  T  2  i- 

2 

■pin 

It:  • 

(hnbn)  *rrbn 

wan 

tt  :  • 

wan 

TT  2  • 

ssnan 

3 

nsttvbn 

t  t  •  : 

ssrrbn 

t  •  : 

■  ssirrrbn 

T  *  2 

4 

—  •  :  \  t  ' 

.)“W>'a“l 

T  '  T  T  •  2 

semi 

t  t  •  : 

ssrry'ap 

t  :  t  •  : 

5 

nwran 

t  t  • 

rmran 

t  t  • 

sm^art 

r  •  • 

6 

(tits) 

“sjtvna 

nssrcrra 

t  t  •  : 

ssn  Tftvji 

T  ••  •  2 

7 

TOO 
—  •  ; 

nw^ara 

t  t  •  : 

nay'aa 

T  T  *2 

mTrroxD 

T  ••  •  2 

(xnSpSP) 

8 

“ran 
"  •  • 

nwan 

tt  •  : 

tt  •  : 

ssnran 

t  :  •  : 

9 

•'S'ttjpi 
—  •  • 

nw’asn 

t  t  •  : 

nwacn 

t  t  •  : 

ara-an 

T  ••  •  ; 

10 

nwroy 

nscroy 

Kirn'cs 

/ 


A 

CHALDEE  CHRESTOMATHY; 

CONSISTING  OF  EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS,  ACCOMPANIED  BY 
NOTES  ON  THEM,  AND  ON  THE  BIBLICAL  CHALDEE, 

WITH  A  VOCABULARY. 

- •  •  • - 

There  are  ten  Targums*  or  Chaldee  translations  of  the  Scriptures  ex¬ 
tant.  No  one  of  them,  however,  includes  the  whole  of  the  Old  Testament, 
and  some  only  a  single  book  or  a  few  books.  Daniel,  Ezra,  and  Nehe- 
miah  have  never  been  translated  into  Chaldee.  At  least,  no  Targums  of 
these  books  are  now  extant. 

The  Targum  of  Onkelos  on  the  Pentateuch,  from  which  the  sen 
tences  in  Part  I.  are  extracted,  is  the  most  esteemed  of  all  the  Targums, 
both  for  its  faithfulness,  and  for  the  purity  of  the  language  employed. 
It  is  so  literal  that,  being  set  to  the  same  musical  notes  as  the  Hebrew 
text,  it  was  read  or  cantilated  in  the  synagogues  on  the  Sabbath,  in  con¬ 
nection  with  the  Hebrew  lesson  appointed  for  the  day.  See  Prideaux, 
Conn.  Yol.  IY.  p.  623.  Respecting  Onkelos  little  is  known.  Prideaux 
places  him  before  or  about  the  time  of  our  Saviour.  Horne  (Introd. 
Yol.  II.  p.  158,)  gives  the  same  as  the  generally  received  opinion. 
Jahn  (Introd.  p.  65  of  the  English  transl.)  supposes  him  to  have  written 
in  the  second  century.  The  same  is  Prof.  Winer’s  opinion.  Compare 
his  dissertation  De  Onkeloso,  etc.  §  1.  But  Gesenius  maintains  very 
satisfactorily  the  former  opinion,  Einl.  zu  Jesa.  §  11. 

The  Targum  next  in  value,  and  probably  also  in  time,  is  that  of 
Jonathan  the  son  of  Uzziel,  who  translated  the  books  of  Joshua,  Judges, 
I.  and  II.  Samuel,  I.  and  II.  Kings,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  and  the 
twelve  minor  prophets.  He  is  generally  thought  to  have  been  earlier 
than  Onkelos.  Prideaux  assigns  him  a  later  date,  for  the  very  probable 
reason,  that  he  would  not  have  commenced  his  translation  at  Joshua, 
unless  the  books  of  Moses  had  been  already  extant  in  Chaldee. 

There  are  two  other  Targums  of  the  Pentateuch,  both  of  a  late  date. 


*  The  word  is  Chaldee,  ,  (from  to  interpret ),  lit.  an  interpretation ,  a 

paraphrase.  Its  use  is  limited  however  to  the  Chaldee  versions  of  the  Scriptures. 


90 


CIIALDEE  CHEESTOMATHY. 


To  the  unknown  author  of  one  of  these  the  name  Pseudo- Jonathan  has 
been  applied,  because  it  was  long  supposed  to  have  been  written  by  J on- 
athan  Ben-Uzziel.  The  following  literal  translation  of  Num.  24  :  24,  as 
it  stands  in  this  Targum,*  shows  how  little  care  the  author  took  to  give 
the  simple  sense  of  the  Hebrew  text ;  while  the  mention  of  Constanti¬ 
nople  and  the  Lombards  makes  it  certain  that  this  Targum  was  not  the 
work  of  Jonathan  Ben-Uzziel.  It  was  probably  composed  in  the  ninth 
century.  “  And  wings  (ships  ?)  shall  come  with  instruments  of  war,  and 
shall  go  forth  with  great  multitudes  from  Lombardy  and  from  the  land 
of  Italy,  and  shall  be  joined  with  the  legions  which  shall  come  from 
Constantinople ;  and  they  shall  afflict  the  Assyrians  and  enslave  all  the 
sons  of  Eber ;  but  the  end  of  these,  as  well  as  of  those,  shall  be  to  fall 
by  the  hand  of  king  Messiah ;  and  they  shall  be  destroyed  forever.” 

The  Jerusalem  Targum,  so  called  from  the  dialect  in  which  it  was 
composed,  is  the  other  of  the  two  mentioned  above.  It  belongs  proba¬ 
bly  to  an  age  still  later  than  the  preceding.  It  is  very  imperfect,  omit¬ 
ting  many  verses,  and  so  loosely  rendering  the  rest,  that  it  hardly  deserves 
the  name  even  of  a  paraphrase.  It  abounds,  much  more  than  the  Tar¬ 
gum  of  the  Pseudo- J onathan,  with  digressions  and  fables,  which  may  be 
traditions  of  some  antiquity.  No  IV.  of  Part  II.  may  serve  as  a 
specimen.  Both  these  Targums  abound  in  Greek  and  other  foreign 
words.  In  the  above  extract,  the  word  translated  multitudes  is  ■pbsfcSN , 
plainly  nothing  but  a  Chaldee  plural  of  the  Greek  oy\os ,  and  the  word 
rendered  legions  ‘psvA  . 

These  four  are  the  longest  and  most  valuable  of  all  the  Targums. 
The  first  two  are  esteemed  most  highly  as  affording  critical  aid  to  the 
student  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  and  (especially  that  of  Onkelos)  in¬ 
troducing  us  to  a  pure  Chaldee,  nearly  resembling  the  style  of  Daniel 
and  Ezra.  Being  extremely  literal,  they  also  serve  to  vindicate  the  He¬ 
brew  text,  as  it  has  come  down  to  us,  against  those  who  charge  the  J ews 
with  having  corrupted  it  for  the  sake  of  evading  the  arguments  of 
Christians.  The  other  two  mentioned  above,  and  indeed  all  the  Tar¬ 
gums,  are  valuable  as  affording  many  expositions,  particularly  of  passages 
relating  to  the  Messiah,  which  agree  with  those  given  in  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment.  These  passages  many  of  the  modern  Jews  attempt  to  explain 
away,  so  as  to  get  rid  of  the  evidence  that  Jesus  was  the  Messiah. 
Several  examples  of  this  kind  are  given  by  Prideaux  (Conn.  Pt.  II.  B. 
VIII.  p.  639,  seq.)  One  instance  will  suffice  here. 

*  The  English  translation  of  this  passage,  which  is  literal,  is  as  follows :  “  And 
ships  shall  come  from  the  coast  of  Chittim,  and  shall  afflict  Assliur,  and  shall  afflict 
Eber,  and  he  also  shall  perish  forever.” 


REMARKS  ON  THE  TAR  GUMS. 


91 


“  Micali  5  :  2.  And  thou  Bethlehem  JEJphratah . out 

of  thee  shall  come  forth  unto  me  he  that  is  to  be  rider  in  Israel. 
This  is  the  true  translation  of  the  Hebrew  text,  and  this  all  Christians 
understand  of  the  Messiah ;  and  so  anciently  did  the  chief  priests  and 
scribes  of  the  people  of  the  Jews,  when  consulted  by  Herod.  But 
since  that  time,  in  opposition  to  the  gospel,  J ewish  writers  have  endeav¬ 
ored  to  give  this  text  another  meaning,  some  interpreting  it  of  Ilezekiah, 
some  of  Zerubbabel,  and  some  otherwise.  But  Jonathan,  who  per¬ 
chance  was  one  among  those  scribes  whom  Herod  consulted,  gives  the 
true  meaning  of  it  by  interpreting  it  of  the  Messiah,  in  the  same  man¬ 
ner  as  Christians  do  :  for  his  version  of  the  text  is  :  Out  of  thee  shall 
come  forth  before  me  the  Messiah ,  who  shall  exercise  sovereign  rule 
over  Israeli  (Id.  p.  642.) 

In  another  place  (p.  635)  Prideaux  remarks,  that  “  the  Targums  of 
Jonathan  and  Onkelos  are  in  so  great  esteem  among  the  Jews,  that  they 
hold  them  to  be  of  the  same  authority  with  the  original  .sacred  text.” 

The  other  Targums  are,  one  on  the  Ilagiographa ;  one  on  the  Megil- 
loth  or  five  books  of  Ecclesiastes,  Song  of  Solomon,  Lamentations,  Euth 
and  Esther;  three  on  Esther  alone;  and  one  on  the  two  books  of  Chron¬ 
icles.  The  first  has  been  ascribed  to  Eabbi  J oseph  the  blind,  who  lived 
in  the  third  century.  But  neither  the  dates  nor  authors  of  these 
Targums  are  known  with  certainty.  The  barbarous  style  in  which  they 
are  written,  is  considered  as  affording  sufficient  proof  that  they  are  com¬ 
paratively  modern ;  though  they  appear  to  have  been  compiled  from 
more  ancient  materials. 

For  a  full  account  of  the  Targums,  see  Prideaux,  Conn.  Vol.  IY. 
pp.  618 — 645.  Horne’s  Introd.  Yol.  II.  pp.  157 — 163.  Walton,  Pro¬ 
leg.  XII.  §§  4 — 20,  and  Winer,  Be  Onkeloso  ejusque  paraphrasi  Chal- 
daica  Dissertatio.  Compare  also  Stackhouse*s  Hist,  of  the  Bible,  pre¬ 
lim.  discourse  p.  90,  seq.  Calmet’s  Diet,  of  the  Bible,  articles  Jonathan, 
Onkelos,  and  Targum.  Father  Simon’s  Crit.  Hist.  B.  II.  Ch.  18,  Eich- 
horn’s  Einleitung  §§  213 — 245.  De  Wette,  Einl.  §§  57 — 62.  Wolffii 
Bibliotheca  Hebraea  Yol.  II.  pp.  1135 — 1189.  Allix,  Judgment  of  the 
ancient  Jewish  Church,  etc.  Ch.  YII.  Carpzov.  Critica  Sacra,  Part  II. 
Ch.  I.  Gesenius,  Comm,  fiber  Jesa.  Einl.  §  11,  and  Jahn’s  Introd.  to 
the  0.  T.  pp.  64 — 68  of  the  English  translation. 


PART  I. 


SELECT  SENTENCES  FOR  GRAMMATICAL  EXERCISE. 


NOTES. 

The  sentences  of  this  Part  are  all  taken  from  the  Targum  of  Onkelos 


on  the  Pentateuch.  They  stand  in  the  order  of  their  selection,  as  it  was 
thought  that  any  of  them  would  be  sufficiently  simple  for  grammatical 
analysis  by  those  already  familiar  with  Hebrew. 

The  reader  will  observe,  on  comparing  the  translation  with  the  He¬ 
brew  text,  that  the  same  train  of  accents  appears  in  both.  §  2.  9.  b.  This 
agreement  is  not  perfect  throughout.  Where  however  the  train  of  accents 
in  the  Targum  is  different  from  that  of  the  Hebrew  text,  the  accents  are 
still  similar.  For  the  sake  of  comparison  with  the  Hebrew,  the  accents 
are  inserted  in  these  sentences. 

1.  Gen.  1 :  1,  ,  plur.  of  D'lp  Deck  III.  a.  comp.  §  33.  a.  2  prep,  is 

prefixed  regularly  with  —  as  in  Hebrew.  Lit.  in  principiis. — §  4.  note. 
This  is  strictly  an  abbreviation,  and  must  not  be  read  yeya,  as  though  it 
were  a  distinct  name.  It  is  said  by  some  to  have  been  formed  by  prefixing 
th e  first  letter  of  rvjrr  to  the  last  of  *13hx,  thus  combining  the  Q,£ri  with 
the  Ksthib  and  saving  the  trouble  of  marginal  notes.  Others  affirm  that 
its  original  form,  which  indeed  appears  in  some  editions,  was  i.  e.  the 
initial  of  HiPP  repeated  three  times  to  express  Trinity ;  and  that  later 
Jews,  rejecting  the  doctrine  of  the  Trinity,  have  preferred  the  other  form, 
and  given  it  the  other  explanation.  It  is  pronounced  Adho-nay.  As  here, 
it  is  generally  employed  in  the  Targums  to  render  ,  when  the  latter 

stands  alone  (i.  e.  without  any  other  name  of  God)  and  signifies  the  true 
God. — rp ,  i.  q.  Heb.  riN  . — ,  emphatic  state  from  "pEtij ,  not  used  in  the 
abs.  form.  See  §  29.  3.  c.  The  term  emphatic  seems  to  imply  more  than 
it  really  means ;  and  the  reader  of  Chaldee  naturally  inquires  how  strong 


SELECT  SENTENCES. 


93 


:  rfcmns  ibw  h£r p "ty*  cppm  xn  abai  2 

rM  ■nn'rara  d’p  nsb  rvorr  -rnap-n-  3 

I  ;••  t*  :  ••  I  t>:  —•  -  *  - —  -  —  .  .  i_ 


jt: 


ATT 


: 


it  : 


ana?  was  *rp"i  bim  irpstbaa  jttopio  ‘Tan  rfi'b  hn3'  4 

jt  1— v- :  ;••  •  fr :  j"  :  :  —  ;  ;••:  •  :  ;••  : vv;  t:  <••  :  - 

■•T'l? 

ssabsu  ~  rib'  nr:m  ?jb  in  fx™  jwna-ba  •ns  5 

it:  —  —  Kt  :  •  :  at  •  :  v  Ijt  t  :  •  v t  :  —  t  j-  ^ 


that,  emphasis  can  be,  which  falls  upon  three-fourths  of  the  nouns  with 
which  he  meets.  Perhaps  the  term  definite  would  be  preferable,  if  the 
other  were  not  in  use.  A  noun  in  the  emphatic  state  expresses  usually  the 
same  idea  which  would  be  expressed  in  Hebrew  by  the  noun  with  the 
article. — 85^  ,  emph.  state.  See  in  the  vocabulary. 

2.  Gen.  9:9,  KDX1,  §7.  d.  1. — ,  do  establish,  1st  Part.  Pael  from 
D*ipj  §  22.  3. — from  dnd,  §  8.  3.  II.  Note  4. — The  first  two  accents 
in  this  sentence  differ  from  those  of  the  corresponding  Hebrew  words.  In 
stead  of  Rebhia  the  Hebrew  has  Zaqeph  Ghadhol,  and  instead  of  Merka, 
Darga.  The  two  former  are  both  large  disjunctives,  and  the  two  latter 
both  conjunctives,  and  of  course  might  easily  be  interchanged.  Perhaps 
however  the  accents  were  originally  transferred  to  the  Targum  from  a 
Hebrew  MS.  which  had  Rebhia  and  Merka.  The  remaining  accents  in 
this  sentence  are  the  same  as  in  the  Hebrew.  Similar  remarks  mio-ht  be 

CD 

repeated  on  the  other  sentences  ;  but  it  will  be  unnecessary. 


3.  Gen.  9 :  13,  ,  with  suff.  1.  p.  sing,  from  niDjD ,  Dec.  III.  a. — 

rV'5'l!?  j  1*  sing.  Pr.  Peal  from  ,  I  do  set,  §  50.  1.  The  Hebrew  likewise 
has  the  Praeter  ‘’dins . — *tre\  apoc.  for  2  f.  sing.  Fut.  from  fiiirt  .  See 
the  note  at  the  close  of  §  23. — mN ,  const,  state,  —  being  immutable. — , 
pronounced  mem-ri,  §  2.  3.  In  sense  it  is  precisely  equivalent  to  the  He¬ 
brew  nt23sa ,  myself  ox  me.  See  dE-'a  in  the  vocabulary. 

4.  Gen.  9  :  27,  3  sing.  m.  Fut.  Aphelfrom  fiiiQ,  §  6.  d.  1. — b  ,  sign 

of  the  Accusative  case,  §  60.  3. — And  shall  cause  his  glory  to  dwell ,  i.  e. 
and  he  [God]  shall  dwell. — tt*1 2 3 4 5—  pleonastic  suffix,  §  47.  2.  lit.  in  the  tents  of 
him,  (even)  of  Shem.  ’n,  sign  of  the  Gen.  case,  §  60.  1. — Servant  to  them; 
Hebrew  idb  “idS ;  Sept.  7 rat?  avrov  •  Vulg.  servus  ejus.  But  the  Syriac, 
Arabic,  and  Samaritan  versions  agree  with  our  Targumist  in  giving  a 
plural  rendering. 

5.  Gen.  13:15,  *'tn,  §  23.  1.  note. — -ft  jurist,  1  sing.  Fut.  from  ; 


94 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART.  I. 


rrt  FDiftn  ^  awtea  wm  6 

I  :  •  v  j t  :  — :  at:  —  jt  :  ••  :  J  i-  ••  : 

:  tc'iin  s»a til  kbtsa  ^  'nb  -.m  7 

trninbs  avri  rra  vnnio"^  rb^y  •ns  nwab  § 

: 

i-  t  :  • 

:  n*“ctab  ‘tv  WFoarn  7“-~x  jpr  sas  na«a  9 

•  it  :  •  :  i-t  I  j :  •—  :  I  -:  l_r  t  —.  - s— 


:s>  Tfe-iaa  ktsdi  mw  rvota 


j  t  :  — 


■ns  ^""-Kb 


<••  T 


10 


wsfiut  a'b*i  shcba  an  rrb^-  srrtfa  "ft^Tis  sab? 

1  j  :  —  :  •  !••:  t  :  —  j*  j-  •  :  r  •  :  <••••:  — 


at:  — 

:  swaay 

it  —  :  — 


:  ab  i-rajo  Tinn  Toaaj  nam  u 

Jit  It:  >•:  •  :  at 


ns** 1 11—  with  3  epenthetic,  i.  q.  ft—;  §  16.  note  1. — Tjjab,  to  thy  sons. 
See  na. 

6.  Gen.  15  :  6,  ,  Aphel  from  ,  (see  the  latter  word  in  the 

lexicon),  §  20.  3.  b  and  §  12.  II.  5. — ,  the  Lord ,  i.  q.  ‘'Hi*. ,  §  49. 

1.  c.  But  this  expression,  which  occurs  frequently  in  the  Targums  as  a 
translation  of  the  Hebrew  ftii"P ,  is  considered  by  some  critics  as  desig¬ 
nating  that  Word  which  was  afterwards  “  made  flesh  and  dwelt  among 
us.” — ftattift ,  He  (the  Lord)  reckoned  it ,  §  16.  2.  a.  — siatb ,  §  7.  d. 

7.  Gen.  27  : 28,  ‘n ,  sign  of  the  Gen.  case,  §  60.  1. 

8.  Gen.  42 :  38,  n^irn ,  Fut.  of  ftft3 ,  Tseri  compensating  for  Daghesh 
forte,  omitted  on  account  of  the  guttural. — ,  §  6.  b. 

9.  Gen.  45  :  4,  "'rH  ‘pftsan  ?  §  48.  1.  ,  pleonastic. 

10.  Gen.  49: 10,  ,  for  8*15^,  §  6.  d.  1. — ‘jabsilU  *122,  one  exercising 

sovereignty ,  a  ruler. — ‘'Sa,  irreg.  see  *ia. — ft^b^Tft ,  (=Hebrew  .... 
ft),  to  whom ,  §  8.  3.  II.  n.  3. — fcOft ,  the  pron.  used  for  the  substantive 
verb  in  the  present  tense.  See  §  47.  1. — Ithpe.  from  §  6.  b. 
— 3  irreg.  see  D5> .  One  bearing  ride  shall  not  depart  from  (be  want¬ 
ing  to)  the  house  of  Judah,  nor  a  scribe  from  the  posterity  of  his  sons  for¬ 
ever  ;  until  Messiah  shall  come,  whose  is  the  kingdom  ;  and  to  him  shall  the 
people  hearken ,  or,  him  shall  they  obey. 

11.  Ex.  33: 14,  my  glory ,  doubtless  equivalent  to  the  Hebrew 

"*3Q  ,  my  presence ,  i.  e.  a  mere  periphrasis  for  /,  used  of  course  only  in  rela¬ 
tion  to  God.  Comp.  nos.  4  and  13. — Tjftft,  §  22.  1. — ft’’?!*,  Aph.  Fut.  1st 
pers.  sing,  from  ,  I  will  provide  a  resting  place,  Tjb  ,for  thee. 


t 


SELECT  SENTENCES. 


95 


r'bro  Tinn  "BPpiJ  rvob*i  ttntan  ■’’yp  joairrai'-rp  ]2 

vT  ~:  I  I  j  :  vj's  —  ;••:  )  :  •  j*  •  jt - 


♦  ■  *i“i 

it: 


rapp  ■  Tinn  ttmi  nbsb  nbb  ■'ins'i  Tib'S's  hFi:pi a  'hesi  iS 

/-tIt;  |  :  I  v  — :  at  v;v  |  ^,  :  ;•••••:  v:  |  ....  :  •  :  ••  :  — : 

:D"b 

it  : 

s'sbx  m'ia“riaa_Tnp"i“,’*,«o  ^  an  pas*  pnipajaasi  u 

:  banian 


I”  T 


:  bs-ns’  apiara  tra  ab>"'  psps?  satripa  15 
.  :  aa-Pb  pnis  nbs*  -  b  -rv-xb  m 
:  ••  xrnbss  ^  bsrr-  yam  17 

it  ;t :  tvtt  v:  ;t:  A" T  :  *  v-  : 

:  3ioi3_b5b3  PiaB3-bss>i  Tpb-bib  pnbs*  ^  tv  arnm  i8 
:  d^pjeop  ssypsss  vhypsp  ■psp — ss  soPtp  waripm  19 

•  it  :  •  :  > t  :  —  :  I  v.  ••  )  j*t—  at  •  -  !  x.  : 


12.  Lev.  26  :  2,  ‘'b*'* ,  §  8.  3.  II.  note  3. — 'p^n'n;  1st  Part.  Pe.  from  ^ITn . — 
•j^n’n  linn ,  treat  the  house  of  my  sanctuary  with  habitual  reverence. 
Such  appears  to  be  the  force  of  this  combination.  See  §  51.  1. 

13.  Lev.  26  :  12,  lintt,  1st  pers.  sing.  fut.  Pe.  from  instead  of  the 
usual  form  K'inyt,  §  23.  1.  b.  note.  For  the  plural  suff.  of  “pa  and  te'if?  see 
§  8.  3.  II.  note  4. 

14.  Num.  10  :  36,  ■’H'hlBa,  a  plural,  with  suffix  of  the  third  person  sing., 
formed  from  the  inf  Pe.  of  ,  §  35.  note  2.  In  its  restings ,  i.  e.  when¬ 
ever  it  rested. — The  frequent  repetition  of  Maqqeph  in  this  sentence  is  not 
occasioned  by  any  special  intimacy  of  connection  between  the  words  thus 
joined.  Its  cause  exists  in  the  train  of  accents,  which  is  the  same  as  in 
the  Hebrew.  Three  words  are  introduced  into  the  Targum  which  do  not 
appear  in  the  original — u  Dwell  in  thy  glory,  in  the  midst  of  ” — but  for  these 
there  is  no  accent.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  they  are  joined  by  Maqqeph 
to  the  next  word.  The  four  words  are,  in  cantillation,  theoretically  one. 

15.  Num.  24  :  5,  ,  thy  valley ,  if  we  derive  it  from  *1^3? .  But 

perhaps  should  be  regarded  as  a  verbal  from  fTiTSS,  and  then  we  may 
translate  it  dwelling ,  habitation. 

16.  Deut.  5  :  7. 

17.  Deut.  6  :  4. 

18.  Deut.  6  :  5. 

19.  Deut.  10  : 19. 


96 


CHEESTOMATHY.  PAliT  I. 


rraito  nnpnn  Frnbmbi  nbsn  ‘'STiaip5!  bmn  ‘niibtf  20 

i-  :  .  —  •  j":  —  :  •:  at  :  •  •  jtI:  v- :  •  I  m  v:  sr:  - 

:  trpFl 

:  B-ojn  anba-iinbiis  snpaffi  Nn^icsns  Tisrcm  ss"Bn-nbm  21 

I  it  :  — :  ;tt  v:  |t:  t*:  v-  :  t  a-*:  :  •  Utt  :  •  n  b  —  t 

:  linsios  wna  rao  »*n  ferca  wsn  sibs  22 
ppBpttvi  bt?C2  ks/2irn  trnsssj'n  bscPrvNi-ibiw  isribN  rvb  2s 

^••1;  ;  It-:-  :  t  —  :  •  <••;  •  ;  •  /v*T  •  *  •  TT  **  vtt  v: 

:  h/2TTQ 


20.  Deut.  10 :  20,  bn'in,  §  15.  3. — Kijsn,  Q,ametsfor  Pattahh  on  account 

of  a  pause-accent.  ,1.4,1.  fS 

21.  Deut.  32  : 18,  r^n^,  plur.  const,  from  ttbn.'n  .  Lit.  the  Urmns  of  the 
Mighty  One  who  created  thee,  thou  hast  forgotten ;  i.  e.  the  terrible  and 
mighty  One ,  §  61.  1.  note  1. — §  26.  2.  a. — ,  §  23.  note  1. — 
Knpnta,  §  12.  I.  note  2. — ■’jfta? ,  §  16.  2.  a. — strong ,  mighty ,  occurs 

t 

likewise  in  vs.  30,  31,  as  a  rendering  of  the  Heb.  “1*122. 

22.  Deut.  32  :  29,  yiirsio. ,  plural  from  fpb  with  suff.  3.  pi.  m.  defectively 
written,  §  6.  c.  (4.) 

23.  Deut.  33  :  26,  ,  an  instance  in  which  the  emphatic  state ,  (as  is 

sometimes  the  case  with  the  Hebrew  article),  corresponds  to  our  indefinite 
article,  a  or  an. — PPPWStth  ( scriptio  plena),  §  8.  3,  I.  note  1.  Lit.  who,  his 
glory,  i.  e.  whose  glory,  §  48,  1. 


PART  II. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


I.  History  of  the  Fall.  Gen.  3. — Onkelos. 


nasi  rrrbx  "  “as  ^  sna  nin  baa  d'“e>  run  xnm  i 

—  •  v:  t  ;  — :  •  t  t  —  •  •  t  t  ~j  t  ;  •  ; 

:  sria  -.b-x  baa  iibd'n  xb  ^  ~rx-*-x  xotiipd  xdnxb 
■'Tsai  o)  :  biaa  xrrrrfrx  xnnb  xrrx  maxi  a 
xbi  naa  tibm  xb  ^  nas  sr:a-ra-aaa  ■n  x:b'x 


naa  xb  xnr,xb  x'in  nasi  :  iiman  sabn  tra  iianpn  4 

t  :  t  t  :  •  :  t  :  •  - I  :  vt  :  •  ••  I  :  *—  : 

inpBP'i  naa  abaain  xai'i  ■nx  ■'■anp  aa  *“x  iiinian  5 

It  :  —  :  •  :  ••  •  I  :  :  t  :  ••  t  :  t»t:  :  ••  J  : 


1.  I  a  D"'ns,  comparative,  §  64.  1.  a.  more  canning  than. — Vs,  every. — 

^  .  So  the  London  Polyglott,  which  has  been  followed  in  the  text  of  the 
Chrestomathy.  Also  Buxtorf  Bibl.  Heb.  Basil.  1665.  The  Paris  and  Ant¬ 
werp  Polyglotts  read  .  The  title  page  of  Munster’s  Bibl.  Heb.  Basil. 
1546  exhibits  the  form  .  Compare  the  note  on  Part  I.  No.  I. — d^n'bx  ■ 
Here  likewise  the  Polyglotts  differ,  Buxtorf  and  the  London  edition  giving 
constantly  the  Hebrew  form,  and  the  other  two  mentioned  above,  . — 

fibrin,  §  21.  a. 

2.  npax.,  §  15.  note  2. — bJ!5*15 ,  Fut.  expressing  the  sense  of  the  Eng: 
Potential  mood,  we  may  eat. 

3.  -(iisnpjn ,  Future  Pael  instead  of  ■ponjsn,  §  2.  7.  b.  Buxtorf  has  ‘pnngnj; 
the  Antwerp  and  Paris  Polyglotts,  *pa*ipn  in  Peal. 

4.  ‘prrtatn  naa,  an  Inf.  with  a  finite  verb  to  denote  certainty,  as  in  He¬ 
brew. 


5.  “'by,  Part.  Peil  from  xbs,  §  6.  d.  (1),  it  is  manifest  before  the  Lord. — 
intnan-n .  Use  of  I  instead  of  another  conjunction,  same  as  in  He¬ 
brew.  “(nnaryi,  Ithpaal  Fut.  3d  plur.  fern. — “jinn,  Fut.  Peal  2d  plur.  masc. 
from  SJfi.- — ‘papS'i,  see  a*]  in  Lex. — .  1st  Part.  Peal  from  C5H  §  32. 

7 


9S 


CIIEESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


anna  intm  :  t^b  ntrra  naan  f nrvi  rfew  6 

arb-s  j-nrfi  r:"'b  abmca  pai  bspab  a;bha  its  Pa 

t  t  •  - ;  I  •  :  —  :  t  ••  —  •• :  t  t  •  t  •• 

pih?  rptorra  rarri  rtoio  toPtfa  totp  “p  absncab 

t  •  t  -:  — :  I  —  - :  •  at  :  —  :  .  —  ••:  ••  t  t  —  ;  •  ; 

“,"s  rabtrc>  *-a  top  rirrpn  ”p  annsnai  :  bsiv 

!  •  I  •  t  •  :  —  ••  -:  —  •  1  ••  :  —  ••  ••  t  t  —  :  • :  t 

bpto  vmft  :  TnT  rinb  iitcn  plan  "Biii  rinb  totarp 
fftK  TBBai  sai’  raab  arosa  ,nb“na  trrtba  topnara 
:  araa  "Ha  to  D’Wba  ■*  nip  pa  n-nnai 

t:  •  I-  •  :  •  v;  t  :  ..  .  .  . 


t  * : 


t  >t: 


npaa  traprbp'n"  -isai  :  na  :a  prb  lasi  tyiab  anba  10 
pn  fa  nasi  :  nptoai  sis  "abwpa  rpbrni  anto  n 
bpnabnsb'rbto  simps  p  aiHapto  ns  "abtns  pa  tib 
"b  nann  am  pss  popp  anna  ana  nasi  :  nbas  naa  12 
n nap  sn*na  annab  amba  ^  nasi  :  n'basi  asHa-fa  13 
amba  ^  nasi  :  n^basi  p-yaa  apn  snns  nnasi  u 

•  v;  t  :  —  ;  •  T  ;  -  t  :  •  t  :  •  v  v 


note  2,  knowing  [ how  to  distinguish ]  between,  etc. — b  ....  “pS  For  this  use 
of  b  after  “pa  comp.  Stuart’s  Hebrew  Chrestomathy,  p.  83.  Note  on  Gen. 
1  :  6. 

6.  ntn. ,  3d  sing.  fem.  Praet.  Peal  from  XJH. . — siox  (a  medicine)  appears  to 

refer  to  the  effect  which  Eve  expected  the  eating  of  the  fruit  to  have,  in 
opening  her  eyes  to  a  clearer  vision.  But  all  the  other  ancient  versions 
agree  with  the  English  translation  in  rendering  d'E^b  lYjXti ,  pleasant  to 
the  eyes . — 3 SHE ,  2d  Part.  Pael.  fTd  ttbdfi&xb  5 SHE  expresses  the  idea  con¬ 
veyed,  according  to  the  other  translators,  in  the  previous  clause ;  desirable 
to  behold,  is  pleonastic.— nrp&3 ,  §  12.  II.  1.— STSpStti,  see  dX  in  the 

vocab. — §  7.  d.  1. 

7.  KHttfinx  ,  3d  pers.  plur.  fem.  Praet.  Ithpaal,  from  nno  . — “(ifT'nn ,  §  42. 
1.  a.  note. — ?  §  12.  I.  1.  b. — lp?XFi ,  see  XjHXSn  in  the  vocab. — ■'pt'if,  a 
Hebrew  form.  Bat  Buxtorf  points  it  ‘ppt .  See  his  lexicon. 

8.  collective.  For  the  pointing  see  §  31.  b.  note  1. 

10.  P^bifH ,  §  13.  2.  For  the  insertion  of  *'  quiescent  in  the  last  sylla¬ 
ble  of  this  word,  and  of  n^Eisi,  see  §  12.  I.  1.  a. 

11.  §  12.  I.  1.  b.  But  Buxtorf  points  it  here  •— bd^db ,  §  21.  a. 

Inf.  from  bdu* . 

14.  d^b,  2d.  Part,  from  tttb . — b'l'pn ,  Fut.  from  bTK ,  §  21.  a. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


99 


nun  bbi$i  NTJsrbM  m  tpb  m  rn:r‘ta«  apr6 

t  t  —  ••  •  t  •  :  t  •  :  —  •  t  :  :  — :  ••  t  ;  •  ; 

'nias  naaan  :  mn  rai'-ba  bna-n  spsjp  b'rn  tira-b"  X5 

tib  tottp  snn  spin  ran  an  ran  srns  ran  ara 

It  •  t  :  tt  ;  i  I  ••  It  :  I  :  t  :  •  )  ••  It  •• 

srnsb  :  ssiob  Prb — itaa-^rm  nsn  rtnpbawrb  ma?r“a  m 

T*  *  •  y  •  ••  ••  — ■  ••  •  •  —  •  I  •  •  •  •  ••  •  •  —  —  •  — •  — 

•  •  I  •  I  •  •  •  |  •  •  •  •  • 

raa  r"bn  waa  a,j,wi  rr-ipa  -rex  ns-i&s  -as 

I  .  ;  I  •  ;  *•  —  :  •  • :  -  •  :  •  : - :  —  ••  :  —  t  t  ;  —  - : 

■ras  nisbn  :  nra-abur  TpnansP  ‘“n  spbya-nnbn  n 
amps  w  sab'S'To  rb:s‘  pans  nahab  nbap  -s 

reba'n  baaa  abwa  sp~s  strb  rrsa  bna'p  sb  aarab 

t  •  :  t  t  :  !r  •  ;  t  :  —  t  ••  •  ••  t  —  : 

«aDS>"rr  bnawn  rb  naan  ■ptisn  ra^ai  :  npn  'ar  ba  iS 
sinsb  am  tj  sarib  bna'n  t;es“  sasva  :  sbpm  i9 
d-s  KPpa  :  annn  sissbn  ns  s-™--s  spwans  nsaa  20 
aaaa  :  sais*aa  baa  sax  p‘“  sti  'as  ann  “tins  dps  21 

— tt  v:  ••  :  t  :  t  •  t  t  —  ••  :  • 

■linaiaa-tiaa-by  ap'a-pwab  pppnsbn  taasb  ntibs  " 

—  't  •  1  •  :  :  t  t  :  •  v:  t  : 

b 

•sabsa  'Trr  ran  oas  sn  trrrbs  "  aasi  :  aaaaaabsa  22 
as  a&a  ppt  aari'-saba  wan ,  a*a-  aa  aaab  “aa 

I  —  — •  :  ••  :  •  t  :  •  |—  :  '  •  t  —  •  ;  ••  • 


15.  1st  Part.  Peal,  from  1“i3ft  §  12.  I.  1.  c.  He  will  remember 
against  thee  what  thou  hast  done  to  him. — i.  q.  paft£  'ft  from  the 
beginning — anciently. 

16.  il&taO£<,  Inf.  Aphel.  See  the  paradigm. — pft^ft,  Fat.  2d  sing.  fem. 

from  . — 'pa  ,  prep.  3  with  suff.  2d  sing.  fem.  See  the  table. 

17.  ftsbpfl,  Fut.  2d  sing.  masc.  from  bsx  with  fem.  suff.  3d  sing,  and  3 
epenthetic. 

19.  ansp  ^defectively  written.  See  Klpt. — ,  from  which. 

21.  pttSsmb  ,  etc.  garments  of  honor  for  the  skin  of  their  flesh. 

22.  ,  Inf.  Peal  from  2p  ,  §  20.  4. — ft '’323 ,  of  himself  j  independently. 
“  Adam  has  become  the  only  [being']  in  the  world  [able]  of  himself  to  distin¬ 
guish  good  and  evil .”  Onkelos  seems  to  have  considered  the  Hebrew 
*155333  singular,  as  indeed  it  is  capable  of  being ;  and  this  probably  led  him 
to  render  ftftas,  (as  one,)  by  “’“pip  only.  The  other  Targumists  agree 
with,  or  perhaps  rather  follow ,  Onkelos.  Nearly  all  the  ancient  versions, 


LOO 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


m::'2  trrfta  fiTferai  :  thsb  m  b^hi  *wi  ib^a  23 
D-ia-rr  ?nni  :  rand '  ■'lantn  KhaPK-ir  nbsab  w  24  ‘ 
asm  dir  .m  rarararn-  ■ins-  arosb  pa-pba  raexi 

:  sera  irtism*'  ntaab  iOBfiKM 


II.  The  same.  Gen.  3. — Pseudo-Jonathan. 


araba  wi  k-q  mtt  baa  uirab  aa>n  nra  ueim  1 
baa  rtora  si  crabs  "  rasi  strajJipn  srnsb  nasi 
■p-s  'tb  -x-ia  shmb  snns  masi  :  Ktvwa  pra 
rarsa  “2“  s*bs  ‘Tsa* 1 2 3 4 5 * *!  :  braab  iiisi  ib  nhs  srraras 

•  :  :  t  t  •  .....  —  ••  :  :  J—  •  t  •  • 

sab*-  dcnpn  sbi  sraa  pbrra  sb  "  -as  snaaa 
fp-q  bs  irab-  anra  nas  snrr  sra  ra  :  nwan  4 
na  as  ssawba  a“sr  praan  naa  sb  snnsb  nasi 

r  ••  t  tt  t  —  :  I  :  —  :  t  t  :  •  ; 


2 

3 


—  r  : 


however,  give  the  sense  expressed  in  the  English  translation: — -S*11]  Fut. 
of  "03  . 

23.  .  .  .  .  ‘n ,  whence ,  §  48.  1. 

24.  Tfon,  Praeter  Pael,  merely  a  full  orthography  for  Tjon  . — fcCBnriE; 
Part.  Ithpe.  fem.  sing,  agreeing  with  XBPH  . — “too ,  Inf.  from  *303 . 

1.  005^  ,  for  the  pointing  see  below,  No.  III.  (7)  and  (9).  It  will  be  un¬ 
necessary  to  notice  such  cases  in  future. — ’n  ,  is  it  true  that ,  etc.  ? 

n  interrogative  with  Daghesh  forte  euphonic.  So  in  Hebrew  sometimes. 
Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  152.  a. 

2.  rnox  ,  §  15.  note  2.  The  Q,amets  is  probably  the  result  of  a  pause 

in  pronunciation,  though  no  accents  have  been  appended  to  this  Tatgum. 
‘ib  ,  contraction  for  5tib  .  * . 

3.  X3bs<,  §  2.  6.  c. — see  “|3  in  vocab. — Hhireq  is  short,  the 
i  being  a  mere  mater  lectionis ,  §  2.  1.  - 

4.  “ies*  j  etc.,  the  serpent  spake ,  calumniating  his  Maker ,  and  said. 

— atrflaais*  *13 ,  (comp,  the  Heb.  *j33\3  *J3  •p.p. ,  a  fruitful  hill,  etc.)  the 

thing  made ,  the  result  of  labor.  Every  workman  hates  the  work  of  his  own 

hands. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


101 


ppsie  ■ptow  tfDrn  D*n«  Dip  hbs  d*to*  :  5 

:  urab  aa  ra  ynuab  raann  reran  rasbaa  riinm 

.  :  —  I  ••  — :  •  :  I  •  :  — :  I  •  :  :  —  »  .*  t  :  — :  I  v  : 

Qsnj*  nym  nb'nni  snie  nsba  bsao  tv  snms  warn.  6 


ssnai  vry-  sninub  sin  ids  tumsi  ba'ab  s:b-s  aa 

—  :  I  •:  — :  t  :•  t  —  ••:  tt  — 

as  nanv  nbssi  n'a'sa  na'aui  >va  sbama'sb  sub's 


—  t 


ams  w'l  linmm  'U'y  Transit :  bssi  nay  nbyab 


I  t 


rra  isvansn  snsia  -blab  ra  ibanynsn  Oil's  vsbany 

•  •  •••  •*  T  *  •  I  •  ••  —  •••  I  •  I  T  •  *  •“ 

•  ••  I  •  ♦  I  •  •  •  •  /  I  •  ■  • 

mayi  run  'sntsa  rinb  na'tupi 1  'iintitina  ran  rimi 

b"aa  trnbs  "n  snann  bp  rr  wao*i  :  yyaa^%  finb  8 
mp  -,a  n'innusi  ans  naa'si  sav  nuab  snaiu'sa 

Dm'bs  ■’■>  snpn  :  snw;  •eb-s  tvfrsaa?  a-n'bs  •«  9 
saian  ranp  -ba  'naan  sab"  bb  sbn  ~b  nasi  ansb 
sbn  ranp  ia  snaa'sb  naba  nao  res  ipm  sninua  > 

:  nnn'psn  snips  iiu's  isi  Van  s:s  --a  naaa  musn  nns 
'sbiany  ams  rvbmi  smasa  rvyaio  inara  bp  rv  nasi  10 
:  ssio'a  ia  rrnaa'si  ana  mays  annpsn  sniaai 
sib's  'vs  ia  sabr  ns  “sb'any  ams  nb  'in  ia  nasi  u 
snns  ars  nasi  :  nbas  naa  brab  sbn  rnn'psn  12 
nasi  :  ivbbsi  sub's  'ts  ia  'b  nan'  sti  "as  ran"  13 


t 


— *  & - ^ 

5.  *p3P3P  “pDiOB ,  superior  angels. — 'paaiTi ,  xvho  know.  See  above 

No.  I.  (5). — S'ni’a ,  to  discern ,  discriminate.  For  the  form,  see  §  20.  4. 
Comp.  §  2.  7.  a.  1 

6.  ,  Praet.  Pe.  3.  s.  f.  §  23.  Note  1.  on  Par. — rib^rn ,  §  13.  2. 

7.  tthsb ,  garments  of  the  color  of  the  “isa  ,  i.  e.  purple. — *j^53n ,  for 
5  see  §  35,  and  below  on  v.  15. — yin n pH 3  see  5<rin3  . 

8.  Ithpe.  from  7.  a-.  (2). — H^rPisx ,  ^  6.  a.  note. 

9.  P2& ,  ^  12.  I.  1.  c.  and  the  parallel  passage  in  the  Jer.  Targum. 

10^  P''S*73'i3 ,  §  12.  I.  1.  a.  and  2. — n'nas'x,  Aph.  1.  s.  Praet.  from  PS?., 
§  12.  I.  2.—  ya  .  for  shame,  i.  e.  because  I  was  ashamed. 

12.  ,  §  4.  b. 


102 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  n. 


inn  snns  r~"s*  may  si  na  snnsb  ori'bs 

^  t  :  •  t  :  •  —  r  -  r  :  —  t  t  —  t  :  •  :  •  v:  '  t  s 

"  'rr'tci  :  rvtasti  iwvizra  “rsDsi  ima^ra  mira  14 

T*  t  *  —  •  •  T  ••  •••  •  •  —  •  —  •  ••••  •  •  MB  •  —  A  * 

•  ••  I  I  •••••  •••  • 

mb  si  may  rrs  s mb  iasi  smb  rirrmbn  nm'bs 


t  :  —  t 


t  : 


—  t  : 


b“aa  snn  ira  by  s~a  rvrn  bra'  stssi  baa  ns 

I—  —  tt  —  t  •  t  •  :  t  •  :  — 

sms*.  I'Siij  aab  sin  nbaa  snn  spioffi  mapir  tibrm *  1 
'TO's  siaaiJi  :  Tpn  rm  ba  bia'n  tossi  tiasa  sniai  15 
T“  sn'a  r-y-7  na*  i:a  n"yir  va  srns  n-' 
rnaa  rrrn  sn'm'si  snma  ■ptn  snnsi  s“:a  rim  ns 
"nn  smisi  smsa  rpati  iai  lum  by  in'  mii® 
“bi  sics  sm  'inb  tra  ■jin'apya  yinm  n^aan  'nana 
'ai'a  sap'ya  snnsa  iayab  nns  ri-nyi  %s  twr  sb 
ansa  msmo  acs  sacs  nas  snn:sb  :  srsnsa  saba  i6 
tjnna  'Pin  spbya  rnbfl  *aa  pibn  nysa  ip'rryi  ■pbirs 


13.  “'pyiix  ,  probably  an  incorrect  reading  for  “'pads  . — ,  seduced 
m.e,  Aphel  from  ns  £3  with  suffix.  §  26.  2.  a. 

14.  ,,n‘'ix  ,  Aph.  from  xrx  .  For  the  pointing  see  §  4.  a.  and  §  2.  5.  b. 
— xtin  ,  §  53.  1. — X'in  ,  adverbially,  once. — xni^’n  XO^x  deadly 
poison ,  §  61.  1. 

15.  5  1  sing.  Fut.  Pa.  from  .  The  form  is  perfectly  anomalous. 

Compare  instead  of  ,  plur.  const,  from  . — *p‘nt5!J , 

1  Part,  from  “il33  .  See  above  No.  II.  (7). — ’p^HE  3  1  Part.  plur.  from  xn?3  . 
This  also  appears  to  be  a  masculine  form  like  ‘pftE  ,  §  35.  Schaatj  (Opus 
Aramaeum  p.  308,)  points  it  “ptra  .  pfip  [i.  q.  ;  so  Schaaf  ibid.J  is 
understood,  making  it  future,  §  53.  1.  “  Operam  dabunt  u.t  percutiant.” 

They  shall  make  efforts  and  shall  bruise  thy  head ,  i.  e.  they  shall  do  it  in¬ 
tently,  and  with  all  their  power  : — or,  they  shall  be  established ,  etc.  taking 
the  act.  Part,  in  an  intransitive  sense.  Comp.  ,p)l3ns  Xlttfi  below,  and 
above  No.  II.  (15). — ‘ppa’.S  ,  §  32.  note  2. — ,  thou  shalt  be  es¬ 
tablished,  or,  perhaps,  thou  shalt  be  intent  upon  injuring  them. — m3  21  should 
probably  be  pointed  rP333  .  See  No.  III.  v.  15. — ■‘1322  >  this  use  of  Hha- 
teph  Pattahh  after  Seghol,  which  is  not  unfrequent  in  this  Targum.  is 
probably  the  result  of  mere  negligence  in  transcription. — X2pp2  i.  q.  XSp?  . 

■  16.  TpE^O,  for  ;  and  7j‘p*fP3>  ,  for  *  For  the  pointing  of 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


103 


^tab  spa  trtti  rr  awm  n 

_.  _  — •  —  _.  •  ••-••••  ••  •  •  1  •  •  T  ••  • 

t  II#  •••  •  •  •  I  •  •  • 

nriTpsn  x:b-x  *tb  ta  nbaxi  annex  nanab  nbap 
nb  rxnn  xbn  r:a  xpnx  xa-b  naa  barn  xb  nanab 

It  —  *  —  t:  I*:  t:—  t  •  •••  ••  t  —  ••  : 

naan  rnaxt  rntat  :  t*o  Tar  bs  nsbrn  bars  train  is 
“taxi  D"X  an  :ra  -bx  bsn  xaicy  m  btpmt  rtbna  “ami 

-t:  tt  •  t  tt  :  t  2  •  -  it*: 

btaan  xnans  aann;  xbn  aanp  ta  ran-a  maa 
bisai  't  ntrba  abr  wa  Dip-:  x~a  -axn  xaoa 

•  •  •  •  r  II  •  t# 

aa  pa  nanp  aa  tthBxrr  pat  xnnxn  xnra  ta  pita 
tj>  xPta’  biam  tpr  pa  ntrba  :  xtjd  aa  rat  xarx  ig 

—  t  :  ••  it*:  ‘  I—  :  t  •  :  ••  :  J  ••  tt  •• 


xngybt  n:x  xnsp  Dtnx  nxnsnx  nran  ’x-:;a  rnnmn 

T*  ^  •  •  •  mm  V  •  —  — •  —  »  •  •  •  T  •  *  TT*  *  “•  ••  * 

•  •••  •-  ••  I#  ■  •  •  •• 

XDaiBtni  xrn  tntab  atprab  tpp  tax  x-in  tan  ‘atnn 
nttfi  onx  xnpt  :  xan  xrn  aim  mnasn  na  ba  b?  20 
naan  :  xaa  aa  ban  xa*x  r-rt  xt:  anx  ntn  nmmx  21 

—  T  2  T*  ••  2  T  2  t  •  —  -J  •  t  "*  *•  2  •  • 

xan  naa  ta  np-n  patab  nmroxbt  anxb  atrbx  *“ 
tnbmaxn  pnnsta  sbn 1  prrnaa 1  naa  bp  naa  nbtixn 
aanp  raaaa  hn  x-axbab '  a‘nbx  *’■>  taxi  I'ttra-nbxt' 


'  W-itiTlV 


t  »t: 


YJGa 


T  —  T  2  —  2 


22 


aaaa  nri1  xtxn  xaam  xpnxa  ■'■'Ytr  ntn  onx  xn 


t  :  — 


aa  ra  xa-sab  psnn  naa  atpnab  rmtpt  xaina 
tb“X3  amt  hn  xtn  rax  n-p.Tps  xntsa  na;  tbx  a*ab 

J  —  •  2  2  —  •  ••  2  »•  :  TT  2  •  —2  •  •  2 


these  and  similar  forms,  see  §  7.  a.  (2). — ‘Tpiria,  contracted  from  Tp^'ina  , 
and  so  Buxtorf  points  it,  ,  §  12.  I.  1.  c. — fa*i  ,  an  obscure 

passage.  Lit.  he  shall  rule  over  thee ,  to  do  justice  and  to  commit  sin ,  i.  e. 
as  I  understand  the  Targumist,  whether  he  docs  right  or  wrong. 

17.  n^5J3,  §  12.  II.  1. 

19.  FipE  ,  for  fri’O  ,  §  6.  a.  note. 

21.  nbtiixbt,  which  he  (the  serpent)  put  off,  from  himself. 

22.  ■''iw  ,  for  ''XT*!']  —*1^3  si^«,  if  he  had  kept. — ,  1  s.  Pr.  Pe. 
with  suff.  3  m.  s.  §  16.  2.  a. — ,  §  12.  I.  2. — for  behold. — ■Hfn  , 
Praeter  in  a  future  sense,  or  rather  both  this  and  the  participle  are  to 


104 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


niTro  afiTps^i  tm  ^  by  ww  n&A  tj  wn 
~-t  tsib-s"1  xb  Dip  :-™  xr:j  -,a  n-ntir,  ‘nibs 
-h  ■'in  “‘2d  xti  b‘Dx  rx  xm  x-5”  -Ax  tb  ra  -dp 

—  ••  •  •  t  1  •  t  :  t  —  I—  |  : 

brxi  Yin  xns-ra  D-“bx  stcipi  s  -pzbyb  ~a>  d-ia  23 

*  •  /  •  •  1  •  ••  I  •  •  r  • 

:  ysfih  •nanxi  xrraix  n-  nbsab  smefa  -woa  sm 

It—  •  t::—  -  —  :  •  :  t  •  ;  •  t  : 

yjtn  “a  ■paipb  ”j  R-nara  ip-  -idiot.  dix  rr  *wi  24 
xr:-r.  rpnx  xiribx  x--.  xab?  xm  xb  rj>  Dip  xm*ra 
Tibs  hi  b y  x:b-x  hTS  fa  ppistip  -pbA-i  xmmb  rwi 

T  :  •  —  TT  .  ....  |  .  ]  ;  ••  J  T  >—  •  —  J  |  V  ••  t 


rx  x-ims  iiaapi  -pin 


rjjiiN 


'z  xrrnx  -ib-xa  pimm 

•  t:  —  I  — :  .  I  : 


pmo  f'ina  nb-x  xr:a  xz — b  xb-nai  x-ra-b  arna 
■jins  -(iab  xnaxi  ■paw  ia-i  f-psipn  woz  -ppnx 
xrv'iix  x-n  xfqe  xn-iix  •sAxz  rbr-m  sniai  x'S'tihb 

r :  —  •  r  :  —  t  :  —  !  — :  :  I  :  :t:  t  —  •  — : 

xrrfeb  '-1  lam  xn:pnxi  xn  ib-x  -ts  -,a  nnbsb 
:  -pixi  xabyb  *>m  nrrx  -bmirz  bma^i  crp  m*i 


t  :  — : 


be  taken  as  we  use  the  Present  tense  in  English,  expressing  a  general 
truth  :• — or,  still  differently,  both  may  be  regarded  as  Subjunctives,  (I  use 
the  term  in  the  general  sense  which  it  has  in  Latin  grammar,)  if  he  should 
cat.  etc.,  he  would  live ,  etc. 

23.  btx  and  (§  12.  II.  1.)  are  both  Praeters. 

24.  ,  2d  Part,  from  bma ,  which  is  like.  Tseri  is  inserted,  like 
Qamets  in  *iESO ,  etc.  on  account  of  the  prefix  with  Sheva,  §  7.  d.  note. — 
"1*13*^  ,  i.  q.  “to!*!  §  60.  1.  b. — xndx ,  an  unusual  pointing  of  xn&:x  or  xndx  , 
(§  2.  7.  c.)  emph.  state  from  X^;X . — *,bi'Eb ,  §  7.  d.  note.  ‘j‘7'9  ,  Inf.  of  VH . 
— fins,  with  them,  by  means  of  them. — fnn^sb,  1  Part.  Pe.  The  law  is 
better  to  him  who  observes  it. — •)£,  than ,  §  64.  1.  a. — ,  either  this  word 
should  be  pointed  or  it  may  be  considered  as  a  different  form  of  the 
adjective.  “  The  law  is  better,  to  him  who  observes  it,  than  the  fruits  of 
the  tree  of  life,  which  Jehovah  hath  prepared  for  him  who  keeps  it  [the 
law],  that  he  may  be  established,  and  may  walk  in  the  paths  of  the  way 
of  life,  in  the  future  world.” 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


105 


III.  The  same.  Gen.  3. — Jerusalem  Targum. 


:  sai'i  MSpinb  spssa  b'aa  !  pbess  "jinb  7 

rr?2i  sn  irb  imi  Dixb  D'ttbM  "i  aiaia  Mipi  s 
rrbi  12D  m  tmi  'aip  iM'bri  Miirai  asian  'aip  'ba 
:  in'  n'lpsi  snisa  mu  ip  maa  umi  cts  'Hip  'ba 
K'lips  piap  Mn'iiMS  r yb  arrMi  m'ss  m  “is  'pm  15 
Vmup  nai  in'  rbapi  iiamb  in'  rnai  psisa  rim 
'inn  K'ups  1112?'  abi  sn'iisi  smsa  mwimi  x”2 
'ill'.  Dip  linn;  jnaai  ■p'ropsa  ■pnrr  n'221  "isna 

1'1-n?  Q12  ISM  'IP'  Mb  MPP  ibl  MPFlMI  MPftab  IDS 

—  :  t  ••  v:v  t  t:  •  It  :  t  :  •  :  tt  ;  •  t 

ssai'  2p?  niD2  S2p?2  sn'ieii  ia?ab  i'bsb  rbs  iian 

t  —  >•••••  I  :  t>:  •  :  tt  •  —  :  v  :  J  ••  •  :  I  ••  •  ! 


7.  instead  of  the  regular  form  .  The  almost  entire  confu- 

sion  of  Pattahh  and  Garnets  and  even  Hhateph  Pattahh,  which  prevails  in 
this  Targum  and  that  of  the  Pseudo-Jonathan,  appears  here.  It  will  not 
be  necessary  to  notice  it  in  every  instance.  See  §  2.  2.  The  reader  will 
also  observe  the  singular  character  of  this,  so  called,  Targum.  It  is  evi¬ 
dently  rather  a  collection  of  Rabbinical  and  traditionary  remarks  on  the 
text,  than  a  translation  of  it. —  They  made,  etc.  This  perhaps  implies  the 
author’s  opinion  that  Adam  and  Eve  made  them  by  divine  direction.  He¬ 
brew,  The  Lord  God  made,  etc. 

8.  In  the  strength  of  the  day — probably  incorrect,  although  the 
Hebrew  has  sometimes  a  signification  analogous  to  this.  See  Josh. 
2: 11. 

9.  ,  which  I  have  created.  Regularly  •  So,  especially  in 

the  Targum  of  the  Pseudo-Jonathan,  “lai* ,  with  the  prefix  1 ,  becomes  najp  . 
The  punctuators  probably  had  in  mind  the  analogous  Hebrew  form,  §  7.  d. 
note. —  ,  Pass.  Part.  Pe.,  §  23.  1.  note,  is  manifest  before  me. — "is®  5  1st 
Part.  Peal. 

15.  And  it  shall  come  to  pass.  The  Vav  conversive  does  not  ap¬ 

pear  in  Chaldee. — 'p^SFia,  Part.  Ithpa.  from  *j;D,  full  orthography,  §  12.  II. 
4. — pH  a ,  masc.  pi.  Act.  Part,  from  KHa,  §  35.  But  Schaaf  (Op.  Aram.  p. 
333,)  points  it  regularly,  pna  fi'33,  §  12.  I.  1.  c.— snaa ,  1st  Part.  Aph. 


106 


CHRESTOMATIIY.  PART  II. 


b^ni  Tib  rrrrn  :  titivxcm  aobffl  is 

TOTp  r a  two  vaa  imi  cm  ■:;  k-q  •©sabi  aao?  rv 
-esm  aas?  iv  bsrab  tma  ra  ira'ip  atanro  si  h‘ 
asm  ■’T2  to  -ma  bttai  ■'■p  rwba  ws  aipa  k-q 
:  s""a  ra^i  sa:8  •::  ra  siapp  ti"sa  -r*  rnsai 
iaa  itr  “tt  rr*en  cm  an  trnba  aia*a  “laai  22 

T  •  ••  M  — •  mm 


t  :  — 


I  * 


T  *  *  —  1 


saina 

yaizn  htrr 

\  1  J  Tj  i  J 

“■V'*  ■>» 

r  : 

j  ■“ 

am  n 

t  :t  : 

mpn  n-ra  n-r 

t  *  :  ••  • 

a  apab 

•  »r  ; 

*•  “  Vi  f , 

tj  mp  rrr?  artts  ra  n-rr 
b!C',n  ssTfl  a:b*a  ■'T’s  va 


Tnan  an  wa!)  ti-ab 

:  •  :  r  |  ;  •  : 

“inb  f^t  triirsr 


from  snta  . — Xiisab,  suffix  pleonastic,  §  47.  2. — *p^b  these  to  those,  i.  e. 

one  to  another. — “  Prave  utputo,”  says  Buxtorf,  Lex.  art.  KnspSlB  . 
But  whether  the  reading  NlnOS1*?  (or  Kristi)  be  admitted  or  not.  the 
meaning  is  still  doubtful.  Buxtorf  renders  it  a  trampling  under  foot,  con- 
culcatio.  W alton  gives  incolumitas,  (probably  deriving  it  from  NStfi  in  the 
Rabbinical  sense,  to  he  quiet,  at  peace  ;)  which  the  connection  seems  to  fa¬ 
vor. — "’'rai*1,  suff.  pleon.  §  47.  2. — u  And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  when  the 
descendants  of  the  woman  shall  diligently  study  the  law  and  do  the  com¬ 
mandments,  they  shall  be  established,  bruising  thy  head  and  killing  thee  ; 
but  when  the  posterity  of  the  woman  shall  desert  the  precepts  of  the  law 
and  not  obey  the  commandments,  thou  shalt  be  established,  biting  them  in 
their  heels  and  afflicting  them  with  sickness.  Nevertheless,  there  shall  be 
a  remedy  for  the  sons  of  the  woman;  but  for  thee,  O  serpent,  there  shall 
be  no  remedy.  Moreover  they  shall  apply  remedies  (?)  to  the  heels  of  one 
another  in  the  end  of  the  last  days,  in  the  days  of  king  Messiah.” 

IS.  ,  i.  e.  £308 ,  the  earth  shall  bring  forth  abundantly. — £02  “,2£<2ln , 
which  is  upon  the  surface  of  the  feld,  i.  e.  the  grass. — ■’3S,  Part,  used  for 
the  Praeter.  Adam  answered,  §  53.  1.  note. — “laxi ,  see  the  notes  on  vs.  7 
and  9  of  this  chapter.  *j,s ,  Let  us  not  be  regarded  as  though  we 

were  of  the  cattle ,  i.  e.  cattle.  Comp,  the  French  des  betes ,  etc. — for 


£0^3  §  23.  1.  note. 

22.  fna  adds  nothing  to  the  sense. — •pEfiX ,  see  £*E£t  in  Lex. — 
evidently  an  Infinitive  form.  Perhaps  it  should  be  pointed  X'JOSE,  §  12.  I 
4. — ,  before  he  shall,  etc.,  or  while  he  does  not ,  etc. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


107 


■pjlpb  V2  fTOiSTfl  TO'  Eia  IT  Tlttt  !  ab^b  TT  24 

kidd  ab  ny  Dip  8*0*113  ■pn  ibyy  yiyi  jsrorb  raiaa 
Nnsri  D:n"  rpn»i  sr*~;s  sis  rri  ribs  pri  sab:- 
*n*B  “(a  ■pppsrri  app'pob  py-  sr.:?  ■jpn«  ;iy“ 
Dsna  pns  inn  aabyo  amissi  stvoa  *rm  by  s:b-s 
mao  rnern  “bos  swaio  saonb  m  s"“i  &aruhb 

t  :  •  !••:•  t:t  t  •  2  t  2  — :  t  2  —  2  •:  t—  •  — : 

ypsn“b  sjmeib  "pyaa  ■paw  map  -pjyipj  moa  ‘pns 
sabya  KtvTim  stvcsa  *nai  sbi  by  mm  sabyb  rinaa 

t  :  —  :  t:—  :  tt:*  — :  t:  —  •■  t  :  t  :  — :  |  :• 

sabya  “b  ieot  bo  srrois  &•“  mm  ib-8  a*n8  rin 

t:—  :  r  — r:  r  t:  —  •  t :  It  •  1  ••  t 

wibib  snails  st:  sod  ,sn  ssb'so  Dpi  m  an  rin 
:  mm  sabyb  mm  iba's  -ib  am  r"  sabya 

••  t  :  t  :  — :  t - :  |t  •  :  I  I  ••  r  t  :  —  : 


24.  The  glory  of  his  presence ,  i.  e.  his  glorious  presence. — ‘jB 
pjpijsb ,  these  two  expressions  are  doubtless  synonymous,  the  second  being 
explanatory  of  the  first,  which  sometimes  has  a  different  sense.  On  the  east, 
towards  the  sun-rising.  This  I  think  is  better  in  the  present  instance  than 
to  consider  •j'a  as  relating  to  time;  although  it  is  evident,  from 

other  places,  that  both  the  author  of  this  Targum  and  the  Pseudo-Jona¬ 
than  supposed  the  garden  of  Eden  to  have  been  planted  before  the  crea¬ 
tion  of  the  world.  See  the  next  clause.  Also  Gen.  2:  15,  Jeru.  T.  Gen. 
2  :  8,  Pseudo-Jon. — ibl  ttb  T2  ,  two  thousand  years  before  the  world  was 
created,  he  made  the  lair,  etc.  See  above  (22). — -snaa^r  b?,  because  they 
kept. — Stpa'iE  ,  1st  Part.  Pa,  fem.  sing,  from  K’a'n  .  §  12. 1.  3. — ?  plural, 

contracted  for  Ki-nEp ;  ttnab  p'nfra  tfb^X  ,  lit.  a  sword,  destroying  from  both 
sides,  i.  e.  a  two-edged  sword. — p^SE ,  1st  Part.  Pa.  from  123. — ",rj&*b7J 
(Part,  from  ttn&t)  the  world  which  is  coming,  or,  as  we  more  commonly 
say,  the  world  to  come. — sop ,  §  47.  1.  the  tree  of  life  is,  i.  e.  represents 
the  law. — pp ,  a  form  of  the  Praeter  (§  23.  2.  note,)  here  used  in  the  sense 
of  a  present  tense,  or  as  expressing  a  general  affirmation. — SpJ? ,  §  4.  a. 
’  This  double  “>  originated  with  an  unpointed  text,  and  should  not  have  been 
retained  when  the  points  were  affixed,  fifibab  for  ttnbfib,  see  above  (7), 
to  him  who  obeys  it. 


108 


CHEESTOMATHT.  PART  II. 


IV.  Story  of  a  dispute  between  Cain  and  Abel.  Gen.  4 :  8. — Jerusalem 

Targum. 


ppss  pb  nini  s<-b  -£xb  ppsii  am  ■'Pibn  b anb  rp  ByNP 
rp  rrb  r>PN  banb  ByNB  rp  rB  npb  "B!*b  rrr"r 
^P'PBb  be  “on  ■iFfflb  sbp  ■nm'N  nb?  rrbp  rp  tvbi 

t '  •  — :  t  - :  |  ••  •  :  r  :  Jr-:  — :  •• :  it  —  : 

sbi  N53b? '  "arx  ramn  abp  Narnia  *a  sasrNb  Nbp 

*  :  :  •  I  •  :  t  : 


t  : 


r  :  — 


T  —  •  — 


•  • 


via  p-a  rpappp  baptiN  fta  bb:>a  pa  papa  srn  rama 
n“KP  rp  rrN  rpb  paso  bar  a?  Na>pa  bapnN  Nb  rap 
ypsriNbp  Nsprab  aa  P3N  pna  rrNB  ppnp'tt  ab?  itni  rp 
Qpa  papa  npip  ramap  NabB  -~arx  ramap  N^rniaa 

—  :  —  :  I  •  :  t  :  —  •  ;  :  •  I  •  :  t  —  •  — 

pa  r:pip  rai?  rrn  bB  papa  npib  raa  rpai?  -^aa 
s*;-a  baptiN  Nb  psap  Nisra  ra  raap  bapi bn  pp^p 
bcpp  rriN  bar  b?  rp  opp  job  "SNa  rasa  rnran  aYn 


:  rrrr 

••  T 


intab,  Inf.  for  Fut.  “  no  reward  shall  be  given  to  the  righteous  nor  ven¬ 
geance  taken  of  the  wicked.  The  world  was  not  created  in  mercy,  neither 
in  mercy  is  it  governed.  Why  was  your  offering  accepted  from  you  with 
favor,  but  [mine]  was  not  accepted  from  me  with  favor?  Abel  answered 
and  said  to  Cain ;  There  is  a  judgment,  and  there  is  a  Judge,  and  there  is 
a  future  world,  and  a  reward  shall  be  bestowed  upon  the  righteous  [lit. 
there  is  the  giving  of  a  good  reward  to  the  righteous.]  and  vengeance 
shall  be  taken  upon  the  wicked ;  and  the  world  was  created  in  mercy,  and 
in  mercy  it  is  governed.  But  it  is  governed  according  to  the  fruit  of  good 
works.  Because  my  works  were  more  upright  than  yours,  my  offering  was 
accepted  with  favor,  but  yours  was  not  accepted  with  favor.  And  they 
were  both  contending  in  the  open  field;  and  Cain  rose  up  against  Abel  his 
brother,  and  killed  him.55 


EXTRACTS  FROM  TIIE  TARGUMS. 


109 


V.  Marriage  of  Samson.  Judg.  14. — Jonathan. 


:  'snabs  reaa  Mara  anna  ami  roanb  ritsaio  nroi  i 
warn  'mm  anna  nasi  maabi  nmaab  mi  p'bci  2 

T*  •  •  •  •  •  — •  x  •  •  —  ••  •  •  •  —  •  —  1  w 

•  •  •  »  •  •  •  • 

■“'"x  mb  nasi  :  inab  'b  nm  iac  wai  'swabs  msa  3 
bna  man  anna  'a?  baai  nns  roaa  n^b  an  maai 

*•  T  *  —  ;  j  •  »  1  —  j  j  ]  j  “j  Tj#  ••  X  ••  •  J 

fin-1  micsr  ritiati  nasi  s'bm  'antubsa  anna  scab 

tt  •  J  :  •  - t— ••  t  :  •  :  •  t  :  •  —  •  : 

■pm  ab  a’Bsi  minai  :  nub  am  "a  'b  as  4 

nawnab  an  sin  aspcm  wa  sin  "  Dip  ia  'is 
tinsi  :  baiton  rabio  ‘anabs  amn  arum  'anabsn  5 

— ;  ••  t  ;  •  J  |*»T  ••  t  J  •  •  •  ““  TT*2  ••  t  •  •  •  • 

awa  am  wan  'anc  tj  inai  wanb  maai.miaai  viraaiD 

t  :  —  r  t  :  •  r  :  •  :  ••  *  :  •  I  :  • 

ia  siias  nii  miby  mai  s  n-niaipb  ami  mis  ia  a 
abi  mm  mb  annai  awr  raman  sac  manm  -  Dip 

t  ;  ••  •  ••  — —  •  t  :  —  t;  t  J 


t  >t: 


miibi  annaa  b*aai  rroi  :  nasi  m  maabi  miaab  'in  7 

T»  •  •  •  •  —  •  x  *'  ■>  — •  ••  •  •  •  — •  ••  —  ' 

•  •••  i*  •  • 

m  'Tnab  101  nasab  rai'  nanb  am  niaati  to  s 

-  t  :  t  :  •  :  !  •  I  — :  •  t  :  I  :  •  ••  ••  : 

i  auhm  n-ai  swan  smsa  sn'iann  sip  sni  s'isn  sire 
mbi  mica  mb  bjai  bnai  bra  bjai  mm  mnpii  9 
s'isn  airsa  'is  iinb  'in  sbi  ibasi  ninb  an'i  was 

t  :  —  :  t  :  •  •  ••  !  :  •  —  r  :  - I  :  —  •  ••  • 

‘.an  narn  anna  pcs  bs  '.mas  nn;i  :  sisain  mo?  10 

mm  im  na  mm  :  s'abis  rnas  p  'is  amaa  lia'aa  n 

**  t  —  t  t  —  I  •  :  t  J  ••  ••  t  :  :  •  )  :  • 


1.  r33,  see  na  in  Lex. 

2.  p^O,  §  12.  I.  1.  and  II.  1. — top ,  Imp.  from  S&3 ,  §  12.  II.  1.  a. — WX, 
see  xpin . 

3.  rtoiTD  ,  3  sing.  fem.  from  "ipS,  §  15.  note  2. 

5.  l‘nx,  3  m.  pi.  Pr.  from  xrx  . — finto'ipb  ,  Buxtorf  gives  the  pointing 
nto'ip ,  which  analogy  demands. 

6.  ,  ■papna,  Pael  forms  without  Daghesh,  §  12.  II.  3. 

8.  5  Inf.  from  2p3  with  prefix  and  suffix. 

9.  bvm ,  §  21.  a. 


110 


CIIKESTOHATHY.  PAKT  II. 


praia  ]inb  nasi  :  ana?  iini  ■pan  ■piibn  inam  12 
r?aa  'b  nm  liinn  nx*n  ox  smnin  abb  aa  nicra 


T  T 


rnbM  rcnba  rnbm  rbb  imm  wotini  s'lnaa  *gft' 

J  •  t  :  !  •  t  :  •  !  •  t  :  I  :  I  ••  v  :  J  :  :  — :  x  :  :  • 

”~s  ii'mm  'b  nsinb  libbin  mb  dsi  :  ssiabn  pass  13 
“in  mb  inasi  sa'iabn  iibaas  rnbtii  r&'nbs  rnbn  *b 

••  - t  :  •  1  t  t  t  «  •  I  *t  :  I  •  t:  •  J  *t  : 

ssrpnai  sbana  ps3 ,  sbasa  rinb  nasi  :  nsyatiyi  nnn'n  w 
nim  :  ■pH'n  snbn  smiin  nsinb  ib'b'  sbi  mbin  psi  15 
n'b?a  m  'bmia  Ticao  n mb  inasi  nsra®  sai'a 

1  •  -:  —  -  j  :.  —  •:  - :  -  tt*:  t  : 

man  mas  tva  mi  mm  Tpa  sabn  smmn  m  mb  ana 
'nib?  'iaaa  rm  rsai  :  sabn  mm  wrp  mmcaoabn  ie 


T  :  —  T  T  T 


T  T 


':ab  amn  a  mm  anam  abi  amsaa  Tinb  mam 

•  •  •  •  T  ■>  t  *  •  —  •  ••  •  T  !  •  “•  ••  •  *  —  •—  — 

•  I  •  I*  •  •  I  •  •  •  • 

'min  ab  aaabi  aaab  an  nb  nasi  smin  ab  'bi  'a? 

•  ••  —  T  T*;  T  —  :  T  T  —  -  T  ••  —  T  •  Z  •  — 

■,inb  mm  s'ai'  s?rb  'nib?  mm  :  'ins  msa  mbi  n 
ns'ini  mnpnn  *-s  nb  'ini  na?'ba  aava  mm  s'naa 
ns?'aa  aai'S  amp  'b:a  mb  maai  :  na?  aab  amain  is 
nasi  amaa  mpn  nai  auimna  'bn  na  saar  b?a  ab  n? 
nnai  :  'min  ■jimns'aa  ab  'nnsa  'jinpna  pbbiba  -jinb  19 
yinsa  bapi  ybpaab  nn:i  "  cnp  1a  amm  nin  'nib? 
la'innb  anbaaa  an'i  Tinm  m  mwi  am:-  ynbrn 

t-t  ;  ;  *  —  •  |  ••  t  :  -  •:  t  J  *t  : 


12.  “pbBSX  ;  Buxtorf  points  it  X  . 

13.  in  32  73123  3 ,  Fut.  1  pi.  with  suff. 

15.  Imperative  Pael.  §  12.  I.  1. — that  he  maV  — hT'pi3, 

Aphel  from  . — &OW33 tJ’QVfn ,  is  it  to  try  (perplex)  us  ?  For  the  ending 

n^i  see  §  16.  2.  c.  and  for  the  prefix  73  ,  §  12.  I.  4. 

16.  5  while,  etc. 

17.  ttnpfjn ,  3.  sing.  fern.  Praet.,  with  suffix,  from  pn'n . 

18.  Krn'np,  see  “Hp  in  Lex. — bs>73  Inf.  from  . 

19.  •jifipnt  j  contrary  to  thn  analogy  of  Chaldee,  but  according  to  that 
of  Hebrew. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARO  IMS. 


Ill 


■puiaffl  nns  nrn  :  ™as  rrab  pibpi  iron  pppra  stv'tiu  20 

:  naaitiiia  mm  “iamb 


VI.  Prediction  of  Messiah's  kingdom.  Ps.  2. 

■pa-]5  (2)  :  smpip  i'3?Ta  ajaa?  pi&nna  nab  1 

•sacfe!)  •«  Dip  »m»b  ama  wiann''  amtobizft  tens  -aba 
:  Tinmbitibia  sosa  pibtai  rimmas  m  mra  :  mmiPa  by  3 
bba-1  rmn  15)  :  rinb  amr  m  s-ia-a  mm  ssaaa  sw  4 
•aba  'nan  asi  :  aas  brer  mraias  rrapnna  rinb  6 
ids  a-an  ia»  "i  sahp  amiss  :  mftpa  mu  by  ffinaa^i  7 
insi  -:a  ms  :  rrms  m  sai  ^ibsa  rsr  ms  ^b  sssb  8 
reisnn  :  sms*  ■trs  aiabo  armnai  SMans  s-aar  -as: 

J  .  :  —  :  t  :  —  •»r  :  ••  :  •  I  tt  -.—  It: - :—  t  —  :  — 

s-sba  man  :  ■rtsymn  mar  -a  mn  sbrai  starts  mn 

t  — :  -  I  :  |  •  :  :  •  —  :  •  )  t  J  ••  t  :  :  -  :  t  :  :  1  •• 

sbms  ■’*’  trip  a nba  :  sms  mas  smma  ab^ap  tibmiss  n 
rnainm  rar  sabi  s:ab-.s  ^b-ap  :  snwa  ibai  12 
■paai  bab  mats  mnr  Twa  nirrm  bna  smis 

I  •  :  it  :  i  :  ••  •• :  :  :  t  : 


9 

10 


J  r 

••  :  •*'  : 


20.  FP'iprnbj  to  the  person  who  was  his  companion. 


2.  ‘pa^p ,  1st  Part.  plur.  from  ntfp .  See  the  Par.— K'jHB ,  Inf.  Pa. — 
*,SE353  5  Inf.  Pe.  from  K323 ,  §  18.  note  1, 

4.  annp ,  by  ellipsis  of  the  pers.  pron.,  he  who  sitteth. 

7.  ,  Vocative ;  O  thou  beloved ,  etc. — Hast ,  emph.  masc.  u  Tu  mihi. 

purus  es."  Buxtorf. 

9.  p ,  see  in  the  vocabulary. 

11.  tes  Imp.  Pa.  2.  pi.  from  ■'fes  . 

12.  ljinpinp!l ,  “  et  amittatis  viamf  Walton.  But  the  words  are 

certainly  susceptible  of  the  sense  expressed  in  Hebrew.  Buxtorf,  (Lex. 
under  the  word  cites  several  examples  in  which  ‘isirt  has  evidently 

the  intransitive  sense  to  perish. — *ii«vn  }  Fut.  from  "1'iin. . — ,  suffix 
pleonastic,  §  47.  2.  Comp.  Heb.  ■■’ittSfct  . 


112 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


VII.  The  praises  of  Jehovah.  Ps.  8. 
tT'Vfc  wnnattSsin  rm  sniss  bs  fctnacb 

•ts  t:-:  -•  ••  j  -  :  t  •  -  t  t  -  • 

xjix  xbibz  rara*!  Train  b'bh  n_:  xm'zi  xnbx  *’*’  2 
xmcnirx  x'pzh  8*>abw  fflsa  :  s*a®  ra  b'3  wit  xnzm  3 
bwsa  :  saiT3i  xrai  b'?a  xbtazb  Trpma  bbsa  ta  sstiw  4 
:  xns'pnx  'i  ssasb*i  xhtd  Tinszsx  '"aiy  wain  'anxi 
13 on  bwa  xtis  ainij  131F1  b>ioa  xir:  in  na  5 
xiinnir*i  xip-xt  x'nxbaa  b'bp  mm  xmsm  :  'ibs  6 
rrinn  armin'  xbis  tit  nsfra  mnabinx  :  msbbnn  7 

:  r  •  —  t  it:  ••  t  :  —  •••::  — 

8»ain  '132  (9)  :  xbpii  'i'?n  linb^  ■p'nbto  'lint  ]X?  :  'ib?l  s 

"  :  x™  minx  tpbm  in-ibi  xa'  aai  10 
:xmx  x'rnn  Irani  ininai)  b'bn  aas 

t:>—  t  :  It:  —  —  ;  •:  t: 


x;:-z“  shjj 

TT  •  T  T  V:  T 


VIII.  Parable  of  the  vineyard.  Isa.  5  :  1 — 7. — Jonathan. 

nait  xaizb  bmai  bxiin'b  wz  irttzinx  8*35  lax  1 

•  •  •  a  T*  •  —  •  •••  •»  T  *  •  *  I  — •  •  ••  •  —  — •  *r  •  !  -•  *■ 

•  ■  •  •  •  <••/•  •  •  *  •  • 

baiiaa  'z-'zn  'as  maizb  an  nnaa^n  'am  zmzxi 


t  t  :  — 


Title.  j  b  auctoris,  as  in  Hebrew.  The  mode  of  writing  this  name 
with  which  belongs  in  Hebrew  to  the  later  writings,  is  in  Chaldee  the 

V 

usual  orthography. 

2.  T^t ,  for  the  ordinary  form  ,  §  2.  6.  c. 

3.  ,  Part.  Aph.  from  p>l3> ,  enemies. 

4.  'n  bl'wq ,  probably  this  rendering  originated  in  the  false  supposition 
that  the  Hebrew  11 3  is  necessarily  a  causal  conjunction.  It  should  evi¬ 
dently  be  considered  here  as  an  adverb  of  time,  when. 

8.  ‘’'niPlj  const,  for  emph.  §  60.  1.  note  3. 


Instead  of  the  fine  poetical  allegory  of  Isaiah,  we  are  here  presented 
with  an  interpretation.  The  Targumist  has  not  simply  translated  the 
words  of  the  prophet  into  Chaldee,  as  he  has  generally  done,  but  has  trans- 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


113 


tn  -ma  fnb  marr 

|  •  :••*—:  t  ••  :  t  :  —  :  t  :  t  t  -:  —  |  :  ••  -:  - 

Tirws  •’iD'roa  arm*!  sma  isy  arras  ■psri»spi  ^smp-* 
■marl  nnasi  lirrittsn  by  iossb  rrair  ’naia  rx- 

J  :  :  - :  - - :-  I  ••  r  -:  —  r  r  — :  •  :  :  —  I  — : 

•to*  8*03  :  Timaiy  *rcri08  1*1381  “jyp  rati  ■paiy 
□nab.  pa  8bi  8tYoi8  ro  ina  broPy  no  an  rinb 
ia  p-p  asp  iys  «i3P  mirr  asai  abraiT  on-1  iys 
ii“b  mas  xbi  oyb  Ps  pasab  mas  ants  na  :  say 

I  :  ••  — :  t  :  •  — :  —  :  v  :  - - :  t  t  —  •  — 

:  yirrini?  *nzrfcOtf  fis*0  vota  f'-Qi*  nhlta»  v*  txn 


ZS  j-IJCSJ  |UU  I'jJU  | 


2 


I/-CS  i  ■  •» 

..  — .  J  .. 


lated  the  allegory  into  plain  language  Still,  the  extract  is  curious,  and 
worthy  of  a  perusal.  As  it  differs  so  considerably  from  the  original,  I  sub¬ 
join  the  Latin  translation  of  the  London  Polyglott. 

11  Dixit  propheta  •  Cantabo  nunc  Israeli,  qui  comparatus  est  vineae, 
semini  Abrahae  dilecti  mei,  canticum  dilecti  mei,  vineae  suae.  Populus 
meus,  dilectus  meus  Israel,  dedi  eis  haereditatem  in  monte  excelso,  in  terra 
pingui.  2.  Et  sanctificavi  eos,  et  honorificavi  eos,  et  sustentavi  eos,  sicut 
plantationem  vitis  electae;  etaedificavi  sanctuarium  meum  in  medio  eorum. 
Altare  quoque  meum  dedi  ad  propitiandum  super  peccata  eorum  :  et  prse- 
cepi  eis  ut  facerent  opera  bona  in  conspectu  meo,  et  ipsi  inique  egerunt  in 
operibus  suis.  3.  Propheta,  die  eis  :  Eece  domus  Israel  recesserunt  a  lege 
et  nolunt  converti.  Nunc  habitatores  Hierusalem  et  viri  Juda,  judicate 
nunc  judicium  inter  me  et  populum  meum.  4.  Quod  bonum  dixi  utfacerem 
populo  meo  quod  non  fecerirh  eis?  et  cum  praeciperem  eis  ut  facerent  ope 
ra  bona,  quare  ipsi  fecerunt  opera  mala  ?  5.  Nunc  autem  annunciabo  vobis 
quod  ego  facturus  sum  populo  meo.  Tollam  majestatem  meam  ab  eis,  et 
erunt  in  direptionem  :  conteram  domum  sanctuarii  eorum,  et  erunt  in  con- 
culcationem.  6.  Et  ponam  eos  derelictos:  non  erit  eis  sustentaculum  nec 
fulcimentum;  et  erunt  transmigrantes  et  derelicli.  Prophetis  quoque  man- 
dabo,  ne  prophetizent  super  eos  prophetiam.  7.  Quia  populus  Domini  ex- 
ercituum  Israel  est,  et  viri  Juda  plantatio  laetitiae  ejus.  Et  dixi  ut  face- 
rent  judicium  et  ecce  facti  sunt  calumniatores ;  dixi  ut  facerent  justitiam, 
et  ecce  ipsi  multiplicant  peccata.” 

1.  and  pleonastic  suffixes,  §47.2. — “'SH'j,  my  beloved, 

1st  Part,  from  Earn  . 

3.  ,  contracted  form  of  the  act.  part.  m.  pi.  from  frCaS ,  §  35. — 

Inf  from  . 


8 


114 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


pbcx  '23 ?b  nayab  tm  x:x3  rr  pbb  •gns  ^  5 
:  iir“b  lim  Truznpa  rra  y-inx  tsab  ‘,1“",  fnsa  'razio 

<  »  /  *  •  r  •  ••  »  I  J  •  ••• 

rbabtsa  rim  lizar©'  x'r  rnyrex  xb  ito  ■psiiaxi 

T  *  :  :  —  :  !  *  !  —  :  :  •  t  :  !  -  :  :  •  r  ]  •  •  :  I  


'^x  :  riXiz;  vin'bs  isasn**  sb’n  “zx  xss23  byi  rP'zrai 


t  •  • 


rritrim  xzzd  mirr  obxi  bxnia'  rra  nixzs  R'az 

•  ••••••  T  *  •  T  *  r  •••••  »•  T  *  •  ••  T  *  T  *  —  ••  — • 

•  •  •  •  I  *  I  •  I*  I  •  I  • 

rnay"!j  max  rcax  rex  xtti  xri  worn  tv-axi 

?  :  :  -  :  ••  — :  I  *  I  •  t  :  t  •  |  :  :  -  :  - - :- 

:  yoin  *j5p:a  fisaji  &tr\  w 


IX.  Extract  from  Isaiah’s  'prediction  of  the  Messiah.  Isa.  52  :  13. — 

53  :  2. — Jonathan. 

xa$  (14)  :  X”~b  rppn'l  ap^  Div  xiriia  '725  nbz'  x“  13 
a'2  Iran  mrrc  rx'ao  rai'  bx-iizr  rvei  n*b  snaan 

....  !  •  -;  t  1  •  •  —  1  •  ••t  :•  ••  ••  —  :  • 

rx'so  yaas  155'  15  :  xti:x  aaa  vinTTi  lin'in  x*m?  15 

»  *  *  1  *  •  *”  *”  •  I  ”  II  **•*  I  I  •••  T  “*  •  “* 

xbp  'px  yriznE  by  -irrp'  yia'  yaba  ippruap  'nib? 
ra'ii  la  :  ibsFiax  waio  xbni  im  ilnb  ix'yntix  1 
:r.x'banx  -,a  by  yr®  "-  xmiza  yvi  sipni  xi  ximfoab 

—  —  !  ;r:—  t;  :  — :  I  1  :  t  tt:  :• 


5.  T2i3  Inf.  from  ns.  See  the  Par.  It  is  treated  as  a  noun,  plunder, 
and  the  corresponding  word  in  the  parallel  passage,  123*^,  is  a  noun. 

6.  ‘(■'bsbsTa  ,  Pass.  Part.  Palpel  from  b*Z3 . 

7.  “a&E,  Aph.  1st  Part.  plur.  from  ,  §  35. 

13.  ffinls ,  see  in  the  vocabulary. 

15.  ,  they  have  told ,  for  has  been  told ,  or  rather,  in  the  present 

instance,  had  been  told ,  §  56.  2.  b. — lai  itn ,  what  had  not  been  told  them 
they  have  seen)  etc.  The  Latin  Vulgate  and  Syriac  versions  agree  with 
our  Targumist  in  rendering  these  verbs  in  past  time,  they  have  seen ,  they 
have  considered ;  the  LXX  and  the  Arabic  version  give  the  Future  tense, 
as  does  our  common  English  translation.  The  Hebrew  verbs  are  both  in 
the  Praeter  tense. 

1.  ,  see  ,(’as<  . — “iai  CppM  ,  lit.  and  the  strength  of  the  arm  of  Jeho¬ 

vah’s  power.  Comp.  §  61.  1.  and  note  1. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


115 


,P 


rftufen  ,{ma,n  rabrfa  an  vriaip  2 

- :  •  !t  •  :  I  t  :  t  ;  !•::—:  r  •  t»t:  »r  •  —  t  :  :•  :  " 


n'^J‘ 


kjpks  KTiiwip  mbin  ii;,Dh  p  m  ■pM  bs>  TriizhiiB 
rva'K  rtSm*  kV-  ppim  Kb^n  «im  Kb  wi  k^s  nim 

—  ••  ••  ;  ••  t  I  •• ;  v  T  ••  T  «*  t  •  ;  t  ”!  — 

:  >ra  bare1’  m-itm  bM  (tyt  tt  w  tyrvi 

•  •  —  —  •  •  •  •••*»•  t  *  •••  T  ’  ►  •  •••  ••• 

•  •  •  ■  •  •  t  «  • 


X.  Aphorisms  of  Solomon.  Prov.  10  : 1 — 12. 

nb'buh  ■'ibn^ 

Kb  (2)  :  rraKb  vswa  k:;c  stw  ^sk  ma  k'jph  ia  i 
:  S'::'2  arris  72  K‘25'2  anp'tn  aria-n  ■nsia  pm  a 
:  races  pp-n  Ksapi  Kp^tsc  mass  KftbK  -.sp-j  *6  3 
s  rinb  Kcny-j  kctssc  k"pi  K'ac  scaab  asaaa  Kiciss&a  4 
K_a  Kcara  warn  k^c;  Kanban  aca  Kara  rcba’c  5 

t:  t  :  —  :  1  ••  t  :  tt::  t:  t  :  :  —  ••  t  : 


2.  §  23.  Note  2. — NiitlJ’iitlj ,  §  33.  b. — £pb,  in  the  land  which  was 

in  need  of  him,  i.  e.  of  the  mentioned  above,  the  Messiah.  But  the 
passage  is  quite  obscure,  and  the  more  so  as  there  is  nothing  in  the  origi¬ 
nal  corresponding  to  this  phrase. — bs'n,  so  that  everyone  who  sees  him  shall 
attentively  consider  him. 

In  the  remainder  of  this  chapter,  so  beautiful  in  the  original,  we  are 
presented  by  the  Targumist  rather  with  his  own  views  than  with  a  trans¬ 
lation  of  Isaiah,  and  those  too,  expressed,  for  the  most  part,  in  a  dull  and 
sometimes  quite  obscure  manner. 

Title.  ,  pleonastic  suffix,  §  47.  2. 

1.  "Hns ,  instead  of  ,  Fut.  Aph.  from  Nrih  ,  §  12.  I.  3. — ttbsp  for 
6  32.  note  2. 

2.  ,  Part.  Pa.  from  “1  j  Buxtorf  points  the  construct 

form  of  this  word  regularly  “HSix  .  — ,  §  60.  1.  note  2. — ,  Part. 
Pa.  fern.  sing,  from  fi^S ,  §  2.  7.  c. 

3.  t|iinp3,  Fut.  Pe.  3d  p.  sing.  §  12.  I.  3. 

4.  X35EO ,  Part.  Pa.  without  Daghesh  forte,  §  2.  7.  c. 

5.  rpbs'n ,  Part,  with  full  orthography,  §  12.  I.  He  who  cultivates,  viz.  the 
earth. 


116 


CIIEESTOMATHY.  PAET  II. 


linssfis^i  by  rinm  anna  :«ttraa  an  e 

Naw  sraia  ■wan  Niisw  :  Kaian  tos  a",i£hi  1 
:  “mna  rrrnaizn  Nbaoi  bap1  rrab  cram  :  icro  d 
:  rrns  irnrrria  fapsati  aasaa  bra  arwana  iibran  9 
ssiiaa  mi!  *imria  irmataa  cpbai  aaaa  arr  Trin>a  tain  « 
tttiaaa  :  aaiun  hS5i  'ytim  "p-tr!  Ka^a  12 

:  aranm  a&aa  arms  rinba  bsi  ■nsn  iron 

t  t  —  :  ••  t  :  J  :  %.  — :  •• :  *  — t  : 


6.  "i^n ,  §  23.  note.—1 ,  §  60.  1.  note  3. 

8.  ispab  §  63.  5. — plur.  from  r»Sii5 ,  §  39.  note  1. 

9.  bth3,  for  bt*’'1,  Fut.  of  Ms* . 


PART  III. 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHALDEE  PORTIONS  OF  JEREMIAH 

DANIEL  AND  EZRA. 


No.  I.  Jer.  10  :  11. 

£0*13  3  an  adv.  of  manner,  compounded  of  3  and  (dem.  pron.,  this,) 
after  this  (manner.) — emph.  of  .  This  commutation  of  3  and 
p  resulted  probably  from  a  pronunciation  of  3  in  this  word  like  the  Arabic 
£  or  nearly  like  our  g  hard. — for  *]*l — ,  §  12.  3.  Pattahh  is  restored 
by  Darga,  a  conjunctive  accent.  This  is  not  usual,  although,  I  believe, 
similar  cases  are  not  wholly  wanting  in  Hebrew. — !"&!£,  probably  in  appo¬ 
sition  with  and  giving  emphasis  to  the  declaration,  “  they  shall 

perish.”  So  Venema,  C.  B.  Michaelis,  Rosenmtiller,  etc. 

In  respect  to  the  authenticity  of  this  verse,  three  things  may  be  ob¬ 
served. 

1.  It  would  be  remarkable  that  any  author  should,  in  the  midst  of  a  dis¬ 
course,  insert  a  single  sentence  in  a  language  different  from  that  which  he 
generally  employed. 

2.  All  agree  that  this  part  o‘f  Jeremiah’s  prophecy  was  composed  seve¬ 
ral  years  before  the  captivity,  and  consequently  before  the  Chaldee  lan¬ 
guage  came  into  use  among  the  Jews. 

3.  This  verse  interrupts  the  connection  of  the  preceding  and  following 
verses.  Verse  12  commences  with  a  participle,  which  must  be  read 
in  close  connection  with  the  noun  with  which  it  agrees  in  verse  10. 
tinb  also,  in  v.  11,  has  no  antecedent  expressed.  “  Thus  shall  ye  say  to 
them ,  etc.”  To  whom?  The  text  does  not  inform  us. 

“  Non  sine  ratione,  aut  temere,  statueretur,  additamentum  esse  ab  alia' 
manu,  tempore  morae  in  exilio,  profectum,”  says  Venema ;  and  this  Ro- 
senmiiller  quotes  with  approbation. 

I  will  merely  subjoin  two  extracts  from  writers  of  different  opinions  on 
this  point. 

u  This  verse  is  omitted  in  one  *  MS. ...  It  seems  probable  to  me  that 


*  526  Kennicott. 


118 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  in. 


some  public  teacher  during  the  captivity  .  .  .  had  it  inserted  in  the  margin^ 
and  perhaps  usually  read  together  with  this  section  of  the  prophecy  in  the 
assemblies  of  the  people,  in  order  that  the  common  people  might  have 
their  answer  always  ready  whenever  they  were  molested  on  the  point  of 
religion,  or  importuned  to  join  in  the  idolatrous  worship  of  the  Chaldeans.” 
— Dr.  Blayney  on  Jeremiah. 

11  This  verse  is  writ  in  the  Chaldean  tongue,  and  not  in  the  Hebrew, 
that  when  they  came  among  those  that  did  worship  their  idols,  they  might 
openly  and  plainly  profess  the  true  God  in  that  language  which  the  ene¬ 
mies  understood  better  than  they  did  the  Hebrew,  and  that  in  such  kind  of 
language  as  this ;  Let  all  those  gods  perish  from  off  the  earth,  and  under 
the  heavens,  that  were  not  able  to  make  either.  It  is  an  imprecation 
upon  their  idols.” — Matthew  Poole ,  Annotations. 


No.  II.  Dan.  2  :  4 — 7  :  28. 

Ch.  II.  v.  4.  ,  Imp.  from  See  the  Par. — ,  Imp.  Pattahh. 

§  15.  4. 

5.  i"i32?  and  '■uax ,  participles  used  instead  of  the  Praeter,  §  53.  1.  note. 

So  and  its  plural  frequently. — fcp'ntosb  ,  the  pointing  is  intended 

for  the  marginal  reading,  ‘’K'n'lSs ,  the  regular  form  of  Dec.  VI.  The  Ke- 
thib  is  generally  pointed  by  Lexicographers  .  Perhaps  it  should 

rather  be  states  in  analogy  with  the  other  declensions. — SWX,  a  peculiar 
form.  It  is  probably  fern,  from  ‘itK  ,  2d  part.  Peal  from  TTJS  ,  §  12.  I.  1.  d. 
The  —  would  regularly  be  impure  and  immutable.  It  is  here  treated  as 
?if  pure  and  mutable,  and  the  Part,  is  varied  according  to  Dec.  III.  a. — 
■i.SSilS'iiinn ,  Fut.  Aph.  from  ,  §  12.  II.  5.  For  the  suffix  see  §  16.  2.  h. 
and  Par.  II. — “pailns,  PI.  of  with  suff.  2d  pers.  pi. — 3.  pi.  m. 
Fut.  Ithpe.  from  t fife),  see  Par.  VII. 

6. Jpn£P],  2.  pi.  Fut.  Aph.  from  wn,  §  12.  II.  5. 

7.  rntf B!| ,  Empfc-n  instead  of  it ,  a  substitution  very  common  in  the 
Biblical  Chaldee,  Intr.  3.  note;  unless  this  word  should  have  been  pointed 

*•  :  • 

9.  “pnafijn ,  the  pointing  is  that  of  the  Keri  ,  2.  pi.  m.  Pr. 

Ithpa.  from  "jEt .  The  Kethib  should  be  read  in  Aphel,  ‘pfiSEtfi ,  or 
like  the  Heb.  Hiph.  VifcWQtrt .— ,  1  sing.  Fut.  from  §  20.  4.  and 
§  2.  7.  a. 

10.  ,  see  above  on  verse  5. 

**  •  •  ' 


NOTES  ON  THE  BIBLICAL  CHALDEE. 


119 


12.  p2p>i  &33,  synonymous  terms,  used  to  heighten  the  idea.  Perhaps 
however  t]2p  may  be  understood  as  expressing  more  violent  anger  than 
D33  . — STininb ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  ‘T3S  ,  perhaps  derived  from  an  obsolete  verb 
Pe  Yodh. 

14.  ‘’XpSpb,  Accusative,  §  60.  3. 

16.  *jpip ,  Fut.  of  •jna  with  the  force  of  a  Subjunctive  in  consequence 
of  the  "’’n,  that  he  would  give.  For  the  form  see  §  18.  note  2.  and  §  12.  I.  1. 

19.  '■'bs ,  Praeter  Passive,  §  13.  2. — ^3,  Pael,  §  12.  I.  1.  b. — ttbxb,  Accu¬ 
sative,  §  60.  3. 

20.  Nlpb,  for  Fut.  with  b  and  an  optative  sense,  §  50.  2. 

22.  ,  fem.  pi.  emph.  from  ,  deep,  inscrutable  things ,  §  41. 
note. — XlrnppE ,  Pass.  Part.  Pa.  fem.  pi.  emph.  from  . 

23.  ’13n3kiin ,  2.  m.  sing.  Praet.  Aph.  from  with  suff.  1  p.  sing,  see 
Par.  II. 

25.  bsptt ,  Aph.  from  bb2 ,  §  12.  II.  5,  and  §  2.  7.  a. — bipS'ib  ,  this  Accu¬ 
sative  with  b  is  of  frequent  occurrence.  It  will  perhaps  be  unnecessary 
to  notice  it  again. — in  the  beginning  of  a  speech  superfluous  like  the 
Greek  ort . — ,  §  15.  4. 

26.  Tprnxin  ,  art  thou ?  compounded  of  the  interrogative  tt,  *’rpx  and 
the  suffix  Tp— . — ,  Inf-  Aph.  from  with  suffix,  §  16.  2 

27.  ttpp.pb ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  ,  §  23.  Notes  on  the  Par.  4. 

28.  fcOlib ,  must  take  place ,  §  50.  2. 

29.  ,  comp,  the  English  expression  u  thoughts  come  up,  arise  in 
the  mind.” 

31.  'ift,  indef.  art.  §  29.  1.  note. 

32.  ,  a  plur.  form,  see  ppri  in  the  vocabulary. 

33.  ppSE ,  part  of  them.  So  the  French  distributive  article  du,  de  la, 
etc.  The  punctuators  seem  to  have  considered  bin  as  necessarily  feminine. 
The  writer  doubtless  understood  it  to  be  common. 

34.  Aph.  from  pp^,  3.  s.  f.  Pr.  segholate  form. 

35.  nspttili,  Ithpe.  from  Hid. — §  23,  Notes  on  the  Par.  1. 

38.  or  (Keri)  1st  Part,  from  ‘IW. 

39.  50  pit ,  here,  as  in  all  such  cases,  the  pointing  is  that  of  the  Kerb 
50*15*  may  have  been  used  in  the  same  sense.  See  2p5<  in  the  vocabulary. 

40.  3“iP],  3.  s.  f.  Fut.  Pe.  from  Hhireq  of  the  regular  form  being 
lengthened  to  Tseri,  on  account  of  the  Resh. 

Ch.  III.  2.  The  best  critics  are  uncertain  as  to  the  precise  meaning 
of  several  of  these  words.  Neither  etymology  nor  usage  sheds  much 


120 


CHEESTOMATIIY.  PART  III. 


light  on  them.  Those  meanings  which  are  considered  most  probable  are 
given  in  the  vocabulary, 

4.  'pnax  ,  it  is  spoken ,  lit.  they  speak,  §  56.  2.  d. 

6.  ,  fern.  Part,  from  ,  burning. 

8.  “jifi^pp  *ibax,Iit.  ate  or  devoured  the  pieces  of  them,  of  the  Jews. 
The  sense  unquestionably  is,  calumniated ,  or  accused  the  Jews.  The  Sy¬ 
riac  usage  is  the  same.  The  Arabians  also  employ  the  phrase  to  eat  ih» 
fiesh  of  a  person,  in  the  same  sense. 

12.  ,  this  word  is  connected  with  and  the  phrase  signifies,  as 
explained  in  the  vocabulary,  (see  under  ,)  to  show  regard. 

13.  ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  . — ipn^n ,  a  kind  of  irregular  Hophal  or 

passive  of  Aphel.  See  ttniK  in  the  vocabulary. 

14.  nppppi  ,  the  regular  pointing  would  be  fia^n .  Comp.  §  12.  I.  1. 
where  Tseri  and  Hhireq  seem  to  be  employed  almost  indifferently.  But 
the  changes  of  vowels  in  Chaldee  seem  hardly  capable  of  being  reduced 
to  rule. 

16.  I'jfl  the  shade  of  meaning  seems  to  be,  “  We  do  not  think  it  ne- 
cessary  to  return  a  favorable  answer,  to  comply  with  thy  wish.” 

18.  iOhb ,  Optative,  §  50.  2. 

19.  ntn  ,  2  Part.  Pe.  from  KtH  ,  literally  seven  times  more  than  it  had 
been  seen,  or  known,  etc. 

21.  ^nfiS,  Praet.  pass.  §  13.  2. 

24.  *p35  ,  Plur.  Part,  from  K3?1. .  See  Par.  IX.  Dec.  V.  a. 

Ch.  IV.  3.  nbsanb ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  bbs ,  §  2.  7.  a. 

4.  1^?  ,  so  the  Kethib  should  evidently  be  pointed.  The  Keri,  *pbs  is 
a  contracted  form  of  the  same.  Comp.  nbba,  Keri  n!bs>,  Dan.  5  :  10. 

9.  “ptrp  ,  Ittaphal  Fut.  3.  sing.  m.  from  W .  Here,  as  frequently  in  the 
poetical  style  of  the  orientals,  the  Future  is  employed  as  an  Aorist,  §  50.  1 

10.  nnj  ,  1  Part.  Pe.  §  12.  I.  1.  c. 

11.  ,  Aph.  from  “in?  . 

12.  aaai1?  ,  Fut.  Ithpa.  from  S3S. 

13.  ,  §  12.  I.  1. 

14.  nndjx ,  Hebraism,  Intr.  3.  note  1. — bsttj,  in  the  construct  state,  the 
base  of  men,  i.  e.  the  basest. 

16.  ‘1&tna }  from  ana ,  Keri  *na  from  “la . 

19.  npan ,  the  Keri  is  anomalous.  The  Kethib,  pointed  n^an ,  would 
be  the  regular  2d  p.  sing.  m.  Praet.  from  nan  . 

28.  ‘pnax ,  see  above  on  3  :  4. 


NOTES  ON  THE  BIBLICAL  CHALDEE.  121 


30.  n2p,  Praet.  3.  s.  f.  from  t)1S . 

Ch.  V.  6.  •’rp'SttJ ,  3  pi.  Pr.  from  aob  with  pleonastic  suffix  in  the  Da¬ 
tive ,  compare  ‘’fiibs  v.  9. — ‘pnnba.  Part.  pi.  Ithpa.  from  xnb  No.  II. 

8.  Nellis*!,  the  pointing  is  that  of  fnnbsi. 

15.  ifesn  ,  Hophal,  a  Hebraism  not  of  frequent  occurrence,  Introd.  3. 
note  1.  See  bbtf.  The  marginal  reading,  without  Daghesh,  seems  to  be 
required  by  the  analogy  of  Aphel,  though  Peal  receives  Daghesh. 

16.  bpin,  point  the  Kethib  bsin .  This  and  the  Keri  bl3n  are  both  in 
use  as  Futures  of  bpl ,  q.  v. 

20.  an  ,  Praet.  pass.  §  13.  2. — V’ljSin ,  3.  m.  pi.  Pr.  Aph.  from  Kn“ . 

25.  151  83  a  ,  These  are  passive  participles  Peal,  the  third  and  fourth  in 
a  contracted  form,  §  12.  I.  1.  d. 

27.  NnV’pn,  Praet.  Pass.  2.  sing.  m.  §  13.  2. 

28.  no^ns 3  and  ,  Praeters  Passive  3.  sing.  f. 

30.  ionbs,  according  to  the  pointing,  and  to  the  marginal  reading,  this 
word  is  an  adjective  in  the  emph.  sing,  agreeing  with  KSba . 

Ch.  VI.  1.  *pnnn,  fern,  of  ‘pnfi ,  see  Par.  XI. 

2.  “jiiib  *1'n ,  ivho  were  to  he,  should  be,  §  50.  2. 

3.  pt3,  1  Part.  Pe.  §  12.  I.  1.  c. 

14.  151  bx'an  ,  as  “in  occurs  so  frequently,  its  several  uses  should  be 
carefully  distinguished.  It  occurs  four  times  in  this  verse.  In  the  first  in 
stance  it  is  a  conjunction,  equivalent  to  the  Greek  on,  and,  like  that  parti¬ 
cle,  in  the  beginning  of  a  speech,  need  not  be  translated  into  English  ;  in 
the  third  it  is  the  preposition  of,  or  a  sign  of  the  Genitive  case  ;  and  in  the 
second  and  fourth,  it  is  a  relative  pronoun,  in  the  former  case  Nominative, 
in  the  latter,  Objective. 

15.  the  suffix  is  reflexive,  §  49.  1.  b. — Lit.  the  king  was  displeas¬ 
ing  to  himself,  better  in  English,  was  displeased  with  himself 

18.  nnrpn ,  an  irregular  Hophal  3.  sing.  fern.  Pr.  from  ittrx  . — nab  ,  Pr. 
pass.  3.  sing.  fem.  from  tlb,  §  22.  1.  note,  and  §  13.  2. 

19.  *,niby ,  so  in  Latin,  verbs  of  taking  away  are  construed  with  a  Da¬ 
tive  of  the  person. 

24.  b:**3nb ,  Accusative,  §  60.  3.  It  is  governed  by  nppsnb  . 

Ch.  VII.  3.  Ip3b,  1  Part.  pi.  fem.  from  ttib. 

4.  la^na,  Praet.  pass,  from  ana  . 

5.  nabbi,  nab,  the  Keri,  is  doubtless  the  true  reading.  The  Targums 
employ  nap . 


122 


CHRESTOHATHY.  PART  III. 


15.  §  12.  II.  2. 

20.  ,  §  12. 1.  1. — ■)»  ,  comparative,  as  in  Heb.  §  64.  1.  a. 


No.  III.  Ezra  4  :  8 — 6  :  18. 

Chap.  IV.  v.  10.  EWSasi,  according  to  Gesenius,  equivalent  to  the  com¬ 
mon  expression  and  so  forth.  His  different  etymologies  do  not  however 
appear  entirely  satisfactory. 

12.  tffripscp  Jtirn'nB  ,  these  forms  are  both  feminines  in  the  emphatic 
state  from  Tie  and  123*1X3, .  §  41.  note. 

14.  N3n*5i3,  prob.  lit.  “  we  eat  our  salt  from  the  palace  f  i.  e.  we  derive 

our  sustenance  from  the  royal  bounty.  If  the  sense  proposed  by  Buxtorf 
and  some  others  be  admissible,  must  be  taken  as  referring  to  the 

temple.  Seenb/3. 

18.  ,  Praet.  pass.  The  composite  Sheva  is  occasioned  by  the  "i . 

Ch.  V.  1.  natjaa ,  in  this  and  similar  forms  of  the  same  word,  K,  with 
the  pointing  of  the  text,  must  be  considered  otiant.  It  might  be  treated 
as  a  consonant,  and  receive  the  pointing  JiiOa? ,  ,  etc.  See  in 

the  vocabulary. 

3.  mna,  const.  St.  from  . — iibbsuib ,  Shaph.  from  No.  I. 

8.  dtofiE,  Part.  Ithpe.  from  o*ii!3 . — ,  Part.  Ithpe.  fern.  sing,  of 
the  same  form  with  the  absol.  masc.  Dec.  Ill .f 

11.  'ii 33,  §  26.  2.  a. 

13.  wai,  §  50.2.  The  pointing  of  the  Keri,  (without  Daghesh,)  is 
doubtless  the  correct  one. 

15.  ,  Imp.  of  ,  §  18.  2. 

Ch.  VI.  5.  Ty}*1),  Fut.  of  Tpfi  . 

15.  aPSpli? ,  Pass.  Part.  Shaph.  or  Praet.  Passive  from  . 

No.  IV.  Ezra  7  :  12 — 26. 

12.  Yvaa,  perfect  (peace),  according  to  the  common  Eng.  version.  Ge¬ 
senius  explains  it  as  a  term  of  respect  applied  to  the  person  addressed, 
and  renders  it  learned. 

14.  ‘pbp  ,  for  “‘iibsp ,  pi.  Part,  from  Dp  .  The  frequent  substitution 
of  Pattahh  for  Q,amets  has  been  mentioned  before . 

24.  2pph3 ,  strictly  2d  Part.  pi.  from  *jn3 ,  consecrated  persons,  hence, 
those  devoted  to  the  service  of  the  sanctuary,  Nethinim. 


VOCABULARY. 


2X ,  m.  a  father ,  irreg.  emph. 
X3X,  with  sufF  it  takes  the  Form 
S|3X  ;  e.  g.  “pax  2Ay  father ,  ^inx , 
•unx  Ais  father ,  Xipax  her  father , 
£<2iin5<.  owr  father ,  yiaiDX  yowr 
(masc.)  father ,  yowr  (fem.) 

father ,  etc.  Instead  of  *'SX  my 
father ,  which  occurs  only  Dan. 
5  : 13,  the  emph.  XSX  is  elsewhere 
universally  employed.  Plur.  “JiTaX 
const,  nfiax,  emph.  Xfliiax  with 
sufF  “Wax  or  ■’nfiax  my  fathers , 
etc.  with  the  sufF.  of  either  sing, 
or  plur.  nouns. 

ax  emph.  xax ,  xipx  and  xaiX  m. 
Dec.  IV.  b .fruit. 

nax  to  perish. — Aph.  naix  and  nsin 
to  destroy  ;  also  intrans.  £o  perish. 
— Hoph.  aa^in  to  be  destroyed. 

“,ax  and  ‘jax  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  stone. 
12X  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  reward. 

Xinx  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  and 

t  :  • 

rnax  Dec.  III.  a.  an  epistle ,  a  letter. 
pnx  adv.  then.  With  a  prefixed, 
pnxa ,  idem. 

D^x  m.  pr.  n.  Adam. 

d'ix  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  also 

cnx  and  an^x  Dec.  II.  a.  also 

anx  and  an^x  Dec.  I.  b.  i.  q.  an 

T  -  T  1 

blood. 

xianx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  the  ground ,  the 
earth. 

nnx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  month  Adar , 
part  of  February  and  March, 
nnx  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  threshing-floor. 


yntannx  m.  (found  only  in  the  plu* 
ral),  chief  judges ,  senators. 

^ntnnx  adv.  (i.  q.  aSpacrra)  carefully , 
exactly. 

Snnx  c.  g.  Dec.  II.  a.  (i.  q.  Heb.  Sint 

with  X  prosthetic,)  an  arm. 

,‘jnnix  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  other,  another. 
■JS^X  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  doctrine,  instruc- 

I  T  S 

tion. 

■jasix  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  an  artificer ,  work¬ 
man ;  a  maker. 

laaUX  and  ^aix  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  the 

T  T 

making  or  doing  any  thing ;  the 
thing  made  or  done. 
naix  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  treasure  ;  place  of 
deposit. 

rnix  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  a  way ,  access. 

X^nix  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  law. 

XIX  and  fitx  ,  2d  Part.  Xtx ,  to  light , 
kindle. 
ntx  i.  q.  btx . 

btx.  Fut.  V’fp,  Imp.  btx  ,  bppx  and 
^FX  ,  to  go  ;  to  depart. 
nx  m.  a  brother ,  irreg.  emph.  XHX ; , 
with  sufF  "’HX  or  ■'HX.  my  brother  ; 
■pnX;  thy  brother ,  ‘’rpris* 

Gen.  4  :  8,  Jer.  T.)  his  brother ,  etc. 
Plur.  pnx  with  sufF  ‘’HX.  my 
brothers ,  Tplix  and  ?|fix  thy  broth¬ 
ers 3  ininx  his  brothers.  This  form 
is  distinguished  from  the  sing,  by 
Hholem  while  the  latter  has  Shu- 
req.  “pa^HX  ,  etc. 

nnx  to  lay  hold  of  take ,  take  posses -  . 

sion  of.  Ithpe.  pass. 


124 


*68 


N1>!nx  and  x*nnx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a 

▼  -S  T  *  -S 

taking  possession ,  possession. 
njJHK  £  Dec.  VII.  a.  (verbal  from 
l-nn  to  announce ,  to  explain ),  e#- 
planation. 

ii^nx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  an  enigma. 
xaonx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  possession ;  in¬ 
heritance. 

^nx  prep,  after. 

*nrix  Dec.  VIII.  c.  and  *pttX  Dec.  I. 

•  tjT  t  t  t:  it 

b.  adj.  other,  another. 

■HttK  f  Dec.  VIII.  c.  that  which  is 
last ;  extremity,  end. 

•p^nx  adv.  'p^nx  at  last. 
“paB'i'ndnx  m.  pi.  Dec.  II.  (from  the 

.  O 

Persian  co  JCw  a  satrap ,  perhaps 

with  the  prefix  excellence,') 

principal  governors. 
niax  m.  (in  the  sing,  like  Dec.  I.  pi. 
*p3iax)  brier  ;  especially  the  haw¬ 
thorn. 

adv.  how?  idem. 

“j^X  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  tree. 

Xta^X  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  terror ;  fear. 

*pX  conj.  =  Heb.  ex  if. 

">1?^  and  “l^X,  i.  q.  *1^,  q.  v. 
r^X  or  “1Jn"lX  adv.  of  affirmation  (  = 
Heb.  tth ,)  there  is,  there  are  ;  there 
exists.  wx  I  have.  It  takes 
’  the  suffixes  of  plural  nouns.  Dan. 

2:11,  3:  14. 

7P|3X  i.  q.  Tpx  q.  v. 
bsx  to  eat ;  to  consume. 
bx  adv.  not,  especially  before  the  fu¬ 
ture  tense,  expressing  a  prohibi¬ 
tion,  etc. 

bit.  (Keri  Ez.  5 :  15,)  and 
dem.  pron.  these. 

n?X  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  God.  PI.  excel. 

sometimes  as  in  Hebrew  . 

*l^X  interj.  i.  q.  S|1X ,  behold  ! 

conj.  if  -  interj.  oh  that ,  utinam! 
*&X3  as  if. 

and  or  p’sbi&X  unless , 

comp,  of  *&X ,  xb ,  and  the  enclitic 
syllable  p‘S  ;  i.  q.  if. 


?|bx  and  *]|x ,  or  fully  written  Tpbx 
and  *p|x,  dem.  pron.  plur.  masc. 
these;  those. 

t]bx  and  f)bx  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  thou¬ 
sand. 

tax  f.  irreg.  emph.  X53X ;  with  suff. 
7)EX ,  etc. ;  plur.  ‘jfiEX  -  with  suff. 
■jinjnfiax ,  (and  with  masc.  form 
p'maax .)  a  mother. 

EX  conj.  if. 

Xex.  f  irreg.  (in  the  sing,  like  Dec. 
VIII.  a.  but  in  pause  *int2X ;  in  the 
plur.  ‘jlnftX,  nil  tax  ,  etc.)  a  nurse; 
a  maid. 

XEX  and  FtEX  fern.  Dec.  VII.  a.  in 

T  —  T  - 

sing. ;  plur.  pEX  Dec.  IV.  a.  a 
cubit. 

xtax  f.  plur.  *p5ax ,  a  people,  nation. 

"(tax  Aph.  to  believe  ;  with  3  to 

confde  in,  trust  in.  Pass.  part, 
“jta^nta  certain ,  true  ;  faithful. 

“iex  to  speak ,  say  ;  to  command. 

"itax  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  lamb. 

^antax  adj.  Dec.  VII.  b.  strong. 

"(X  adv.  where  ?  whither  ?  *]Sta  whence  ? 

X3X  ,  less  frequently  !"!3X  and  *’ax. , 
pers.  pron.  com.  gen.  I. — PI.  xanax 

we. 

pax  pers.  pron.  3d  pi.  m.  they  ;  them. 

Diax  and  E^ax.  adj.  and  sub.  Dec.  I. 
a.  violent ;  a  violent  person  ;  a 
robber. 

taax  to  constrain,  compel ;  to  oppress 
the  mind,  occasion  anxiety. 

t)ax  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  P\&  ,  face, 
countenance.  Dual  and  Plural 
idem. 

tiiax,  (133X,  and  by  Aphaeresis  ttia) 
m.  irreg.  emph.  X133X ,  X'3a  Gen. 
3  :  20,  Pseudo-Jon. ;  plur.  “ptiax 
and  pliia :  const.  *>liiax ;  man. — 
taiax  "as  idem. 

Fiax.,  (in  Bibl.  Chal.  iitnax,  pointed 
like  the  other  form  which  is  em¬ 
ployed  in  the  Targums,  with  ft 
in  otio.  The  writers  doubtless 
pronounced  it,  in  analogy  with  the 


125 


Hebrew,  tinax.)  pers.  pron.  com. 
gen.  thou. 

•plFUX ,  i.  q.  ‘pnx  ,  ye. 

sibX  and  toX  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  a  medi- 

T  * 

cine ,  something  salutary. 

TlbX  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  band,  fetter. 

■’OX  m.  irreg.  emph.  X^b-X;  pi.  l^bX , 
xn^bx ,  etc. ;  a  physician. 

"iB3bX  m.  pi.  n.  Asnapper ,  perhaps 
the  same  with  Esarhaddon,  or  an 
officer  under  him.  He  collected 
the  Samaritans  from  different  na¬ 
tions  and  settled  them  in  the  land 
of  the  ten  tribes.  Ez.  4  :  10. 
Comp.  v.  2. 

X3“ibdx  (mile!)  ad v.  speedily . 

"ibx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  prohibition;  obli¬ 
gation. 

X“>bX  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  chain,  band.  \ 
■ji’nrmox  m.  pi.  n.  Esarhaddon ,  son 
of  Sennacherib  and  king  of  Assyria, 
mox  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  (from  the  Latin 
strata ,)  street ,  way,  path. 

?X  (by  a  double  commutation  i.  q. 
Heb.  ^2,)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  wood. 

I.  t)X  conj.  also. 

II.  t]X  (contr.  from  &]3X)  m.  Dec.  IV. 
a.  face ,  countenance. — X'nB  “’BX 
surface  of  the  field,  i.  e.  simply  the 
field. 

XWBX  m.  pi.  pr.  n.  of  a  people  set¬ 
tled  in  Samaria  and  subject  to  the 
Assyrians,  perhaps  the  Parrhasii. 
N^BO^SX  m.  pi.  and 
X^Bnb-iBX  m.  pi.  proper  names  of 
nations,  now  unknown,  settled  in 
Samaria  and  subject  to  the  Assy¬ 
rians.  Ez.  4 : 9. 

bhBX  (only  Ez.  4  ;  13,)  according  to 
Buxtorf,  treasury.  So  modern 
critics  generally.  Aben  Ezra  ex¬ 
plains  it  by  rviXSifi,  expenses; 
R.  Sol.  Jarchi  by  ba ,  tribute. 
23SX  f.  Dec.  II.  a.  (PI.  *}—  and  )— ) 
finger  ;  with  ,  toe. 

“|b:33£X  f.  I3ec.  VIII.  c.  (Greek  crroA.??,) 

*  *  *  i 

pi.  ,  robe,  garment. 


SB^X  f.  JiBBlX  m.  num.  adj.  Dec.  II. 
a.  four. 

*i!3“iX  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  purple.  Heb. 
“Jb^x ,  Syriac  po_.  ,  Arabic 

^X.  interj.  lo  !  behold ! 
asm.  conj.  because;  that;  i.  q.  *HX. . 
rnx  f.  Dec.  III.  d.  (pi.  generally 
-,rnx,)  journey ;  way,  path. 

“nx:  and  H^X  m.  irreg.  emph.  X^X ; 

plur.  ‘jl^X,  emph.  xn^x,  a  lion. 
*HX  conj.  because ;  that. 

TpX  adj.  Dec.  I.  a  .fit,  suitable,  pro¬ 
per,  verbal  from  Tj^X.  to  be  pro¬ 
longed,  to  be  long  ;  in  Talm.  to  pre¬ 
pare,  adapt. 

fiB^X  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  prolongation, 
continuation. 

fTMB'ix  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  knee. 

Xb“iX  and  Xb^X  f.  Dec.  VII.  a. 

T  S  *•  T  *  - 

'poison. 

3nx  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  the  earth,  i.  q. 

Heb.  'p’^X ,  Gr.  Introd.  4.  note  2. 

3nX  adv.  below;  with  *jb ,  inferior, 
Dan.  2  :  39.  Hence 
•^X  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  what  is  lowest , 
bottom. 

p ‘IX  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  (i.  q.  snX:,) 
earth.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee 
only  Jer.  10  :  11,  but  frequent  in 
the  Targums. 

tix ,  X1BX  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  and 
X12JX  f.  Dec.  VII.  a  .fire. 
tijx  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  foundation. 

SfBX  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 
jribx  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  astrologer.  He¬ 
brew  and  Syriac  idem. 

“p.ttix  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  wall. 
xniBX  with  prosthetic  X,  i.  q.  XflttS 
lo  drink. 

“iWPiUiX  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  rebellion. 
nx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  sign. 

Fix  pers.  pron.  2d  p.  sing.  m.  thou. 
xnx  Fut.  W1 ,  ,  etc.  to  come. 

Aph.  WX  and  in  the  bibl.  Chal¬ 
dee  to  cause  to  come ,  bring. 


126 


ana 


Pass,  of  a  peculiar  form,  (a  kind 
of  Hophal,)  Wii  to  be  brought , 
Dan.  3:13,  6  :  18. 

xnx  f.  (In  sing.  Dec.  VII.  a.  but  in 
pause  321X ;  PI.  1H233  Dec.  II.  a.) 
a  woman ;  a  wife. 

I.  1*!Fix  pers.  pron.  2  pi.  m.  ye  ;  you. 

II.  c.  g.  Dec.  I.  a.,  furnace,  oven. 
inx  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  place. — il  lfl& 

where. 

a 

2  prep,  in;  by ;  with. 

113*1X2  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fem.  XU33X2  Dec. 

VII.  a.  evil,  wicked. 

113X2  to  be  bad.  b2  113X2  to  displease. 
Aph.  to  do  in  a  bad  or  disagree¬ 
able  manner. 

inxa  prep.  i.  q.  122  after. 

V32  prep,  on  account  of.  1  V32  conj. 
because. 

bbl2  idem.  i  bb32  la  because  ;  so 
that,  rta  bbsa  “ja  why  ? 
biia  idem.  1  biia  so  that ;  that,  ut. 
P'12  to  inquire ,  investigate. 

112  Pa.  to  scalier,  disperse. 
sib^na  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  haste,  quickness. 
iibinaa  quickly. 

I.  b22  Pa.  to  terrify,  lthpa.  pass. 

II.  bna  Pa.  to  hasten.  Ithpe.  Inf. 
nblnann ,  as  a  noun,  haste. 

xniia  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  and 

xnp2  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  shame  ;  modesty. 

n*i2  to  lodge,  pass  a  night. 

Tt2  to  spoil,  plunder  ;  to  depopulate. 
“Prt2  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  choice,  excellent. 
baa  to  cease.  Pa.  to  cause  to  cease. 
12  sep.  prep.  i.  q.  2  in,  etc.  See  also 
under  ni2 . 

*p2  and  1312  prep,  between,  among. 
It  takes  the  suffixes  of  both  singu¬ 
lar  and  plural  nouns. 

.2312  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  understanding, 
intelligence. 

Xlia  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  palace. 

U3i2  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  bad,  evil. 


n?2  m.  irreg.  Emph.  X2i2 ,  X2i2 
(i2  Ex.  7  :  21,  Pseudo-Jon.);  const, 
nia  ;  plur.  Vpa  etc.  like  Dec.  IV. 
a  house;  the  place  in  which  any 
thing  is  contained  or  kept;  e.  g. 
x^tiy  r^a  treasury,  Xii5&  212  cir 
chives. 

X32  to  weep. 

ba  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  heart. 

XP2  to  wear  out ;  met.  to  afflict,  op¬ 
press.  Pa.  idem. 

iba  verbal  from  xba ,  excise,  tax  on 
articles  consumed. 

“,2  (In  the  Targums  found  only  in 
the  plural),  see  12 . 

232  to  build;  to  rebuild ,  restore.  Ith¬ 
pe.  pass. 

“£12  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  building ,  structure , 
verbal  from  232 . 

t  : 

232  to  be  angry. 

xiisa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  message,  annun¬ 
ciation. 

222  to  seek  ;  to  ask,  request. 

*i22  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  request ,  petition. 
*1222  is  taken  as  an  adv.  or  interj. 
I  entreat,  quaes o ;  often  followed 
by  jp  ;  as  ^22  *1222,  I  beseech  thee. 

1122  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  brute  ;  cattle  ; 
beasts  of  burden. 

b22  or  b22  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  lord ,  mas¬ 
ter  ;  husband. 

122  and  Pa.  122  to  burn;  to  consume. 

H2p2  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  valley. 

i|?2  Pa.  to  seek,  search.  Ithpa.  idem. 

12  or  12  m.  a  son ,  irreg.  emph.  X12  , 
with  suff.  T]12 ,  2112 ;  plur.  ‘piia 
(from  *j2),  emph.  X^32,  (with  pros¬ 
thetic  X  ,  X32X  ,)  const.  132  ;  with 
suff.  132,  t]i32  or  7(32 ,  133132.  In 
various  combinations  it  has  the 
force  of  the  Heb.  *j2  q.  v.  in  Lex 
Heb. 

12  ,  X12  without,  ( foras ,  —  Heb. 
p*in);  12  12  prep,  besides,  except ; 
as  a  subst.  that  which  is  without, 
the  field. 

XI 2  to  create.  Ithpe.  pass. 


127 


G13 


nn 


?J72  to  kneel.  Pa.  7|72  to  bless ,  praise. 

T{72  and  7}7S  £  Dec.  III.  b.  knee. 
ten's  and  it37 2  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  bless- 

r  r  :  ▼  :  • 

ing ,  benediction. 

D7s  adv.  certainly ;  indeed ;  also, 
moreover  ;  conj.  yet ,  bat. 

“ib2  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  flesh. 
ns  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  bath,  a  liquid 
measure,  equal  to  seven  and  a  half 
gallons. 

ns  f.  a  daughter ,  irreg.  Emph.  fit773 

7  T  ! 

(comp.  Syr.  ,  const.  2773,  with 

suff.  7|77S ;  pi.  “J3S ,  (from  fit22  ;) 
const.  nas  ■  emph.  fitnas  . 

pi-  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  virginity. 

773  prep,  after.  With  suff.  it  takes 
a  plur.  form  ;  as  ^"ains. 

hi 

J 

22  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  back ;  surface.  by 
sa  and  Tna  by  upon. 

32  and  pia ,  (with  suff.  hsa ,  7jSa) 
prep,  with  ;  subject  to,  penes. 
sa  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  pit,  den ;  pit  for 
water,  cistern. 

«7*oa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  courage  ; 
strength  ;  power. 

732  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  (PI.  *p73a  and 
1'17Sa  as  if  from  75a.)  a  man  ;  a 
male. 

*pnS7a  (with  the  flat  pronunciation), 
i.  q.  p73ta . 

77a  to  cut  off ;  to  cut  down  a  tree. 

■na  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  PI.  p7a  and 
p7a,  a  kid. 

la  or  la  m.  irreg.  const,  12 ;  with  suff 
Jpa,  '^3-5  midst.  ~ias  among  ;  in. 
.<12  idem. 

nia  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  pride. 
n^a  and  Aph.  rpait  to  go  forth  ;  to 
burst  or  break  forth. 

N7Siia  (not  found  in  abs.  sing.)  m. 
Dec.  II.  a.  a  coal. 

7Sta  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  treasurer.  PL 
pnsta  and  p7s?a. 


□its  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  threatener  ;  avenger. 
7ta  to  cut  off ;  to  decree.  Ithpe.  to  be 
cut  off,  detached. 

7tS  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  astrologer,  diviner , 
lit.  Part,  from  7ta,  one  who  utters 
a  decree.  Comp,  also  fit7ta  ,fate. 
fit 7 1 a  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  decree  ;  thing  de¬ 
creed  ;  in  Rab .fate,  destiny. 

“7 a  to  laugh  ;  to  deride. 
fit  ■’a  or  “’a  m.  irreg.  (pi.  7Pfip2)  a  val¬ 
ley. 

DS!"pa  or  3272,  (compounded  of  “’a  a 
valley,  and  327  prop,  n.)  the  valley 
of  Hinnom,  where  children  were 
passed  through  the  fire  to  Moloch  ; 
hence,  met.,  hell,  the  place  of  future 
and  eternal  punishment. 

7 pa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  stranger ,  a 
foreigner. 

S^a  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  chalk,  lime ;  plas¬ 
tering  of  a  wall. 

fitba  ,  7ba  and  "'ba  to  emigrate,  go  into 
captivity ;  to  reveal,  make  mani¬ 
fest.  Praet.  Pass,  ‘’ba  and  P>a  Dan. 
2:19,  30.  Aph.  *^27  to  carry  cap¬ 
tive. 

baba  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  wheel. 

*iba  f.  D  ec.  VII.  c.  captivity. 
bba  m.  found  only  in  the  phrase  'JSfit 
bba,  prob.  lapis  devolutionis ,  a 
stone  which  cannot  be  carried,  but 
must  be  rolled,  on  account  of  its 
great  size.  LXX,  choice  stones. 
7^32  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  perfect. 

*J4  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  and 
fitsa  f.  irreg.  (emph.  fit722  and  fitl-iaa  , 
frequently  in  Targ.  Pseudo-Jon. 
fitrppsa  or  fitn^pa^a  ,  const.  72a ;  pi. 
*jSa) ;  a  garden. 

T?a  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  treasure. 

3]2  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  wing. 
m c-  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  vine  ;  a  vine¬ 
yard. 

27a  and  Pa.  27a  to  excite,  stir  up. 

^7a  Pa.  to  rouse ,  excite.  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  pass,  and  refl. 

372  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  bone. 


128 


ini 


DUSa  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and  c.  body . 
na  f.  pr.  n.  of  a  principal  city  among 
the  Philistines,  Gath. 

1 

■n  rel.  pron.  =Heb.  ^’x,  who ,  etc.; 
conj.  that ,  so  that  ;  because ,  etc.; 
sign  of  the  Possessive  or  Genitive 
case. 

X'n  f.  demonst.  pron.  this  ;  that. 

5ft  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  a  bear. 

ZSft  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  enmity,  XiQ'n  bsa 
an  enemy. 

WIM  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  enmity. 

IW  (comp.  Gram.  Intr.  4.  note  2.)  to 
offer  sacrifices, 
nin'n  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  sacrifice. 

to  adhere ,  cleave  to. 

-.n'n  and  Pa.  to  lead ,  conduct ; 

to  govern  ;  to  take ,  receive. 
inn1*  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  cause.  Vft'Dft  b'S 
^  so  that. 

and  Xib'n  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  bee. 

▼  T  “  T  2 

SH'n  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  gold. 

T|*"n  to  deride. 

m.  Dec.  II.  a.  and  tiin'n  Dec.  III. 

b.  honey. 

T>Yn  m.  pr.  n.  David. 

■paw  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  memory ;  a  me¬ 
morial. 

Vn  and  ‘p'n  to  judge  ;  to  adjudge  ;  to 
contend. 

pTn  to  be  broken  in  pieces. 

W  to  dwell. 

X^’n  Dura ,  a  plain  in  Babylonia, 
Dan.  3 :  1. 

lliVn  to  tread  underfoot ,  trample  upon; 
to  crush. 

rnn.'n  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  found  only  Dan. 
6  :  19,  according  to  Buxtorf  and 
the  Hebrew  interpreters  generally, 
an  instrument  of  mitsic,  from  ttrt’n 
to  strike.  Gesenius  renders  it  a 

concubine ,  comparing  the  Ar. 
subegit  feminam,  and  the  old  ver¬ 
sions  food ,  conjecturally. 


to  fear.  It  refers  both  to  rever¬ 
ence  toward  God,  and  to  dread ,  as 
of  an  enemy,  etc.  Pa.  to  ter¬ 
rify. 

xbrn  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a  .fear ;  terror. 

pln'n  to  press ,  urge. 

^  =*n  which  see;  also  as  a  disjunc¬ 
tive,  but;  it  is  sometimes  redun¬ 
dant  like  the  Greek  on  in  the  be¬ 
ginning  of  an  address,  as  Dan. 
2  :  25. 

W  and  signs  of  the  Genitive 
case,  contracted  from  ^  and  b  "'I . 

*H,  i-  q-  Tft,  q.  v. 

1^  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  judgment ;  justice, 
righteousness  ;  judicial  trial ;  the 
reckoning  or  account ,  given  by  men 
of  their  actions  in  the  day  of  judg¬ 
ment,  Gen.  3  :  18,  Pseudo-Jon. ; 
punishment. 

■j^n  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  judge. 

m.  pi.  Dinailes,  one  of  the  na¬ 
tions  which  settled  Samaria.  Ez. 
4  :  9. 

W  m.  Dec.  I.  an  inhabitant ;  a  so- 

T  “ 

journer ,  stranger. 

tth-i  m.  Dec.  III.  c.  treading  under 
foot. 

Tpi  m.  T(n  f.  and  c.  g.  demon, 
pron.  this. 

“iD'n  (Heb.  ,  Intr.  4.  note  2.)  to 
remember. 

la'n  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  ram. 

nai'-D'n  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 
▼  :  • 

‘fia'n  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  record ,  memorial , 
history. 

nwb'n  or  ‘itaVi'n  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (Lat. 
delator,)  calumniator ;  accuser. 

X^b'n  adv.  that  not ,  lest.  comp,  x^b . 

pbn  to  burn ,  intrans. 

Cn  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  blood. 

iWn  to  resemble.  Pa.  id. ;  to  think. 

Tjian  to  sleep. 

Til?  n  dem.  pron.  m.  this;  that. 

XS'n  and  nj'n  dem.  pr.  c.  g.  this  ;  that. 

bX’O'n  m.  pr.  n.  Daniel. 

TjS'n  to  go  out ,  be  extinguished. 


129 


lb  n 


pp'n  to  be  broken  in  pieces.  Aph.  p^ix 
and  in  the  biblical  Chaldee  Pljn  to 
break  in  pieces. 

*Yn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  age,  generation. 
m.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  thistle. 

▼  :  - 

m.  pr.  n.  Darius. 

snn  i.  q.  Heb.  ?iiT ,  m.  Dec.  III.  a. 
and  Dec.  I.  a.  an  arm. 

r  : 

rrn  f.  Dec.  I.  law  ;  decree  ;  purpose  ; 
Xttbx  nti  religion ,  Dan.  6  :  6. 

T  T  v:  T  G  ' 

KM  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  young  tender 
herb. 

“GWn  m.  pi.  ■ppSM ;  juris  consultus, 
a  person  skilled  in  law,  judge ,  a 
Persian  word. 

ft 

n  interrogative  prefix,  as  in  Hebrew. 

Xp  and  Xp  interj.  behold  ! 

•ppmp  m.  pi.  minister  of  state,  a  Per¬ 
sian  word. 

aVMp  (Gr.  iStwriys,)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a 
low  person,  plebeian. — As  an  adj. 
low,  vulgar. 

cnp  Pa.  to  tear  in  pieces  ;  to  divide. 

opp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  piece,  fragment. 
i.  q.  “jp ;  adv.  then. 

■np  Pa.  mp  to  honor. 

xip  ,  «"pp  and  Mp,  to  be.  Fut.  KW, 
apoc.  W ,  ,  TJX ,  etc.  Fut.  with 

b  prefixed  drops  its  preformative 
i ,  and  is  employed  in  an  optative 
or  subjunctive  sense  ;  e.  g.  yip^b  5 
that  they  might  be,  Dan.  6  :  2,  3. 
See  Gram.  §  23,  note,  and  §  50.  2. 

X*in  pron.  pers.  and  demonst.  m.  he  ; 
this  ;  that. 

Tpn  fut.  Tin1!  to  go. 

ton  pron.  pers.  and  demonst.  f.  she ; 
it;  this ;  that. 

VPTP  dem.  pron.  i.  q.  ;  adv.  then. 

Tpp  adv.  and  conj.  as ;  as  if.  Xpmp 
and  X3mp  id. 

^mp  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  temple  ;  palace. 

T^P,  see 

Tjbp  to  walk.  Pael  and  Ithpaal,  id. 

9 


■jm 


Tj^p  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  toll  paid  by  passen¬ 
gers,  verbal  from  ^bp . 

xabn  and  xsbtt  adv.  hither. 

t  •  -  t  :  ▼ 

tap  and  *}iap  m.  pi.  pers.  pron.  3d 
pers.  they. 

T^SEp  or  ^iap  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  chain 
for  the  neck  or  arm.  Syr.  idem. 

“ip  adv.  i.  q.  "iX  where  ? 

*)p  conj.  and  adv.  if;  sign  of  a  ques¬ 
tion  (  =  p)  an,  num  ;  “]p  .  .  .  .  *jp 
whether  .  ...  or. 

TjSp  to  turn.  Ithpe.  refl. 

tairnp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  thought,  musing , 
cogitation. 

see  m3 . 

)  conj.  and;  but ;  &c.  as  in  Hebrew. 
But  Vav  conversive  does  not  ap¬ 
pear  in  Chaldee. 

T 

■jat  to  buy;  to  gain;  Pa.  “J3T  to  sell; 
Ithpa.  "(mix  to  be  sold;  to  be 
bought. 

“rpt  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  prudent,  cautious. 
Lit.  enlightened,  2d  part.  Peal 
from  “ipt  to  shine. 

yn  to  feed,  to  nourish.  Ittaph.  pass. 

3pT  to  tremble,  be  afraid. 

Aph.  Tpp  to  be  proud,  to  act 
proudly. 

3nt  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  splendor,  brightness ... 
’’piV’t  Dan.  5:6,  9,  lit.  his  splen¬ 
dors,  i.  e.  the  bright  and  cheerful 
appearance  of  his  countenance. 

up  to  be  clean,  pure;  to  be  just,  inno¬ 
cent. 

tot  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and  *Dt  Dec.  VIII. 
▼  : 

c.  purity  ;  justice  ;  righteousness. 

"'St ,  *1X3T  adj.  Dec.  VI.  pure,  inno¬ 
cent. 

XSM  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  sweat. 

m.  Dec.  III.  b.  time ,  period  of 
time. 


mn 


130 


■)53t  Pa.  to  appoint ,  prepare.  Ithpa. 

to  concert ,  agree  together. 
Aph.  "jEtn  idem,  Dan.  2 :  9,  Kethib. 
“na t  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  music. 

t  : 

153T  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  singer,  musician. 

■|T  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  species,  sort. 

■n$t  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  adv.  little,  a 
little. 

pat  to  cry  out. 

pipt  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  spark. 

P]pt  to  elevate  ;  to  suspend,  as  a  mal¬ 
efactor  on  a  gallows  or  cross. 

m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  girdle  ;  a  girded 
apron. 

Snt  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 
^ant  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  seed ;  posterity  ; 
Jamil y  ;  plur .families. 

n 

ribinn.  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  injury,  hurt. 
d^pn  and  man  adj.  Dec.  I.  beloved. 
ban  Pa.  to  injure ;  to  destroy,  waste, 
overthrow.  Ithpa.  to  be  destroyed. 
ban  m.  pr.  n.  Abel. 
ban  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 

T  I 

ban  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  hurt,  injury. 
nan  and  nan  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  com¬ 
panion. 

nan  to  associate,  unite ;  to  put  to¬ 
gether,  compose.  Ithpa.  to  associate 
themselves,  join  together. 
nnan  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  fem.  of  nan  .  fe¬ 
male  companion. 

nn ,  in  pause  nn,  fem.  Nnn,  num. 
adj.  one;  first ;  before  numerals, 
time,  times ;  e.  g.  ba  nsaiii  nn , 
seven  times  more  than,  lit.  seven 
times  above,  Dan.  3  :  19. 

I.  Nnn  adv. once,  frona  together,  Nnnb 
very  much,  exceedingly. 

II.  Nnn  to  rejoice ,  be  joyful.  Aph.  to 
cause  to  rejoice ,  to  please,  gratify. 

ninn  f  Dec.  VII.  a  .joy,  gladness. 
"pan  m.  plur.  Dec.  II.  b.  breast. 
nnn  adj.  Dec.  III.  a.  (i.  q.  Heb.  ttinn) 
new. 


Nip  and  pip  to  tell,  declare;  to  make 
manifest.  Aph.  idem. 
ain  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 
Nain  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  guilt ,  crime  ; 
debt. 

nun  to  speak  in  enigmas  ;  to  propose 
(a  riddle). 

Nnin  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 

T 

“insin  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  riddle,  an  enig¬ 
ma. 

nnn  f.  pr.  n.  Eve. 

ain  to  sew.  Aph.  to  repair ;  e.  g.  a 
wall,  Ez.  4  :  12. 

nain  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  a  staff,  a  rod. 
Npip  and  N^ip  m.  irreg.  PI.  pp  ;  a 

serpent. 

bin  and  bin  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  profane  ; 
common. 

N^bin  m.  emph.  (found  only  in  this 
form  and  with  suff.  “pbin)j  sweet¬ 
ness. 

nip  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  white. 

“jaaiin  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  and 

jabin  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  act  of  thinking ; 

reckoning  ;  account. 

Ntn  to  see. 

r 

ftp  m.  Dec.  III.  c.  vision  ;  aspect,  ap¬ 
pearance. 

if’P  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and  itp  Dec.  VIII. 
c.  (with  suff.  nnitp  Dan.  4:8,) 
idem. 

Nap  m.  (pi.  *pNap,  const.  “’Nan ,  with 
suff.  T^an ,  p'a^Nap }  a  sin. ' 

Nan  to  err,  to  sin. 

nsjan  f.  Dec.  IX.  a  sin-offering. 

Span.  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  violence  ;  plunder, 
rapine. 

aan  to  sew,  Pa.  idem. 

•>n  adj.  Dec.  IV.  a.  living. 

N“Jp  and  n^p  to  live.  Aph.  jiart.  Npa 
preserving  alive. 

Nl^p  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  beast ,  animal. 
•pn  pi.  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (But  tpfp  and 
\*p  occur  instead  of  the  regular 
absolute  form,)  life. 
b?p  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  strength ; 
host. 


a 


131 


a^an  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  wise  ;  as  a  noun, 
wise  man ,  Magian. 

Ban  and  Pael  Ban  and  B'lan  to  be 
wise  ;  to  understand. 

Naan  or  M5W  (pron.  hhukhma,)  f. 

Dec.  VII.  a.  wisdom. 

">bn  and  ‘’bn  adj.  Dec.  III.  sweet. 
abn  m.  Dec.  III.  c.  a  dream. 
wjbn  to  change  ;  to  be  changed  ;  to 
pass  through  ;  to  pass ,  spoken  of 
time. 

,  (in  the  Jerusalem  dialect 
and  &]bin)  prep,  instead  of. 
m.  Dec.  I.  a.  part,  lot. 
an  m.  a  father-in-law ,  irreg.  with 
suff.  wan ,  ^si»n . 

Nan  to  contemplate  ;  to  see. 

Nan  and  Nan  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  heat: 

r  :  t  v*  y 

anger. 

pan  to  vex ;  to  grieve. 
nan  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  wine. 
r®  pi.  wheat. 
nabn.fr Dec.  VII.  a.  dedication,  conse- 
cration. 

",5 n  to  compassionate,  show  favor  to. 

Ithpa.  to  pray,  make  supplication. 
■“nan  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  defective. 

■j&n.'and  Aph.  “(Bni*  to  possess,  to  have 
in  possession. 

*]Bn  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  power,  might. 
y)&n  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  clay ;  potter’s 
work. 

non  to  be  deficient  or  lacking.  Pa.  to 
diminish  ;  to  depress. 
n^n;  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  harvest. 

C]Sn  and  Aph.  to  urge,  hasten.  Part. 

Aph.  ^Nnna  urgent,  hasty. 
bjan  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  afield. 
anri  to  devastate.  Hoph.  pass, 
ann  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  sword. 

“paann  m.  pi.  Dec.  IV.  c.  di¬ 
viners,  Magians ,  from  the  Persian 

O  ^  0 

a  wise  man ;  or  from 

Heb.  ann  ,  persons  skilled  in  hie¬ 
roglyphics. 

Tjnn  to  singe,  burn.  Ithpa.  Pass. 


pnn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  loin,  thigh. 
nnn  to  burn;  to  be  hot. 

Tptijn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  darkness. 

Tpian  and  TplBn.  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  poor , 
indigent. 

man  to  think  necessary,  with  b  and 
Inf. ;  to  be  necessary. 

I.  bttjn  to  be  thin;  to  make  thin  or 
small ;  to  crush.  Pa.  idem. 

II.  bdn  to  think ;  to  reckon  to  the  ac¬ 
count  of  any  one,  to  impute.  Pa. 
to  regard.  Ithpa.  pass. 

ann.  to  seal. 

BNa  to  be  glad,  joyful. 

aa  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fern.  Naa  Dec.  VII. 

t  a  tt 

a.  good  ;  beautiful. 
naa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  executioner,  armed 
attendant. 

a^a  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  goodness ,  excellence  ; 
happiness. 

n^ia  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  mountain;  a  rock. 
Heb.  -rtS . 

nia  adj.  fasting.  Ar.  to  fast. 

b^a  Pa.  to  go  out;  to" walk  abroad. 

Palpel  baba  to  cast  out ;  to  remove . 
*pa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  clay. 
ba  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  dew. 

^ba  m.  irreg.  empb.  fcoba ;  plur. 
“pba,  fpba;  emph.  N^ba ,  w<ba  ; 
with  suff.  “’Pba  Gen.  22  :  3,  Pseudo- 
Jon.  ;  a  boy,  a  servant. 
bba  to  hide.  Aph.  to  recline  for  rest 
under  the  shade. 
pba  to  throw  away. 
naa  and  Pa.  naa  to  hide.  Ithpe. 
naaN  and  naa-iN ,  and  Ithpa.  naaK 
to  hide  one’s  self. 

ns  a  to  err,  to  wander.  Aph.  to  cause 
to  err,  to  seduce. 

as  a  to  taste ;  to  eat.  Pa.  to  give  to 
eat,  to  feed. 

DSa  and  asa  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  taste , 
particularly  pleasant  taste;  wis¬ 
dom,  Dan.  2 : 14 ;  command ,  edict; 


132 


'ft* 


cause  for  trial,  Ez.  5:5;  reckon¬ 
ing ,  account ,  Dan.  6:3;  regard , 
respect ;  bp  dpd  d^b ,  Zo  regard , 
Dan.  3  : 12.  ddd  bsa  chancellor, 
lit.  master  of  decrees. 

I.  “iso  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  ?zai7,  of  a  hu¬ 
man  finger  or  toe ;  claw. 

II.  d5d  m.  Dec.  III.  emph.  fctdsi|d, 
the  blatta ,  a  shell-fish  of  a  purple 
color. 

ddd  to  expel,  drive  out. 
pdd  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  leaf. 
sobsdd  m.  plur.  emph.  proper  name 
of  a  nation  settled  in  Samaria, 
origin  unknown,  Ez.  4:9.  LXX. 
TapcfaXcuoL. 

bd"?  Aph.  bd'dd  to  bring. 
nbm  f.  Dec.  III.  c.  the  dry  land. 
m  f.  a  hand,  irreg.  Emph.  fctm  and 
with  prosthetic  ,  with  suff. 

mm  C’l'ma  Prov.  21:1.) 
■pid’m  ,  *pdm  j  (dual  *pm  0  plur. 

VTt  '• 

£*d^  Aph.  Part,  Sdina  and  Kdra 

praybig,  praising. 

3>m  to  know ;  to  understand.  Aph. 

ddin  to  show,  declare,  make  known. 
dp?  to  give;  hence  to  set,  place. 

Ithpe.  pass. ;  to  be  given  up. 
mm  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  Jewish  people, 
the  Jews. 

rn>im  m.  proper  name,  Judah. 

■’mm  m.  Dec.  VI.  a  Jew.  PI.  emph. 
srmm . 

••  t  : 

dl'i  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  day.  PI.  const, 
fem.  na'P  and  masc.  “’a*’ . 

r  ••  • 

p3in  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  sucking  child, 
suckling. 

w'ldi’1  m.  proper  name,  Joseph. 

“•mm  Dec.  I.  or  ^mm  adj.  Dec.  VI. 

only,  alone. 

dm  Fut.  dm?  to  be  good;  to  seem 
good ,  bp  .  to  any  one,  to  be  pleas¬ 
ing. 


m  an  abbreviation.  See  Chrestoma- 
thy,  p.  92. 

bm  and  bm ,  Fut.  b>!d*?  (and  like  the 
Heb.  bd*p  Jud.  14  : 13.)  to  be  able  ; 
to  prevail. 

rtf  to  bear ,  bring  forth  ;  sometimes 
to  beget. 

d m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  a  sea,  the  sea. 

to  add.  Hoph.  Heb.  form,  ppm 
to  be  added. 

dp1?  to  advise,  counsel.  Part,  a  coun- 
sellor.  Ithpa.  to  consult  together. 
dpp?  m.  proper  name,  Jacob. 
nap  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  proper  name,  Ja- 
pheth. 

N2P  Shaphel  xmb  and  "mb  to  finish. 
dm  to  be  certain ,  true.  Pa.  to  tell 
the  truth. 

dm  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  true,  certain;  con¬ 
firmed.  valid,  d*m  “jd  certainly,  of 
a  truth. 

dp^  1°  burn  (neut.),  be  consumed. 

Aph.  to  burn  (act.),  consum£  ”* 
!ddp?  ^  Dec*  "VII.  a.  burning. 
d“ip^  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  hard,  difficult ; 

honored ,  honorable,  noble. 
dp “i  to  be  or  be  esteemed  honorable  or 
valuable  ;  i.  q.  Pa.  to  honor.  Aph. 
idem. 

dp1]  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  honor ;  splendor ; 
glory.  Sometimes  it  has  K  pros¬ 
thetic. 

dbbm  and  dbb>m  Jerusalem. 
nm  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  month. 

Tfif.  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  pi.  *jdm ,  thigh. 
badb?  m.  proper  name,  Israel;  the 
people  of  Israel. 

db^  in  Peal  not  used.  Aph.  mbiit 
to  stretch  forth,  reach  out. 
m ,  Heb.  fix,  sign  of  the  Objective 
or  Accusative  case, 
dm  or  d^m  to  sit ;  to  reside,  stay. 
Aph.  d^niii  to  place ,  cause  to 
dwell. 

mm  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  abundant ,  great , 
eminent ;  adv.  mm  and  Kd">m 
very,  exceedingly. 


r 


1 5 13  133  b 


33?  to  remain ,  be  left.  Pa.  3537  to 
make  to  abound ,  to  cawse  abund¬ 
ance. 

'D 

3  prep,  and  conj. ;  ZxArd ;  as,  as 
though. 

3X3,  3X3,  S^S  and  33  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 

grief  sorrow. 

333  adj.  Dec.  III.  b.  (i.  q.  Heb. 

313 ,)  false. 

*j733  ,T 133  and  133  adv.  (  =  Heb.  xj) 
now.  yHSI  now  therefore. 

■jins  adv.  so,  thus,  *p333  id.  ,p33l 

now  therefore. 

Pi3  adv.  now.  133  *13  hitherto. 

r  T  ~  • 

Vns>  to  be  able.  Const,  with  V  and 
'inf. 

13  f.  Dec.  IV.  a.  window. 

“p313  (only  in.  pi.)  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 
thorns. 

3313  ^sometimes  written  33i3,)m. 
Dec.  II.  a.  a  star. 

*j13  Pa.  to  confirm,  establish  ;  to  make 
vigorous  efforts.  Ithpa.  pass. ;  also, 
as  Pa.  to  endeavor  earnestly. 

313  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  cor,  a  measure  for 
things  liquid  or  dry,  equal  to  the 
homer  or  to  ten  ephahs,  supposed 
to  contain  about  eight  bushels. 
fcjW'a,  see  t)133. 

333  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  talent. 

333  Kethib  Ez.  7  :  22,  idem. 

Vs,  Vs,  xV'3,  xVs,  ^13,  adj.  =  Heb. 
V'3  ,  all,  the  whole,  every. 

I.  VV3  Shaph.  VV3i3  to  complete,  fin¬ 
ish.  Ishtaph.  VbsfitSX  pass. 

II.  V?3  and  Aph.  bbax  to  crown ; 
met.  to  adorn. 

Xtt3,  ri33  and  *’£3  conj.  and  adv. 

how!  quam  !  as;  3  Xia3  like. 

*j3,  I*' 3  adv.  rightly;  thus.  *j33 
then  ;  therefore  ;  thus. 

“(153  m.  pi.  with  fem.  form,  Dec.  VII. 

a.  colleagues.  LXX.  avvSovXoi. 
3153  and  353  m.  Dec.  I.  a  harp.  Gr. 
KLvvpa,  Lat.  cinyra. 


XE53  adv.  i.  q.  1 3  thus. 

*]353  m.  proper  name,  Canaan. 

1M3  to  collect,  act.  Ithpe.  to  assemble, 
to  meet. 

‘’333  m.  Dec.  VI.  i.  q.  *’3133  a  Chal¬ 
dean. 

XG3,  H33  and  ‘’SS  to  lie  hid,  to  be 
concealed.  Pa.  to  hide,  conceal; 
i.  q.  Peal. 

C]153  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  feeling  of  shame; 
ignominy. 

3)33  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  silver. 

*j23  adv.  now.  *j33  33  until  now. 

3,3  c.  g.  Dec.  IV.  a.  a  hollow ;  the 
palm  of  the  hand  ;  the  sole  of  the 
foot. 

‘,33  to  hunger.  Aph.  to  cause  or  suf¬ 
fer  another  to  be  hungry. 

353  Pa.  to  wash ;  to  purify  ceremo¬ 
nially  ;  to  atone,  make  expiation. 

P33  to  bind.  Pa.  idem. 

X33  to  be  grieved.  Ithpe.  and  Ithpa. 
idem. 

xb333  f  Dec.  VIII.  a.  mantle ,  cloak. 

▼  :  :  -  J 

3133  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  cherub. 

Ti33  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  herald. 

T 

733  to  proclaim ,  make  proclamation. 
Aph.  idem. 

D33  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  vineyard. 

X333  m.  Dec.  V.  a.  a  throne.  PL 
11333  . 

“>3133  m.  Dec.  VI.  pi.  X?3i33 ,  a  Chal¬ 
dean ;  as  astrology  flourished  prin¬ 
cipally  in  Chaldea,  an  astrologer. 

3133  to  be  right;  to  be  fit;  to  be 
agreeable,  to  please. 

3133  and  3133  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  II. 
a.  right ;  just,  upright ;  fit ;  legiti¬ 
mate. 

3P3  to  write. 

3n3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  writing ;  prescrip¬ 
tion,  limitation ,  Ez.  7  :  22. 

bn3  and  brb  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  a  wall. 

b 

V  prep,  as  in  Hebrew,  to  ;  for;  of; 
V  .  .  . .  ■pa  between — and. 


134 


ss  na 


N  12 


£<b  adv.  not ;  nothing ,  Dan.  4  :  32. 
ttbn  and  fcfbfi  nonne?  also,  ecce  / 
Zo  /  Gram.  §  68.  3. 
fi£<b  and  Ijob  .  see  ttHb  and  125b  . 

t  :  ,  -  r  : 

25  or  225  m.  the  heart ,  irreg.  Emph. 
N2b  :  with  suff.  ,  22b  N32b  , 

t  •  *  •  *>  I  t  G  tt.7 

etc.;  plur.  emph.  N*EEb ;  with  suff. 
•jin  5  2b . 

ttil2b  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  clothing ;  a  gar¬ 
ment. 

*p2b2b  f.  plur.  plants  ;  flowers. 

XO 2b  to  clothe  one’s  self.  Aph.  to 
clothe. 

•jrrb  conj.  therefore ,  with  prosthetic  N , 
■jHbtt  ;  comp,  of  xb  and  ,  except 
(comp.  Lat.  nisi  f)  but)  sed. 

-Jib  to  curse. 

“'ib  m.  Dec.  VI.  a  Levite.  Plur.  fcPib  . 
IH^ib  m.  a  sea-monster,  leviathan. 

Hi  5  prep,  to  ;  toward  ;  with. 
b"b  and  xb^b  m.  irreg.  emph.  K^b^b  ; 
plur.  “jlb^b  •  night. 

H-'b  a  contraction  for  HPi<  i<b  ,  there 

•*  •  r  / 

is  not  ;  there  are  not. 

21~b  adv.  and  prep,  alone ;  only  ; 
also.  It  is  strictly  a  noun,  loneli¬ 
ness  ;  hence  with  2,  \“}i2inb2,  in 
his  loneliness ,  i.  e.  he  alone. 

CHb  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  bread. 
cnb  m.  a  feast ,  Dan.  5 :  1. 

HiDHb  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  concubine. 

IKEb  and  Hrab  (as  a  noun,  nothing ,) 
adv.  not ;  lest.  KEb2  that  not : 
lest. 

W>b  or  Hxb  to  labor ,  toil  ;  to  be  fa¬ 
tigued  with  labor. 

12-ib  or  l^b  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  labor  ;  fa¬ 
tigue. 

tabsb  adv.  forever. 

■j^b  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  tongue. 

53 

•E  and  before  gutturals  2  ,  prefix,  i.  q. 
the  sep.  prep.  *JE  . 

W2 ,  fra  or  "HE  (with  Daghesh  forte 


euphonic  in  the  first  letter  of  the 
next  word,)  interrog.  pron.  what  ? 
It  is  sometimes  used  adverbially, 
how?  also  in  exclamations  how! 
qudm !  KE3  as;  how!  KEb  and 
KEb  whither?  why?  ^2  ne  that 
which. 

HXE  fem.  num.  a  hundred.  Dual 
‘pEKE. 

"pSTlXE  m.  dual,  scales,  balance. 

“iexe,  more  common  orthography, 
2E^E ,  q.  v. 

-(SE  and  -|E  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  vessel;  an 
instrument ;  a  garment ,  (  =  Heb. 
^b3 .) 

“jHHEE  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  shameful; 
ashamed. 

212E  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  fountain. 
nbnE  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  roll,  book. 

2a e  Pa.  to  throw  down ,  destroy. 

H22E  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  an  altar. 

Hi2E  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  tax,  tribute 4  By 
a  resolution  of  Daghesh  forte  into 
Nun,  it  is  sometimes  written  H23E, 
Ez.  4:13. 

212E  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  residence. 

-|2e  m.  pr.  n.  Dec.  VI.  Media;  a 

Mede. 

His^e  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  province  ;  land, 
country. 

H32E  or  ns2E  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  the  east, 
(lit.  the  rising,  viz.  of  the  sun.) 
222E  (found  only  in  this  form)  indef. 
pron.  any  thing. 

22E  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  dwelling,  residence, 

i.  q.  212E  . 

Hie  see  ne  . 

▼  r 

HHpiE  f.  pr.  n.  Moriah,  a  hill  in  Jeru¬ 
salem. 

HIE  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  death ;  a  deadly 
pestilence. 

HIE  or  H*^  to  die. 

yiTE  ,  emph.  iOitE  food;  sustenance. 
NHE  and  HHe  to  strike;  to  wound. 
Pa.  NHE  idem;  also  to  restrain. 
Ithpe.  to  be  fastened  or  nailed . 
Ez.  6 : 11. 


135 


*1153 


xpbriE  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  course  or 
class  of  the  priests  or  Levites. 
JOE  and  fittE  to  come,  arrive :  to 
reach  ;  with  ??  .  Zo  come  zqoow,  6e- 
jfaZZ/  happen  to  a  person. 
bOE  prep,  ozz  account  of;  ‘n  bOE 
because ,  since. 
bs^E  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  food. 


“ie^e  or  iexe  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  word , 
speech  ;  command.  With  suff  it 
sometimes  signifies  self  like  the 
Heb.  &5s5  .  So  also  ^  JOE^E  the 

vv  t  j  ■  t  ; 

Lord ,  Jehovah . 

m.  irreg.,  emph.  JOE ,  const. 
^E  and  sometimes  “’E^E,  water , 
waters. 

"i STE  m.  Dec.  II.  a  verbal  from  , 
a  plain ,  a  valley. 

to  depress ,  humble;  to  crush. 
Pa.  idem. 


xbE  to  fill.  Ithpe.  pass. 

TjXbE  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  an  angel. 
fibE  *f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  PI.  ykn ,  word, 
speech;  thing. 
nbE  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  salt. 
nbE  denom.  from  the  preceding,  in 
the  Targums,  to  salt ,  to  season  with 
salt,  in  bibl.  Chaldee  only  Ez. 
4:14,  prob.  to  eat  salt ,  to  derive 
support.  According  to  the  He¬ 
brew  commentators  to  devastate , 
destroy,  derived  from  the  fact  that 
salt  land  is  generally  waste,  bar¬ 
ren  ;  or  from-  the  custom  of  sowing 
the  site  of  a  devastated  city  with 
salt. 

TjbE  or  “bE  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  king . 
rfm  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  advice ,  counsel. 
nabs  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  queen. 

*sbE  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  a  kingdom  ;  do¬ 
minion,  reign. 
b bE  Pa.  to  speak. 

’|E  and  *]E  interrog.  pron.  who?  what? 

“JE  whoever. 

■|E  prep,  from ;  of,  out  of;  some  of 
(comp,  the  French  du) ;  because 
of;  rather  than,  in  preference  to; 


after  an  adjective,  than. — fre¬ 
quently  takes  after  it  the  charac¬ 
teristic  prefix  of  the  Gen.  or  Dat. 
case,  which  is  then  pleonastic  ;  as 
nwa ,  Gen.  49  :  10,  i.  q.  n^E  ; 
■pEnpb  “(E  ,  Gen.  3  :  24,  Jer.  Targ. 
i.  q.  :tWj5  -,e.— 1 ^  *jE  because , 
since.  —  2PS'p“]E  truly.  —  uiljp“,]E 
idem.  With  suffixes  *jE  takes  Da- 
ghesh  forte  ;  as  "'2E  . 

JOE  to  number ,  reckon.  Pa.  "'SE  ,  •'SE 
and  “>2e  to  constitute,  appoint. 

n'-OE  i.  q.  n'nE ,  q.  v. 

3>-EE  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  verbal  from  2H? , 
(i.  q.  Heb.  S’nE ,  the  Daghesh  forte 
being  resolved  into  Nun.  S'HE  al¬ 
so  occurs  in  the  Targums,  e.  g. 
Jer.  3 : 15,)  knowledge,  intelligence  ; 
the  understanding,  the  mind. 

n373  i.  q.  JOE  . 

HJE  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  rest;  quietness ,  si¬ 
lence. 

nriSE  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  gift ,  offering ; 
tribute. 

"pa a  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  number. 

OSOE  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  poverty,  want. 

JOE  c.  g.  irreg.  (with  suff.  TJ^E ,  pi. 
*p35E  or  ’jSE  ,)  the  belly,  venter.  PI. 
idem. 

bs>E  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  (verbal  from  bb?  to 
enter,)  setting  of  the  sun.  PI  .idem. 

tT'nSE  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  distinction;  di¬ 
vision. 

2SE  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  planting. 

JOSE  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  command ,  in- 
junction. 

siansa  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  middle,  midst. 

Dpi'SE  pr.  n.  Egypt. 

tti-ipE  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  sanctuary,  holy 
place. 

“ie  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 

T 

JOE  m.  Dec.  II.  b.  lord.  Syr.  and 
Arab.  idem. 

“i*iE  to  rebel ,  to  be  rebellious. 

-  •  / 

-na  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  rebellious. 

*i*na  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  correction ;  in¬ 
struction. 


136 


in  a 


ODD 


Dina  m.  Dec.  I.  a  height ,  eleva¬ 
tion. 

to  pluck  off. 

niaa  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  oil. 

rpiap  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (strictly  2d  Part, 
from  nwa  to  anoint, )  anointed; 
Messiah. 

Tj^a  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  skin. 

ns^a  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  bed. 

“(Sira  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  dwelling ;  a 
tent. 

tfnda  m.  Dec.  V.  a.  (strictly  Inf! 
from  S'llii)  a  resting. 

‘’pi'itija  £  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  flute ,  musi¬ 
cal  reed. 

•Hfittia  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  i.  q. 

*inffia  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  feast ;  a  ban¬ 
quet. 

nina  f.  Dec.  V.  a.  desire  ;  appetite. 

bna  to  compare;  to  use  similitudes . 

Heb.  bttja . 

^ra  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  parable,  simili¬ 
tude  ;  a  sententious  remark ,  a  pro¬ 
verb. 

■jna  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  and  “jria  Dec.  II.  a. 
a  gift;  a  reward,  "lax  *]na  a  gift 
of  a  reward ,  i.  e.  the  giving  of  a 
reward. 

SJPia  f  Dec.  VIII.  a.  (fem.  of  the 
preceding,)  a  present ,  gift. 

D 

S33  Ithpa.  *133ns  to  prophesy ;  to  ut¬ 
ter  (a  prophecy). 

JlSiaa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  prophecy  ;  pre¬ 
diction. 

natai  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  present ,  gift ; 
coll,  gifts  ;  plur.  patas . 

3033  and  S^aa  m.  irreg.  emph.  fcpaa ; 
plur.  ■papaa ;  emph.  fcpapsa  and 
;  with  suff.  Tp-23  ,  “’lipas  ; 
a  prophet. 

'Sianaa  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  candlestick. 

*333  to fow. 

*133  prep,  over  against;  toward. 


p*i33  (found  only  in  the  plur.  abs.) 
streams ,  rivers. 

•nab  m.  Dec.  Hi.  d.  brightness ,  light. 
of  the  morning. 

Tiaa,  T'aa  and  “P33  m.  Dec.  1.  a. 

leader ,  chief  prince. 
a1!?  Ithpa.  a'nanx  to  be  willing;  to 
do  willingly ;  to  give  voluntarily. 
Inf.  fiianann  as  a  noun,  that  which 

t-  : 

is  given  voluntarily ,  a  free-will-of¬ 
fering. 

Tfn“i3  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  row  of  stones ; 

structure;  wall. 

TT3  to  fee. 

yna  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  with  ft  parago- 
gic,  na'ia,  sheath  ;  met.  body ,  q.  d. 
sheath  of  the  soul, 
lima  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  light. 

*mna  f.  D  ec.  VII.  c.  illumination , 
wisdom. 

Cf]3  to  roar;  to  bellow  ;  to  groan. 

*ifna  to  shine  brightly.  Pa.  “i«i3  to  en¬ 
lighten.  Ithpa.  pass. 

*ip3  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  stream . 
nia  to  fee. 

nna  to  rest;  Aphel  to  cause  to 
rest ,  to  give  rest. 
lbl3  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and 
■'bib  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  dunghill. 
pa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  afsh. 

“1*13  m.  Dec.  I.  a .fre. 
pta  to  suffer  injury.  Aph.  p?3tt  or 
ptari  to  injure. 
tiana  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  brass. 

T  S 

nna  to  descend ,  go  down.  Aph.  rns , 
Fut.  nrp ,  Imp.  n ns  ,  to  bring 
down ,  carry  down ;  to  deposit. 
Hoph.  mnain  to  be  brought  down . 
deposed. 

*31123  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  observer,  one 

r  ' 

who  keeps  (e.  g.  a  law.) 
boa  to  lift  up ,  elevate. 

“1123  to  keep ,  preserve  ;  to  observe,  re¬ 
gard. 

rtrP3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  sweet  odor , 
hence  a n  acceptable  sacrifice. 

033 .  o?3  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  wealth  • 

"S'  ¥• 


137 


ms 


power ,  strength ,  of  body  or  mind. 
PL  riches. 
ns 3  6i7e. 

1»3  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  leopard. 

303  £o  take:  to  receive. 

H  X  _  _ 

rfp3  £o  take  away ,  remove  ;  to  pull 
asunder.  Ithpe.  pass. 
ijp3  and  Pa.  to  pour  out ;  to  offer. 

7|D3  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  libation ,  drink-of¬ 
fering. 

pp3  to  ascend.  Aph.  p“<pn  to  take  up, 
cause  to  ascend.  Hoph.  pop  pass, 
of  Aph. 

b23  Fut.  ^5?  to  fall ;  to  fall  down; 
to  be  thrown  down ;  to  fall  out,  hap¬ 
pen. 

p23  to  go  out,  to  depart ;  to  come 
forth. 

ap23  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  expense ,  cost. 

1323  or  £23  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 
30323  f.  Diec.  VII.  a.  life  ;  soul ;  self; 
a  living  being. 

33J3  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  planting ;  a 
plant. 

M2323  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  strength ,  solidity, 
firmness. 

iips  to  quarrel,  contend.  Pa.  id. 
n33  to  conquer ,  surpass,  prevail  over, 
be  superior  to.  Ithpe.  Pa.  and 
Ithpa.  idem. 

b:i3  to  liberate ,  deliver.  Aph.  idem. 
3<p3  and 

“>p3  adj.  Dec.  IV.  b.  pure. 
lbp3  to  smite,  strike. 

Kb3  to  take  ;  to  take  away.  Ithpa. 

to  rise  up  against,  with  b3> . 
iilps  to  forget;  Ithpe.  to  forget  ;  to  be 
forgotten. 

*pll53  irreg.  PI.  of  Knx  . 

3tpo33  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  breath,  life. 

"1333  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  an  eagle. 

*}lni23  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  letter,  public  let¬ 
ter.  Persian. 

*jn3  to  give.  Gram.  §  18.  note  2. 
ip3  to  fall  off,  as  leaves  or  fruit. 
Aph.  to  shake  or  strip  off. 


D 

3t32p  f.  Gr.  c TapfivKy,  sambuca ,  a 
three-cornered  stringed  instru¬ 
ment,  similar  to  the  harp, 
boo  to  erect.  Poal,  to  be  erected. 

*123  to  bear,  sustain  ;  to  expect,  Dan. 
7:25;  to  consider;  to  suppose; 
with  2 ,  to  hope  in. 

300  to  be  numerous  ;  to  be  increased. 
Aph.  to  cause  to  increase  ;  to  mul¬ 
tiply. 

130  to  fall  prostrate,  to  worship,  con¬ 
strued  with  b . 
pop  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  affliction. 

3030  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  much;  many. 

*j3p  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  deputy,  governor. 
130  to  shut  up. 

fiOQplO  f.  i.  q.  Greek  avp^oivia,  a 
bag-pipe. 

pio  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  end. 
plO  to  come  to  an  end,  to  be  fulfilled , 
spoken  of  a  prediction.  Aph.  to 
put  an  end  to  any  thing. 

1* *10  to  recede  ;  to  go  aside. 

■jnilO  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  perverseness ;  a 
crime. 

pnp  to  drive  out,  expel. 

Ipp  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  side  ;  extremity. 
irpO  m.  Dec.  II.  b.  the  moon. 

and  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  i.  q.  pio  , 
end,  extremity. 

bop  to  understand.  Ithpa.  bpnpx  to 

look  at;  to  reflect;  to  consider; 
const,  with  2,  nib  ,  etc. 

:  '  t  ;  J 

*]0p  to  try,  prove.  Ithpa.  and  Aph. 
idem. 

bop  adj.  Dec.  II.  &.  foolish,  unwise. 
•jnbpp  or  ‘jnbpio  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  intelli¬ 
gent;  prudent. 

or  pbp  to  ascend,  go  up.  Pa.  to 
cause  to  ascend ;  to  take  away ;  to 
destroy. 

p^bp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  perverse. 
b$pp  m.  pr.  n.  Sammael,  an  evil 
angel,  sometimes  called  the  angel 


138 


of  death ,  and  sometimes,  prince  of 
the  air . 

7(^3  to  sustain.  Ithpe.  passive. 

K33  to  hate. 

73035  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  haired. 

t  •  : 

123  construed  with  b ,  to  aicZ,  assist. 
Pa.  idem. 

123  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 

K123  or  K17&  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  sup¬ 
port ;  aid;  strength. 

123  (  =  Heb.  1p&)  to  visit;  to  in¬ 
spect. 

123  and  123  m.  Dec.  II.  a  scribe  ;  a 
learned  man.  The  emph.  form  is 
sometimes  written  K153  . 

t  :  - 

125  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  book. 

^213  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  Plur.  wide  oriental 

t  :  - 

breeches. 

Jip-np  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  vanity  ;  vacuity. 

7(15  m.  Dec.  II.  b.  prefect ,  president. 

155  Pa.  175  to  hide ,  to  conceal ;  to 
destroy.  Compare  the  Greek  d<fa- 
v'fw,  which  has  both  these  senses. 

3>  . 

‘)K7  and  *}2  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  collective 
noun,  (i.  q.  Heb.  *JK2);  sheep, flocks. 

122  to  make  ;  to  do,  perform  ;  to  ex¬ 
ercise  (authority,  etc.) ;  to  till  (the 
ground);  Ithpe.  to  be  made;  to 
take  place,  happen.  Ithpa.  idem. 

152  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  servant. 

71*>27  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  work ,  labor ; 
business. 

132  to  go  over;  to  transgress.  Aph. 
to  send  over,  transmit;  to  trans¬ 
gress. 

127  Dec.  III.  b.  that  which  is  beyond. 
Klti.5  137  the  other  side  of  the  Eu¬ 
phrates. 

12  prep,  and  conj.  to;  until.  With 
suffixes  it  takes  a  plural  form. 
30_12  while  ....  not,  before ,  ante- 
quam. 

Ki2;  or  717  to  pass  away  ;  with  2  to 
go  to,  come  upon  ;  to  pass  away,  be 


abolished,  destroyed.  Aph.  to  take 
away  ;  to  depose. 

“^77  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  conception. 

*j12  m.  pr.  n.  Eden ,  (pleasure). 

*]17  c.  g.  Dec.  I.  b.  time  ;  a  year. 

12*12  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  labor,  work. 

117  adverb,  yet,  further,  moreover. 
Sometimes  it  is  a  mere  expletive. 

3012  and  3012  f.  pi.  *j^12 ,  iniquity , 
perverseness,  sin. 

5^12  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  boy ;  a  young 
man. 

p12  to  be  straitened ,  to  be  in  difficulty. 
Aph.  p^K  to  molest ,  be  hostile  ;  to 
constrain. 

112  only  Dan.  2  :  35,  chaff.  In  Syr. 
and  Ar.  idem. 

*]1317  m.  Dec.  II.  a.,  firmness,  strength. 

KpT7  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  ring,  seal-ring. 

KIT 2  m.  pr.  n.  Ezra. 

K52  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  counsel ,  wisdom, 

i.  q.  Heb.  722  . 

b"'2 ,  Kb*12 ,  b'12b  and  b^yb’D  adv.  and 
prep,  above.  *j5  b*S  idem. 

■p2  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  d.  an  eye  ;  a  foun¬ 
tain.  In  the  latter  sense  the  plu¬ 
ral  is  *)12^2 . 

Pa*  denom.  to  look  at ;  to  exam¬ 
ine  with  care,  comp.  Eng.  to  eye. 

1^2  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  watcher,  a  name  of 
angels,  or  of  an  order  of  angels, 
Dan.  4  :  10,  14,  20. 

^2  prep,  upon;  above ;  concerning; 
besides;  before ;  against;  some¬ 
times  for  bK ,  to,  toward ,  etc. — 
1  b$  because. 

K^7  adv.  over,  above,  followed  by  *)5  . 

ribs  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  burnt-offering. 
Plur.  ))bfl: . 

7^2  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  occasion  ;  pretext. 

*'1^2  and  ,'lb‘’7  or  *,'l|7  ,  forms  of  by  . 

^2  adj.  Dec.  VI.  upper;  highest; 
emph.  7k!s2  the  Most  High. 

*]l’1?2  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  Most  High. 
Plur.  excel.  *p30^2  idem. 

*^2  f  Dec.  VII.  b.  an  upper  chamber , 
a  lodging  chamber. 


139 


■m 


bbs  to  go  in,  enter ;  (of  the  sun)  to 
set.  Aph.  bsn  and  bssip  to  bring 
in.  Hoph.  bsn  pass, 
nbs  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  and 

—  T 

cbs  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an  age ;  eternity ; 
the  world.  Kabs-ns  or  fctnbs-*is 

t  ;it  “  t  :  - 

for  ever. 

i»bs  m.  Dec.  VI.  PI.  tfiabs,  an 

-  •  ••  ••  t  ;  ••  * 

Elamite. 

sbs.  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  i.  q.  Heb.  sba,  a 
rib. 

DS  c.  g.  a  people,  irreg.  sing,  like 
Dec.  IV.  a.  plur.  paas,  emph. 
KiaaS . 

r  -  ;  - 

DS  prep,  with  ;  in.  Before  suff.  the 
D  takes  Daghesh  forte  5  as  153S . 
pips  and  piaS  ad j .  Dec.  I.  a.  deep, 
unsearchable. 

baS  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  baS  Dec.  III.  a. 

t  r  — : 

labor,  toil. 

“1  a?_  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  Heb.  naa, 
wool. 

H3S  to  answer  ;  to  speak  in  conversa¬ 
tion,  to  begin  to  speak. 

*J3S  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  cloud. 

5]3S  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  bough ,  branch. 
b3S;  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  mulct,  fine. 
n3S  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  time. 
aps  see  atos . 

pps  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  or  pas  Dec  III. 

b.  affair  ;  business. 

*’5S  m.  Dec.  III.  with  suff.  fiisS , 

T*  "ST/ 

bra  nches,  foliage. 
ass  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  dust. 
a*1  as  part.  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  troubled,  sad. 
aps  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  the  heel, 
Heb.  aps  ;  an  end  ;  a  reward,  Heb. 

ep§  to  be  crooked  ;  to  be  perverse.  Pa. 

to  make  crooked  ;  to  pervert. 

**ps  to  root  out,  pluckup.  Ithpe.  pass. 
ipS  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  stock,  root. 
ns  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  enemy. 
ap~  and  Pa.  Dps  to  mix.  Ithpa.  pass. 
“P?.  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  wild  ass,  onager. 
nips  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  nakedness j  hence 
dishonor. 


baps  ,  Ithpa.  bapsna  to  be  stripped, 
rendered  naked. 

itfbaps  adj.  Dec.  VI.  naked.  The 
forms  bians  ,  i^biars  and  ixbiians 
are  less  frequent. 

Dips  or  Dips  adj.  Dec.  I.  cunning. 
bps  and  bps  Dec.  I.  a.  and  ibps  Dec. 

VI.  adj.  uncircumcised. 
nbs ,  abs  or  aps>  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  an 
herb  ;  coll,  herbs. 

“ibs  f.  NpbS  m.  num.  adj.  ten.  Plur. 
■ppbs  twenty. 

ribs  and  rubs  to  think,  purpose. 
ns  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  i.  q.  nss,  time. 

*ii ns  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  prepared,  ready  ; 
about  to,  futurus.  Prefixed  to  the 
Inf.  it  forms  a  kind  of  Future 
tense. 

pips  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  ancient,  old. 

“ins  to  be  rich.  Pa.  to  enrich. 


3 

*1^5,  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  corpse. 
*]fib>i5  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  verbal  from  fibs , 
service. 

0*13  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  the  mouth. 

“ipp^S  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  command,  pre¬ 
cept. 

nnp  m.  irreg.  const.  nfiS ,  pi.  ‘jIHa  , 
governor  of  a  province, 
nns  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  (nips  Dan.  2 :  41.) 

a  potter. 

baa  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an  under-gar¬ 
ment,  perhaps  breeches.  Kethib 
Dan.  3  :  21.  bias  ,  idem. 
ip  13  (*nB  Gen.  3  :  24,  Jer.  T.)  c.  g. 
fruit,  irreg.  Plur.  “ppiS  ,  ni-iS ,  with 
suff.  iipS  Prov.  S  :  19. 
nbs  to  divide. 
nbs  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  half. 

aaba  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  division  or  class 
T  \  :  t 

of  the  priests. 

Dpbs  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  linen ;  a  piece  of 
linen. 

ribs  to  serve ;  to  worship  ;  to  culti¬ 
vate  (the  ground);  to  observe  or 


■•ns 


140 


keep  (a  law.)  Compare  in  Latin 
colo,  which  has  all  these  significa¬ 
tions. 

•jnbs  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  service ,  worship 
of  God. 

intiibs  m.  Dec.  VI.  a  Philistine. 
pi53  and  Pa.  p25  to  afford  delight. 

Ithpa.  to  enjoy  ;  to  feast  upon. 

55  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  and  b.  a  part ;  in 
relation  to  the  hand,  the  palm. 

and  "Ip3p5  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  \rrjp, 
the  psaltery ,  a  stringed  instrument. 
Hengstenberg  considers  it  a  kettle¬ 
shaped  instrument;  see  his  Authen¬ 
ticity  of  Daniel ,  article  Greek  words. 
K223  and  Pa.  ‘’22S3  to  deliver  ;  to  make 
free. 

*Jp3  Pa.  to  command. 

*np3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  statute ,  command¬ 
ment. 

btp3  m.  Dec.  II.  (Gr.  §  32,  note  3.)  iron. 
np3  to  flourish  ;  to  blossom. 

5*13  to  divide. 

S'lB  pr.  n.  Persia  ;  the  Persians. 
,13']3  m.  Dec.  VI.  emph.  aO&pB  Ke- 
thib.  Dan.  6  :  29,  a  Persian. 

303  to  render  (good  or  evil  to  any 
one);  to  reward.  Ithpe.  idem ;  to 
take  vengeance. 

P’na  to  redeem ,  liberate ;  hence  Dan. 
4  :  24,  to  expiate ,  or  perhaps  rather 
to  dismiss. 

1203  to  divide ;  to  distinguish.  Pa. 
Part.  pass.  Ez.  4:18,  dis¬ 

tinctly. 

■pilOS  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  copy. 

51223  to  extend ,  reach  out. 

"11235  to  interpret ,  explain.  Pa.  idem. 
ni233  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  interpretation , 
explanation. 

22n3  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  delicacies ,  rich food. 
cans  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  word;  edict ;  letter ; 

thing ,  matter ,  like  the  Heb.  . 
nn&  to  enlarge ,  extend. 
nn a  to  open.  Ithpeel  and  Ithpaal, 
pass. 

*05  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  breadth ,  width. 

r  ;  J 


Dip 


N322  to  be  willing  ;  to  acquiesce. 
rvii<322  (Hebrew)  armies ,  retained  in 
Chaldee  after  ^  and  *in'bl$ . 


W2  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  desire  ;  affair. 
3022  to  wet,  moisten.  Ithpa.  305222*  pass, 
‘lie  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  side. — "Op  on  the 
part  of. — nab  against. 

2022  only  Dan.  *3: 14.  20222]  is  it  your 
purpose  ?  or  was  it  your  design  ? 
p'022  adj.  or  sub.  masc.  Dec.  I.  a. 

righteous  ;  a  righteous  man. 

2*pp22  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  justice  Righteous¬ 
ness  ;  alms-giving. 

"itf-ia  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  (2*  in  otio,)  the  neck. 
nib :2  ,  ^ba  Pa.  to  pray ,  supplicate ,  in¬ 


voke. 

nb22  to  prosper.  Aph.  nb22n  to  make 
prosperous ,  promote  (a  person)  ;  to 
execute  prosperously  ;  also  intrans. 
to  prosper ,  be  successful ;  to  be  pro¬ 
moted. 

5b 22  and  dba  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an 

image ,  idol ;  form ,  appearance. 
npa  to  sprout ,  germinate.  Aph.  to 
cause  to  sprout ,  to  bring  forth. 

"i2>22  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  grief 
"1022  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  he-goat. 

*1322  c.g.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  bird ;  a  sparrow. 
5022  or  Tp“)22  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  needy } 
construed  with  b,  in  need  of. 


P 

bap  and  Pa.  to  receive,  accept ;  like 
30123  j  to  listen  to,  comply  with. 
Ithpa.  pass. 

and  bap  prep,  before ;  over 
against,  opposite  ;  because  of  With 
suff.  tb ag ,  ,  etc. — bapb  idem. 

— bapfbp  because  of;  conj.  because  ; 
therefore  ;  as. 

120np  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  holy ;  as  a  noun, 
saint;  holy  being,  applied  to  an¬ 
gels. 

□np  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  that  which  is  be- 


141 


ip 


fore  ;  former  time ,  beginning  ;  the 
east. — ,  (see  *j "Q)  formerly  ; 
in  front;  toward  the  east ,  on  the 
east  side. 

Gnp  and  E*np  prep,  before ,  in  relation 
to  place,  coram;  in  relation  to 
time,  ante.  It  takes  suffixes  like 
plural  nouns  ;  e.  g.  *’E‘ipi ,  '’piEHp.  . 
— is  □'ip.  antequam. — *}E  often 
i.  q.  ,]B  ;  sometimes  i.  q.  G'ljs 
simply. 

ma'ig  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  origin ,  anti¬ 
quity.  nB^p  *ja  prep,  before. 

^B'lp  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  antiquity  ;  meet¬ 
ing,  coining  together ,  occur sus. 

■’Bpp  adj.  Dec.  VI. first. 

d'np  Pa.  to  sanctify ,  consecrate ,  set 
apart. 

m.  Dec.  II.  a.  holiness ,  sacred¬ 
ness. 

cup  Fut.  trtp?  to  rise  up,  to  stand.  Pa. 
E*p  to  establish;  to  confirm  by  an 
oath  ;  to  swear  ;  to  sustain.  Aph. 
E^pK  and  D^pp,  Fut.  D^p1?  and 
E^pp? ,  Part.  E^ppp  ,  to  set  up,  e.  g. 
a  statue,  an  image;  to  appoint, 
e.  g.  a  governor.  Hoph.  B->ptt  , 
^P*  ,  or  with  the  form  of  Aphel, 
Enpp  Dan.  7:4,  to  stand. 

‘ipp^p  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  offering ,  oblation  ; 
sacrifice ,  victim. 

b>Bp  to  kill.  Pa.  idem,  in  reference 
to  the  destruction  of  many.  So  in 
Syriac.  Ithpe.  and  Ithpa.  pass. 

"lEp  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  knot  ;  joint ,  dif¬ 
ficult  problem. 

S^p  (i.  q.  Heb.  ]FP)  m.  Dec.  III.  d. 

summer. 

°:p  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  covenant;  an 
edict ,  decree. 

B;p  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  established, firm. 

pp  m.  pr.  n.  Cain. 

EPp^P  Kethib  Dan.  3  :  5,  7,  etc.,  i.  q. 
Gr.  /adapts,  a  harp.  The  pointing 
is  that  of  Einnp ,  q.  v. 

bp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  voice.  PL  *pbp  thun¬ 
ders  ;  )\Pr  voices. 


SI 


b-ibp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  light;  quick , 
adv.  a  little. 

I^sip  and  "liEp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  girdle, 
a  belt. 

*jp  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  a  nest ,  a  hive. 

£pp  to  buy ,  purchase. 

*p3p  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  acquisition ;  pos¬ 
session,  substance. 
pEp  to  be  angry,  to  be  in  a  rage. 
pEp  m.  Dec.  III.  anger,  wrath. 

to  cut  off,  amputate ;  to  kill. 
Ithpe.  pass. 

nsp  f.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  part ;  an  end. 
fcOp  to  call ;  to  read. 

Bpp ,  E'np  and  Pa.  B'np  to  approach  ; 
to  touch ,  construed  with  E  ,  b ,  etc. 
to  bring,  to  offer.  Ithpe.  to  cleave 
to.  Aph.  to  bring  near ;  to  offer. 
Bnp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  war,  contest. 

*1pp  a  city,  irreg.  Emph.  frppp,  NPHp  , 
Kn^p,  spnp  and  wr^p ;  plur. 

•ripp,  r^p  and  ptpi  emPh- 

armsip. 

FP  and  ■p.P  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  horn. 
Plur.  ’pDpp,  “Jpp  and,  with  Dual 
form,  tap3pp . 

p'np  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  piece,  fragment. 
liiG)p  m.  irreg.  emph.  NEEpp  truth. 
— tfEizjsipB  indeed  :  interro<?.  in- 
deed  ? — EiiEp  “je  truly,  certainly. 
Epjp  emph.  5<pipp  Dec.  III.  a.  a  bow ; 
the  rain-bow. 

Di-inp  (Keri  for  O'U’Pp ,  Dan.  3 :  5,  etc. 
The  analogy  of  the  Greek  /adapts 
would  lead  us  to  point  the  latter 
Eppnp  .  The  Targums  have  Einnp 
which  appears  to  be  the  less  an¬ 
cient  form.)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  harp. 

I 

ttiso  and  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  head;  sum 
amount.  Plur.  •pttjxp  ?  3  and 

once  Fttiip  Ez.  5  :  10,  chiefs ,  prin¬ 
cipal  men. 

Ep  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  plur.  pEpEp  Dec. 
II.  a.  a  prince  ;  as  an  adj.  great ; 


ft*I 


142 


nsto 


plur.  'proud ,  arrogant  (speeches,  or 
actions.) 

npp  to  6e  greai  or  numerous.  Pa.  “’DP 
and  Aph.  “’pPJ*  to  exalt,  set  in  an 
eminent  station ;  to  increase ;  to 
bring  forth  abundantly.  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  to  be  exalted,  to  be  elevated. 
WP  f.  D  ec.  VIII.  c.  greatness. 

•iSH  and  Ki:nP  num.  adj.  ten  thousand, 
a  myriad.  Plur.  ^pP  and  *]ppP  • 
■jiSP  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  lord,  master. 

■p^pp  num.  adj.  Dec.  VI.  fem.  N^VnP 
fourth. 

“jpPpP  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  nobleman,  prince. 
WP  to  desire,  long  for.  Pa.  idem. 

7*P  to  be  moved,  excited  ;  to  be  angry. 

Aph.  to  excite  to  anger. 

75P  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  anger. 

*>}P  and  bin  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  foot. 

Dual  and  plural  *pb$P  . 

ESP  to  be  tumultuous.  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  idem ;  to  rage ;  to  roar. 
Aph.  to  rage  ;  to  collect  together  in 
a  rage  or  with  tumult. 

“H  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  aspect,  appearance. 

7^ vi  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  anger. 

TTn  c.  g.  Dec.  I.  a.  wind  ;  spirit. 

D>iP  to  be  high  ;  to  be  exalted.  Palp. 
Dpip  to  exalt ,  praise.  Aph.  to  lift 
up.  IthpaL  to  lift  up  one’s  self. 

D*n  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  height. 

7“i  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  secret. 

T 

p^rn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  distant,  remote. 
D.PP  and  Pael  DHP,  to  pity,  compas¬ 
sionate  ;  to  love. 

*lDfiP  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  love  ;  affection, 
friendship. 

■ppfiP  (found  only  in  the  plural)  m. 

Dec.  III.  a.  mercy ,  compassion. 
prn  to  trust  in.  Ithpe.  construed 
with  bp ,  idem. 

ttj-'pp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  sent  away ;  de¬ 
serted. 

PPP  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  scent,  smell. 
ci^P  ,  see  UJStP  . 

DP  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  high. 

kdp  and  iipp  to  throw ,  cast ;  to  set, 


place;  to  impose  (a  tax).  Ithpe. 
to  be  cast. 

ipp  to  winh  significantly  ;  to  beckon. 
*VaP  adj.  Dec.  V.  b.  and  Dec.  VI.  de¬ 
ceitful. 

“jiP  and  Pa.  to  sing  for  joy  ;  to  speak 
joyfully. 

^P  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  and 

fct^P  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  pleasure,  will; 

benevolence  ;  delight. 

*}i“>pp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  thought. 

■)3P.P  adj.  only  Dan.  4  :  1,  [4  :  fi\flour- 
ishing. 

3J9P  and  Pa.  3>pP  to  break  in  pieces. 
DSP  to  trample  upon,  tread  in  pieces. 
*nBPt  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  permission  ;  lib¬ 
erty;  power. 

p^P  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  wicked. 

DD5P  to  note,  write  down  ;  to  write. 
2pp  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and  ^Sttip  f  Dec. 

VII.  c.  wickedness. 

£<rpm  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  verbal  from 
▼  •  : 

fipp ,  trembling. 

to 

Dip  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  elder,  a  man  of 
grey  hairs. 

Kppip,  i.  q.  ttppp ,  q.  v. 

i.  q.  to  be  or  become  great. 
fcOSip  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  great;  much, 
many ;  adv.  very,  exceedingly. 

D>ito  to  sett  place  ;  to  appoint ;  to  issue 
(a  decree) ;  D2p  D*UD  to  show  respect ; 
Dpi  to  give  a  name,  to  name. 
Ppip  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  i.  q.  Ppp ,  side. 

Only  Dan.  7 : 5 ,  Keri. 
bpip  Aph.  bpip£<  to  understand ;  to  be 
wise.  Ithpa.  const,  with  p ,  to  con¬ 
sider. 

isnbpip  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  intelligence , 
understanding. 

SOip  i.  q.  to  hate.  (In  Chaldee 
it  is  generally  written  with  0 .) 
Part.  an  enemy. 
ppip  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  hair. 

f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  (PI.  Dec. 

VIII.  c.)  a  lip. 


143 


11  n 


Ifi 

bad,  bxd  or  b^d  to  ask ,  seefr,  re- 
^esf,  with  2  of  the  thing  asked, 
or  with  two  accusatives;  to  in¬ 
quire ,  with  b  of  the  person. 

NbNd  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  request  ;  affair , 
concern ,  matter. 

“i5<t£3  Ithpe.  “iNfidN  and  Ithpa.  nxndN 
to  be  left ,  remain. 

nxd  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  the  rest ,  remainder. 

I.  ad  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  Z/te  sabbath. 

II.  ad  (contracted  from  2 ad)  num. 
adj.  seven. 

ninad  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  glory,  honor. 
nad  Pa.  to  praise ;  to  sing  praises, 
simply  to  sing. 
wad  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  tribe. 
a^ad  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  flame. 
bhad  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  way,  path. 
i^ad  ord.  adj.  Dec.  VI.  seventh. 

Sad  num.  adj.  seven.  See  Par.  XI. 
in  the  Gram. 

pad  to  forsake ;  simply  to  leave. 
Ithpe.  pass. 

dad  Pa.  to  terrify .  Ithpa.  pass. 
i"rtd  to  err.  Aph.  to  entice  to  sin. 
b;d  f  pi.  ibid  and  ibid ,  wife  of  a 
king;  hence  queen ,  Ps.  45: 10. 
b^d  Pa.  to  persuade;  to  entice. 
and  Ithpa.  to  exert  one's  self. 

^d  Pael,  to  set,  place.  Ithpa.  to  be 
made ,  to  become. 

“wbvd  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  authority,  dominion. 

aid  i.  q.  ad  . 

“iS?id  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  beaidy.  Plur.  id. 
a^id  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  wall. 

“padid  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  friend;  a 
companion. 

ioasdsid  m.  pi.  inhabitants  of  Susa, 
the  winter  residence  of  the  Per¬ 
sian  kings. 

atpd  and  a^pd  to  free,  deliver.  See 
Gram.  §  14.  2.  note. 
rV’nd  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  corrupt,  wicked; 
as  a  noun  wickedness,  crime. 


1*1 123 


nad  to  discover ;  to  attain,  acquire. 

Aph.  idem.  Ithpe.  to  be  found. 
■jad  to  dwell ,  rest.  Pa.  1 3d  to  cause 
to  dwell.  Hence 

Njpad  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  dwelling,  pre¬ 
sence  ;  the  divine  presence  and  glo¬ 
ry  as  it  appeared  in  the  tabernacle, 
nib  d  to  be  secure,  safe. 
nbd  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 
^bd  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  something  amiss, 
an  error, faidt ;  a  failure. 
n^bd  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  rest,  tranquillity. 
nbd  to  send  away ;  to  put  off;  to 
stretch  out  (the  hand).  Pa.  and 
Aph.  idem.  Ithpe.  to  be  deprived. 

I.  wbd  and  wbd  to  rule,  to  have  power, 
construed  with  a  or  bs .  Aph.  to 
cause  to  ride,  to  give  dominion. 

II.  wbd  const,  with  a ,  to  fall  upon , 
attack. 

liwbd  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  rider,  governor. 
iwbd  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  might,  power ;  do¬ 
minion. 

l^bd  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  powerful,  having 
power,  const,  with  a  over  any  thing ; 
const,  with  b  and  an  Inf.  permitted, 
lawful;  as  a  noun,  a  powerful 
man,  ruler,  officer. 

tbp  to  complete.  Aph.  to  finish,  bring 
to  an  end ;  to  restore ,  give  back. 
abd  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  peace,  prosperity. 
riabd  m.  pr.  n.  Solomon. 
nbdbd  f.  irreg.  plur.  “pbdbd ,  *]bdbd , 
Ijbdbd  and  ‘jlbdbd ;  a  chain. 
adj  a>id  and  ad  m.  irreg.  emph.  Nad ; 
with  suff.  nad ,  p'na^d  ;  plur. 
“.nad ,  const,  nnad ,  etc.  a  name. 
ad  m.  pr.  n.  Shem. 
nad  Aph.  to  destroy. 
in  ad  names,  pi.  of  ad  q.  v. 

N^ad  Plur.  emph.  heaven,  the  heav¬ 
ens.  The  sing,  and  the  absol. 
plur.  are  wanting ;  const.  *>ad  . 
dad  Ithpolel  aaindN  to  be  aston¬ 
ished,  amazed. 

fc,ad,  Nj^ad  (see  Gr.  §  31.  note  2.) 
adj.yh^,  rich. 


144 


rm  in 


55123  to  hear  ;  to  obey.  Ithpe.  to  be 
heard  ;  to  show  one’s  self  obedient , 
to  be  obedient  or  submissive. 

F^itt  i.  q.  Heb.  pi5223 ,  Samaria. 

1235123*  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  b.  the  sun. 

1235123  to  serve  ;  to  minister ,  as  a  priest, 
etc. 

F’l235l23  m.  pr.  n.  Samson. 

1123  c.  g.  Dec.  IV.  b.  a  tooth.  The 
dual  form  Fl^  is  used  for  the  plu¬ 
ral.  So  in  Hebrew  CP2123 . 

X3123  Fut.  Tseri,  to  be  changed ,  altered ; 
to  be  different.  Pa.  to  change  ;  to 
violate ,  transgress  ;  pass.  Part,  di¬ 
verse^  different.  Ithpa.  to  change ; 
intrans.  to  be  altered.  Aph.  i.  q. 
Pael. 

I.  X3123  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  sleep. 

II.  X3123  and  213123  f  irreg.  const.  213123 ; 
emph.  X21H3 ;  plur.  *p3£3 ;  a  year ; 
collectively  in  the  singular,  years. 

p3H3  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fem.  X2i?l^  Dec. 
VII.  a.  sharp. 

*53123  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  edge  ;  point. 

X5123  f.  irreg.  emph.  X215123  and  X  215123 ; 
plur.  1  an  hour ;  a  moment , 
any  short  period  of  time. 

215123  Ithpa.  *>521123  24  to  narrate ,  tell; 
to  enumerate ;  to  speak. 

55123  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  judge. 

1*>S1£3  or  1^5123  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  bruising , 
trampling  under  foot ;  perhaps 
Gen.  3 :  15,  Pseudo-Jon.  and  Jer. 
Targ.  safety ,  deliverance ;  or  rem¬ 
edy. 

^5123  Aph.  to  bring  down ,  humble  ;  to 
oppress ,  subdue. 

^5123  adj.  Dec.  III.  low. 

15123  to  be  fair;  to  be  agreeable. 

pQi  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  leg. 

*1515123  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  dawn  of  the 
morning. 

I.  641123,  an®  and  fillD.  to  dwell ;  to 
stop ,  rest.  Aph.  to  cause  to  dwell 
or  remain. 

II.  &41123  and  2H123  to  loosen ;  Part. 

loose,  at  liberty ;  to  solve ,  ex¬ 


plain.  Pa.  idem;  also  to  begin. 
Ithpa.  to  be  loosed ,  spoken  of  the 
joints,  to  become  powerless. 

1231123  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  a  root. 

11231123  f  Dec.  VII.  c.  and 

*’123 1123  f  Dec.  VII.  b.  eradication; 
met.  banishment. 

nl2 3  and  ni23  num.  adj.  Dec.  IV.  b.  six. 
PI.  F^^?  sixty. 

X 21 123  and  !iri23  to  drink.  Construed 
with  2?  denoting  the  vessel  out  of 
which  any  one  drinks. 

521123  to  found,  establish,  confirm. 
Aphel  idem. 

P lii23  to  be  silent,  keep  silence. 

n 

2451X21 ,  defectively  written  ;  see 
XSIX^P)  . 

X3*>Ktt  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  (PI.  FP^  c.g. 
Dec.  I.)  a  fig-tree  ;  a  fig. 

1*>521  part.  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fragile, 
weak,  easy  to  be  broken. 

1521  to  break,  to  break  in  pieces.  Pa. 
idem.  Ithpe.  and  Ithpa.  pass. 

1221  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and 

641221  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  contention,  strife. 

Xlil2i  fem.  Dec.  VII.  a.  revolving  in 
a  circle ;  hence,  continuance. — 
24111215  constantly ,  continually. 

5121  to  return  ;  to  turn  away,  to  avert. 
Aph.  to  return  (act.),  to  restore. 

Hi 21  to  be  astonished  ;  to  be  terrified, 
to  tremble  for  fear. 

241M21  f-  Dec.  VIII.  a.  a  generation; 
a  nation,  tribe. 

X5J15121  f.  emph.  242i£)i51ti,  cause,  oc¬ 
casion. 

t)p12l  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  strength,  might. 

1121,  i.  q.  Heb.  *11123,  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an 
ox. 

x HS1231I1  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  praise;  a 
song  of  praise  ;  any  song. 

2iiri2i  prep,  under.  It  takes  the  suf¬ 
fixes  of  plural  nouns. 

P2i2i  idem. 


nsn 


145 


y  nr 


XE^n  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  desire ,  am»e- 
\ile. 

*,3rn  Aph.  ipnx  to  prepare. 

:bn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  Heb.  abui , 
snow. 

~n’?n  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  elevated;  forti¬ 
fied. 

rbn  f!  (masc.  nrbn,  const,  ra.  nnbn, 
r  “ln?n):  num.  adj.  three.  Plur. 
X'rbv\ thirty,  v 

adj.  Dec.  VI.  third.  Once 
written  “’nbn  Dan.  5  :  7. 
cn  (i.  q.  Heb.  Eiti),  nan,  and  ‘,an 
advr.  there  ;  thither,  Ena,  “ana 
thence. 

nan  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  wonder,  a 
miracle. 

“a^an  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  perfection  ;  in¬ 
tegrity. 

roan  or  roan  f.  pr.  n.  of  a  city  of  the 
Philistines,  Tlmnath. 
x;n  plur.  *p5n  i.  q.  X3\xn ,  etc.  q.  v. 
l?3n  num.  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  second. 
n^sn  adv.  a  second  lime,  again. 
x^nsn  m.  pi.  Dan.  3:2,  3,  prob. 
judges  or  lawyers ,  jurisconsulti. 

(Ar.^l  to  give  counsel ,  to  pass 

sentence ;  hence  mufti.) 


Pjipn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  strength;  vehe¬ 
mence. 

Tpn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  right ;  fit,  conve¬ 
nient  ;  firm. 

►ppn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  strong,  mighty. 

bpn  (i.  q.  Heb.  bp;!;)  to  weigh.  Pass 
Praet.  to  he  weighed. 

*ipn  Pa.  to  adapt ,  arrange;  to  pre¬ 
pare;  to  establish.  Aph.  idem. 
Hoph.  to  be  reestablished ,  restored. 

“pn  adj.  Dec.  II.  a.  i.  q.  ypn. 

f]pn  to  grow,  as  a  tree  ;  to  become 
strong ,  powerful.  Pa.  to  confirm, 
establish. 

C]pn  and  ppn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  power ,  au¬ 
thority. 

cspn  to  explain ,  interpret.  Part, 
pass,  Banna  interpreted. 

num.  adj.  two;  both.  See 
Gram.  Par.  XI.  and  §  42.  1.  a, 
note. 

‘ip?!“”'^n  num.  adj.  twelve. 

Tpn  and  Pa.  7]nn  to  expel ,  drive  out. 

ynn  and  Pa.  snn  to  break  asunder  ; 
to  destroy. 

2nn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  door ; 
— XEba  Epn  the  king's  palace. 

srn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  porter,  watchman 
at  a  gate. 


10 


APPENDIX. 


A.  The  Rabbinic  Dialect. 

§  1.  This  dialect  is  so  called  from  the  principal  writers  who  have  em¬ 
ployed  it,  viz.  the  Jewish  Rabbins.  Their  most  important  writings  have 
generally  had  respect,  either  to  the  Hebrew  language,  the  Scriptures  of 
the  Old  Testament,  or  to  the  traditions  which  constitute  the  Oral  Law , 
and  which  the  Jews  regard  as  of  equal  authority  with  the  Scriptures. 
These  writings  have  been  composed  in  various  ages,  chiefly  since  the 
eleventh  century  of  the  Christian  era.  Among  the  most  valuable  of  them 
are  the  commentaries  of  Solomon  Jarchi,  Aben  Ezra  and  David  Kimchi, 
which  are  published,  with  others,  in  the  Hebrew  Rabbinic  Bibles  of  Bom- 
berg  and  Buxtorf.  That  of  Solomon  Jarchi  is  extant  also  in  a  Latin 
translation  published  by  J.  F.  Breithaupt,  (Gotha  1713,  3  vols.  small  4t.o.) 

For  a  general  account  of  Rabbinic  writers,  see  Bartolocci’s  Bibliotheca 
Rabbinica,  Wolf’s  Bibliotheca  Hebraea,  Vols.  I.  and  III.,  and  the  “  Vitae 
Celebrium  Rabbinorum  ”  in  Reland’s  Analecta  Rabbinica. 

§  2.  The  Rabbinic  resembles  the  ancient  Hebrew  more  nearly  than  it 
does  the  Chaldee,  although  Chaldee  forms  are  by  no  means  rare.  The 
following  are  the  principal  points,  in  respect  to  which  it  varies  from  both 
Hebrew  and  Chaldee. 

1.  Form  of  the  letters.  These  may  be  characterized  as  a  sort  of  He¬ 
brew  running  hand.  They  are  the  following  : 


Kabbinic. 

Hebrew. 

Rabbinic. 

Hebrew 

f> 

it 

i 

b 

3 

3 

D  V 

O  72 

J 

i  5 

1  3 

7 

P 

D 

0 

n 

a? 

3> 

1 

1  5 

Cl  3 

t 

T 

I  5 

V  * 

P 

n 

? 

P 

V 

13 

n 

9 

1 

c 

13 

I  5 

1  => 

p 

n 

THE  EABBINIC  DIALECT. 


147 


2.  Vowels.  The  Rabbinic  is  entirely  destitute  of  vowel-marks,  with  the 
exception  of  a  few  books  which  have  been  pointed  for  the  convenience  of 
learners.  (Cellarius  Inst.  Rab.  I.  1.)  What  vowels  are  to  be  supplied  in 
reading,  must  be  determined  by  a  knowledge  of  forms,  and  by  the  sense 
in  each  particular  case.  Where  however  ambiguity  would  otherwise  ex- 
•st,  the  letters  f> ,  )  and  »  are  frequently  inserted ;  f>  in  such  cases  indicating 
the  a  sound  (Garnets  or  Pattahh),  }  the  o  or  it  sound  (Hholem,  Shureq, 
Qibbuts  or  Garnets  Hhatuph),  and  »  the  e  or  i  sound  (Tseri,  Seghol  or 
Hhireq.) 

3.  The  construct  state  of  nouns  often  appears  instead  of  the  abso¬ 
lute. 

4.  The  prefixes  7  (Chaldee)  and  p  (Hebrew,  for  7j;f>)  are  employed 
almost  indiscriminately. 

5.  The  conjugation  Piel  is  distinguished,  by  the  insertion  of  Yodh  be¬ 
tween  the  first  and  second  radicals;  e.  g.  (  =  72});  Hophal,  by  the 
insertion  of  Vav  after  the  preformative  He;  e.  g.  72f1C>  (=*’>3tn  or 
Compare  No.  2.  above. 

6.  From  Niphal  and  Hithpael  a  new  conjugation  is  formed  in  Rabbinic, 
called  Nithpael ,  sometimes  reflexive ,  but  generally  passive  in  signification. 
It  is  distinguished,  in  the  Praeter.  by  the  formative  prefix  pj ;  elsewhere, 
it  does  not  differ  in  form  from  Hithpael. 

7.  Many  words  occur  in  Rabbinic,  which  are  not  found  in  Hebrew  or 
Chaldee.  They  are,  for  the  most  part,  theological  or  philosophical  terms, 
and  are  not  unfrequently  borrowed  from  foreign  languages,  especially  the 
Greek ;  e.  g.  p»p ,  i.  q*  arjpuov. 

8.  Abbreviations  abound.  These  are  fully  explained  by  BuxtorOin  his 
treatise,  De  Abbreviaturis  Hebraicis.  Compare  also  Wolf’s  Bibliotheca 
Hebraea  Vol.  IV.  p.  251. 

For  the  means  of  obtaining  a  complete  acquaintance  with  the  Rabbi¬ 
nic,  the  reader  is  referred  to 

Reland’s  Analecta  Rabbinica,  particularly  the  first  two  works  in  that 
collection,  viz.  Genebrard’s  Isagoge  Rabbinica  and  Cellarius’  Institutio 
Rabbinismi. 

Danzius’  Rabbinismus  Enucleatus. 

’Opitius’  Chaldaismus. 

Otho’s  Institutiones  Linguarum  Orientalium. 

Tychsen’s  Elementa  Dialecti  Rabbinicae. 

Buxtorf’s  Lexicon  Chaldaico-Talmudico-Rabbinicum. 

§  3.  The  commentary  of  R.  David  Kimchi  on  Joel  3  :  1,  2,  (Eng.  Ver. 


148 


APPENDIX. 


2 :  28,  29),  may  serve  as  a  specimen  of  this  dialect.  The  words  of  the 
prophet  are 


c^rbc*!  cc^a  sxcm  Pips-is-is  sn-rx  t's^x  •p-'pnx  mm 


▼  ▼  : 


crs*2  ninBismbs'i  c^icrmbp  cm  :  >ixp^  niYnn  wnsina  Mtfbm  p ic‘?n 

.  T  -  t  :  -  • :  •  t  it  •  -  :  •  •  ;  v  v  ••  —  F  p 

•  :  •'rrip-px  ppsipx  msfpp 


COMMENTARY. 

ppPc  ’ri  p  »ppf>  pp£i  *  [  3  p’PC’  ]  d’P’P  p’ppfo  P’Pi  ipd  *  jp  »ppf>  p»pi 
lf>PPPl  ?31CP  71P  »D  Pfic  PP’7’  f>il  1P7p  PpP  Pff>  •  ’3f>  if>PC’  3Pp3  ’D  DpP7’1 
fapi  7ip  ifopp  f>ii  pric  pp’7’  »pif>  iP7pe  ;r»  h}  pp’7’p  p^t  »ppf>  bf>  »:ci 
ip  ip  tip  ‘iircf’ s  [f>’  p’pp]  pid*  pf>  PP7  pf>p  r>f>ir  »p  prfoc  ptpp  pip’i 
D7f>P  f>if>  D”P  ’iP3  ipi  13’f>1  PC3  ip  Ppf>  D1pP3  Prfo  1PP  if>PC’3  C1PT  *  PC3 
p:p  ppp  jp  •  [ip  p’pp]  PC3  ip  f>3’  *  [p"pp  tip]  PC3  bz  *|P3’i  py>if>i  •  mi 

*  D’PPpPI  D’il7JP  'i'p  bz  P1?f>1  ■  DP’ip  C71pP  PIP  pl’pi  D”lf>PP  if>PP  bz  PC3  bz 

PP7  PIP  f>’P  ’P1P1  •  [f>"i  'TP’]  Dil7J  7351  pjpppi  ’plf>  13^7’  DilP  ’P  PT>f?C  1PP 

ziz  pip  p:’3i  pppp  pip  't  p"pf>i  p  pip  rip  pp:i  [£"»  p’pp]  prfr  irp  ipcpi 

*  lf>33p’C  73?  P137P  PP  DpipP3  P3J’  Dipt  *]P7f’C  ’3PP1  *  PIP’  pf>P’1  p3?7  PIP  PP13J1 

PC3  ip  is?  ppf>  P1PP  P1PTC31  '  DPT1331  DP’P3  lf>331  f>if>  lf>33p»  oilP  ’P  Pt?f>  frb  ’P 
DilP  f>i  DP’P1P3  DP’Ppt  P1?f>1  ■  DPT1P31  DP’33  lf>331  f>if>  ip  Pff>  f’i  pf>1333  ipf> 

pf>133P  D7f>i  f>13p  f>i  ’P  b ")  jlP’T  ]3  PCP  »3P  3PP  il7JP  PPPP  3PPC  *jP7  bz  f>1Pl 
lf»33p’  P133P1  PP3P1  *  PP’i’P  P3?3  3?3P  1  b  D7p  *]P  pf>  f>if>  pl7rip  D3?  '’pf>1 
'P1PVTP  pIPlip  PPf>C  1PP  ClipP  Pf’PPP  Dpi  P’PP  PtoPl  f”33P  if’IPC  1PP  Cp1P3?33 
T’if>  pf>PP3  P  PPf”33  P’P’  Pf>  [3'’  P37P3]  PP^C  1PP  •  P’f>’33P  31P  pf>13P  PP’P  |P1 
7P  1P3PC  P’f>’3:3  VPC  1PP  PIP  zbzvb  PI  P1^3?P  CP3  VP’  jPI  *  13  P37f*  Plip3  3?71pf> 
P1P3?3P  »P»  P7^P  P13C3  PC^  pli:?P  X  PPt  P3P1  p"p  13’3P  PCPP  DP3  P’P’  llf'C 
135P1  D’PJ  17P331  [f>'p  ’PC’]  PPf>C  1PP  *  D’7:-PP  bz  DJI  ipIPpIP  ’P’1  P1PP3P  ’P’1 
IfjpC’  pf>  173P’1  ifjPC’  pfo  17 PP’C  ’pi  Dpif»  DJI  DP’PPIPI  DP’PPf>  PPP  ’331  DP3f>i 
i’PPP  31pi  PIP  DP3  p’ppc  i^P  P1PP  PID’PC  ]”3331  *  iDCPI  PJ?7  PIP  Dpi  P’PP 

•  D’3i:pp1  jP  pip  picip’  3C1’  in  717  P’3  ip  ’PDPC1  PPf>  p  ’  PD’PCP 


Translation  of  the  Commentary . 

■p-nhx  mm  .  as  if  he  had  said  P7Pn.X2  mm.  (Isa.  2  :  2.)  And 

it  shall  come  to  pass  in  the  last  days.  He  employs  the  expression  ‘jC“‘'Pnx. 
after  this,  because  he  had  said,  “  And  ye  shall  know  that  I  am  in  the  midst 
of  Israel.”  His  meaning  was,2  Ye  shall  know  now,  but  not  with  a  pei/ect 
knowledge;  for,  as  yet,  ye  continue  to  sin3  before  me.  But  after  this 
knowledge ,  the  time  will  come  when  ye  shall  know  me  with  a  perfect 
knowledge,  and  shall  no  longer  sin,  viz.  in  the  days  of  the  Messiah,  when 
it  is  written4  that  the  earth  shall  be  full  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord. 
(Isa.  11:9.) 


THE  KABBINIC  DIALECT. 


149 


“  I  will  pour  out  my  Spirit  upon  all  flesh.”  The  meaning  is,  upon  Is¬ 
rael ;  as  it  is  written5  in  other  places,  all  Jlesh ,  when  the  expression  does 
not  relate  to  all  beings  that  possess  life,  but  to  man  alone.  So  it  is  writ¬ 
ten,5  “  Let  all  flesh  bless,  etc.”  (Ps.  145:21,)  and,  ‘‘All  flesh  shall  come, 
etc.”  (Isa.  66  : 23.)  So,  in  a  restricted  sense,  here,  “all  flesh”  relates  to 
Israelites  fit  to  receive  the  Holy  Spirit. 

“  All,”  that  is,c  great  and  small ;  as  it  is  written,6  “  For  they  shall  all 
know  me,  from  the  least  of  them,  unto  the  greatest  of  them,”  (Jer.  31 :  34.) 

“My  Spirit,”  that  is,  the  spirit  of  knowledge  and  wisdom;  as  it  is  writ¬ 
ten,5  (Isa.  11:2.)  “  The  Spirit  of  the  Lord7  shall  rest  upon  him,”  and  the 

prophet  goes  on  to  explain,8  “  the  spirit  of  wisdom  and  understanding,  the 
spirit  of  counsel  and  might,  the  spirit  of  knowledge  and  of  the  fear  of  the 
Lord.” 

After  their  understanding  shall  have  been  purified,  the  power  of  speech 
in  some  of  them  shall  be  increased  until  they  shall  prophesy.  For  he 
says,  not,  “  They  shall  all  prophesy,”  but,  “Your  sons  and  your  daugh¬ 
ters  shall  prophesy.”  In  respect  to  the  effusion  of  the  Spirit ,  he  says, 
“upon  all  flesh;”  but  in  regard  to  prophecy ,  he  says,  not  all,  but,  “And 
your  sons  and  your  daughters  shall  prophesy.”  So  he  says,  “  your  old  men 
and  your  young  men,”  not  all  of  them.  And  this  accords  with  the  man¬ 
ner  in  which  that  wise  and  great  man,  R.  Moses  Ben-Maimon,  of  blessed 
memory,0  wrote.  “  The  gift  of  prophecy  (he  says)  is  not  conferred  upon 
a  man,  even10  with  instruction,  unless  nature  prepared  it  for  him  at  the 
time  of  his  birth.” 

The  sons  and  the  daughters  shall  prophesy  in  their  youth,  like  Samuel 
the  prophet.  And  the  prophetic  revelations  shall  be  given  to  them  in 
seeing  dreams  ;  as  he  says,  “  dreams,  visions.”  And  such  was  the  prophe¬ 
sying  of  most  of  the  prophets;  as  it  is  written,5  (Num.  12  :  6,)  “If  there  be 
a  prophet  among  you,  I,  the  Lord,  will  make  myself  known  to  him  in  a 
vision,  and  will  speak  unto  him  in  a  dream.”  So  also  there  shall  be  de¬ 
grees  among  them,  one  more  exalted  than  another,  as  there  were  among 
the  prophets  who  have  passed  ;  until  perhaps  there  will  be  among  them 
one  equal  to  Moses  our  master,  (peace  be  upon  him.)11  And  observe,  he 
mentions  three  degrees  which  [correspond]  to  the  ages  of  man,  childhood, 
youth,  and  old  age. 

“Also  upon  the  servants  ;”  as  it  is  written,6  (Isa.  61 :  5,)  “And  stran¬ 
gers  shall  stand  and  feed  your  flocks,  and  the  sons  of  the  alien  shall  be 
your  ploughmen  and  your  vine-dressers.”  And  even  upon  them,  because 
they  dwell  in  the  land  of  Israel  and  serve  Israel,  shall  be  the  spirit  of 
Knowledge  and  understanding. 


150 


APPENDIX. 


The  expression  'pouring  out  of  the  Spirit,  is  equivalent  to  saying,  “  The 
Spirit  shall  be  upon  them  abundantly ,”  [so  as  to  be]  like  a  literal  pouring 
out.  Thus  it  is  written,6  (Zech.  12  :  10),  “  And  I  will  pour  upon  the  house 
of  David,  and  upon  the  inhabitants  of  Jerusalem,  the  spirit  of  grace  and  of 
supplications.” 

Notes. 

1  Verse  27.  2  Lit.  he  said.  "jpf)  is  used  with  very  great  latitude.  See 

below,  note  4.  3  Lit.  ye  return  and,  sin.  lit.  concerning 

which  it  is  said,  c  Is  instead  of  •  5  Compare  the  preceding  note. 

8  iV ,  an  abbreviation  for  Oin,  that  is  to  say.  7  ’x) ,  abbreviation 
of  CCT>  j  the  name ,  i.  e.  Jehovah.  6  Abbreviations.  Fully  written  they 
would  read  tvD  *p  •  *p  is  a  Rabbinic  particle,  equivalent  to  the  He¬ 
brew  p  .  CT£  is  Piel  (  =1TnB),  comp.  §  2.  5.  °  iS  ,  abbreviation  of 

12V3D1  •  10  ’pf’L  abbreviation  for  li’Efa,  which  is  contracted  of  the 

two  particles' <jf>,  even  if.  11  VS  i.  e.  tTOCt)  rir*  So  the  Mo¬ 
hammedans  say  whenever  they  repeat  the  name  of  their  prophet. 


To  the  above  outline,  which  was  prepared  for  the  first  edition  of  this  work, 
it  gives  me  pleasure  to  add  here  that  the  student  may  obtain  a  good  idea  of 
the  Rabbinical  writers  and  their  works  from  a  volume  by  the  Rev.  Prof. 
Samuel  H.  Turner,  D.  D.,  entitled  “  Biographical  Notices  of  some  of  the  most 
distinguished  Jewish  Rabbies,  and  Translations  of  portions  of  their  Commen¬ 
taries,  &c.”  New  York,  1847;  12mo,  pp.  245. 


< 


% 


THE  SAMARITAN  DIALECT. 


151 


B.  The  Samaritan  Dialect. 

§  1.  The  Samaritan,  like  the  Rabbinic,  holds  a  place  between  Hebrew 
and  Chaldee.  See  above,  Intr.  2.  note  2.  A  brief  view  of  it  will  there¬ 
fore  be  appropriate  in  this  Appendix. 

§  2.  Its  characters  are  those  which,  among  all  the  oriental  alphabets, 
most  nearly  resemble  the  letters  found  on  ancient  Hebrew  coins ;  and  hence 
we  may  infer  were  essentially  the  same  with  the  Hebrew  letters  before 
the  Babylonish  captivity.  See  above,  Gram.  §  1.  They  are  as  follows  : 


A 

y 

13 

A 

3 

3 

n 

£ 

T 

b 

D 

¥ 

P 

T 

X 

b 

A 

n 

n 

XXX 

S. 

O)  b 

A 

n 

T 

0 

n 

V 

5? 

The  Samaritan  has  no  peculiar  forms  for  final  letters,  nor  does  it  ex¬ 
hibit  any  vowel  points. 

§  3.  The  following  are  the  principal  grammatical  peculiarities  of  this 
dialect. 

1.  Nouns  have,  as  in  Chaldee  and  Syriac,  an  Emphatic  State,  but  em¬ 
ploy  sjf  instead  of  in  forming  its  termination. 

2.  Masculine  nouns  usually  form  the  plural,  as  in  Hebrew,  by  the  ter¬ 
mination  j  although  plurals  ending  in  bffi  are  also  found.  Femi¬ 

nines  form  their  plurals,  like  the  Chaldee,  in  an,  but  written  bA  with  A 
as  a  mater  lectionis. 

3.  The  personal  pronouns,  both  separate  and  suffixed,  nearly  all  agree 
with  the  Hebrew ;  the  demonstrative  and  relative  with  the  Chaldee. 

4.  The  conjugations  of  verbs  are  the  same  as  in  Chaldee,  and  the  in¬ 
flection  almost  the  same  throughout. 

5.  Vav  conversive  is  not  found. 

6.  Their  punctuation  is  peculiar.  A  single  dot  C)  is  placed  after 

*  This  form  of  the  letter  Nun ,  which  appears  in  some  alphabets,  seems  to  have 
been  invented  by  the  type-founders  to  get  rid  of  the  close  resemblance  between 
Nun  and  Pe.  It  is  not  sustained  by  MSS.  or  old  editions.  See  Walton,  Castell, 
Cellarius,  &c.  passim.  The  forms  of  Pe  and  Nun  are  confounded  in  the  Samaritan 
llphabets  given  in  several  of  our  Hebrew  grammars. 


152 


APPENDIX. 


every  word ;  two  dots  placed  horizontally  are  sometimes  employed 

for  a  colon ;  and  two  placed  perpendicularly  (l)  or  three  with 

or  without  additional  lines,  ( — •:)  0r  (=•:)  or  ( — <t)  for  a  period. 

§  4.  The  first  five  verses  of  Genesis,  taken  from  the  Samaritan  version 
of  the  Pentateuch,  may  serve  as  a  specimen  of  this  dialect.  As  it  is  with¬ 
out  points  I  will  place  the  pronunciation  in  Chaldee  letters  at  the  right. 


Samaritan  Text. 

•  t^4Z^  •  (l) 

•  •  Am  *  ?mA 
•Wirt*  (-0  :  WiA’Amt 
"fldSflm  •^•A-'u  At^f 

•  itda  •  zv  • 

•^?ua  -nmt 

•  /IDA  *  ZV  ’ 

•s^ZA  D^A*  (3)  :^m^ 

•  A-m  '  sraZA  '  (4) 

•““dazdv  'Az^r^^fS 

•  *  bma  *  ^za 

■sv^t  (5)  -hms* 

•^A'iTlA  *3CPJbZ  'WA 

•^cmzmz  *  *  wuuzt 

:  ^cra  *^razm 


Pronunciation. 


Ottbp 

nrmapa 

'  T  - 

r*>  nnbx 

—  tt’: 

nppxi 

r  : 

truna  rvn 

t  ;  -  -  ; 

•  *t  : 

n^xb  n^,n 

T  T  T 

‘’EX 

bp  nobm 

-  t  ;  t  : 

nnbx  n^ni  nioinn 

t  t  •  s  t  : 

*’BX 

bp  mnwE 

t  :  -  ; 

nnbx 

t  t  •: 

nr  :  n*tt 

x  *:  -  t  - 

:  ^r?5  njrn  ^3  •"00 
nnbx  nrm 

-  r  t  •:  t 

tthsx^nbKbnrnrw 
rnrg  ■pn  nnbx 
pptt  j  npbn  •psn 
ma^x  mrwb  nnbx 

t  ••  t  :  t  t  •: 

n^b  ppT  nsbnb^ 
i&smm  twinim 

-  :  t  -s-  -  :  t 

:  mn 

•  T  *•  ▼ 


Note.  The  first  word  is  imn>iX33p  contracted  from  nntix^p  beginning.  The 
second  is  a  quadriliteral  O^b;:  7*e  created ,  not  found  in  the  cognate  dialects. 
The  rest  of  these  five  verses  may  be  said  to  be  almost  entirely  Chaldee. 

§  5.  For  full  information  respecting  the  Samaritan  dialect  and  version 
Df  the  Pentateuch,  consult 

Io.  Morinus,  Opuscula  Hebreo-Samaritana. 

Walton,  Prolegomena  to  the  Polyglott  Bible,  ch.  11. 

Castell,  Heptaglott  Lexicon,  and  Grammar  prefixed. 

Chr.  Cellarius,  Horae  Samaritanae,  and 
Uhlemann,  Institutiones  Linguae  Samaritanae. 


THE  END. 


4 


Date  Due 


u  fl  u  tf  Xt, 

a  p  1 1 1  n 

,  •  p  4  g  i  v 

W*  * 

APR-3JU6 

N 

<f> 

.  Date  Due 

JA 1 2  '53 

f> 

* 


